IManager U2000 V200R015C60 Single-Server System Software Installation and Commissioning Gui

iManager System U2000 Unified Network Management V200R015C60

Single-Server System Software Installation and Commissioning Guide (Windows) Issue

04

Date

2 016- 06- 20

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2016. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Single-Server System Software Installation and Commissioning Guide (Windows)

About This Document

About This Document Related Version The following table lists the product version related to this document.

ProductName

Version

iManagerU2000

V200R015C60

Intended Audience This document describes how to install the U2000 and obtain the reference information required during the installation. This document is intended for: l

Technical support engineers

l

Maintenance engineers

l

Installation and commissioning engineers

Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol

Description Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


ii


About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury. Calls attention to important information, best practices and tips. NOTE is used to address information not related to personal injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items(keywordsor arguments)inbrackets[] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... } *

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ] *

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii


About This Document

Convention

Description

>

Multi-levelmenusarein boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Changes in Issue 04 (2016-06-20) Based on Product Version V200R015C60 The fourth commercial release has the following updates: Fixed some bugs.

Changes in Issue 03 (2016-03-31) Based on Product Version V200R015C60 The third commercial release has the following updates: Fixed some bugs.

Changes in Issue 02 (2016-01-15) Based on Product Version V200R015C60 The second commercial release has the following updates: Fixed some bugs.

Changes in Issue 01 (2015-10-30) Based on Product Version V200R015C60 Initial release.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


iv


Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Installation Overview................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 Networking Structure..................................................................................................................................................... 2 1.2 Configuration Requirements...........................................................................................................................................3 1.3 Restrictions on Installation and Commissioning............................................................................................................ 5

2 Installation and Commissioning Process................................................................................. 7 3 Installing the U2000.................................................................................................................... 10 3.1 Installation Preparations............................................................................................................................................... 12 3.1.1 Collecting Installation Information........................................................................................................................... 12 3.1.2 Checking Required Software.....................................................................................................................................16 3.1.3 Checking Hardware Connections.............................................................................................................................. 25 3.1.4 Applying for a U2000 License.................................................................................................................................. 28 3.2 Powering On a Server...................................................................................................................................................30 3.3 Configuring the iMana IP Address of Huawei server.................................................................................................. 32 3.3.1 Configuring the iMana IP Address Through iMana Management Interface.............................................................33 3.3.2 Configuring the iMana IP Address Through BIOS...................................................................................................35 3.4 Configuring the IMM IP Address.................................................................................................................................39 3.4.1 Configuring the IMM IP Address Through IMM Management Interface(IBM X3650 M4)....................................39 3.4.2 Configuring the IMM IP Address Through IMM Management Interface (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3) ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 43 3.4.3 Configuring the IMM IP Address Through BIOS.....................................................................................................46 3.5 Configuring the RAID..................................................................................................................................................51 3.5.1 Configuring the RAID in Remote Mode (Huawei RH series rack server, ISO)....................................................... 51 3.5.2 Configuring RAID in Remote Mode (IBM X3650 M4, ISO)...................................................................................56 3.5.3 Configuring RAID in Remote Mode (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3, ISO)..................................................63 3.5.4 Configuring the RAID in Local Mode (Huawei RH series rack server, Manually)..................................................70 3.5.5 Configuring the RAID in Local Mode (IBM X3650 M4, Manually)....................................................................... 82 3.5.6 Configuring the RAID in Local Mode (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3, Manually)...................................... 91 3.6 Installing a Windows 2008 Operating System and Patch ..........................................................................................101 3.6.1 Procedure for Installing the Windows 2008 OS...................................................................................................... 101 3.6.2 Activate the 2008 Windows OS...............................................................................................................................119 3.6.3 Verifying OS Installation.........................................................................................................................................120 Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


v


Contents

3.7 Installing the U2000 Server........................................................................................................................................120 3.7.1 Preparing Software Packages.................................................................................................................................. 120 3.7.2 Pre-installation Check (Windows 2008)..................................................................................................................122 3.7.3 Starting the U2000 Installation Program.................................................................................................................124 3.8 Loading a U2000 License...........................................................................................................................................134 3.9 Checking the Installation of the Single-Server System (Windows)........................................................................... 136 3.10 Fast Restoration Scheme for the U2000 Cold Backup System(Optional)................................................................140 3.10.1 Introduction to the Fast Restoration Scheme for the U2000 Cold Backup System.............................................. 140 3.10.2 Creating Backup and Restoration Tasks................................................................................................................143 3.10.2.1 Configuring Automatic Backup Tasks on the Primary Site................................................................................143 3.10.2.2 Configuring Automatic Restoration on the Secondary Site............................................................................... 147 3.10.3 Manually Execute Backup and Restoration Tasks.................................................................................................151 3.10.3.1 Executing Backup Tasks on the Primary Site.....................................................................................................151 3.10.3.2 Manually Execute Restoration Tasks on the Secondary Site..............................................................................153 3.10.4 Restoring the U2000 on the Secondary Site..........................................................................................................156 3.10.5 Switching to the Primary Site................................................................................................................................157

4 Commissioning the U2000....................................................................................................... 160 4.1 Commissioning Preparation....................................................................................................................................... 161 4.1.1 Obtaining Commissioning Parameters.................................................................................................................... 161 4.1.2 Checking Hardware Connections............................................................................................................................ 198 4.2 Performing Commissioning........................................................................................................................................201 4.2.1 Powering On a Server..............................................................................................................................................201 4.2.2 Configuring System Commissioning Parameters....................................................................................................203 4.2.3 Commissioning U2000 Parameters......................................................................................................................... 206

A FAQs............................................................................................................................................209 A.1 Windows OS..............................................................................................................................................................210 A.1.1 How to Add a Static Route..................................................................................................................................... 210 A.1.2 How to Convert the File System Type to NTFS.....................................................................................................210 A.1.3 How to Change the Password of the OS Administrator......................................................................................... 211 A.1.4 How to Configure the Remote Login to the Windows OS.....................................................................................212 A.1.5 How to Set the Virtual Memory to the System Managed Size............................................................................... 213 A.1.6 How to Check Whether an NIC Is Assigned Multiple IP Addresses (Windows).................................................. 213 A.1.7 How to Delete Unnecessary IP Addresses of an NIC (Windows)..........................................................................214 A.1.8 How to Query the Type of a Windows OS............................................................................................................. 214 A.1.9 How to Log In to the CLI on Windows.................................................................................................................. 215 A.1.10 How to Shut Down Automatic Update of the Windows OS................................................................................ 215 A.1.11 How to Identify the Network Connection Name Associated with the NMS Application IP Address on Windows .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 216 A.1.12 How Do I Manually Enable and Disable the FTP Service on a Server?.............................................................. 216 A.1.13 How to Configure the minasshd Encryption Algorithm.......................................................................................217 A.1.14 How to Change the Password for the Windows OS User ossuser?..................................................................... 219 A.1.15 How to Change the Password for the Windows OS User dbuser?......................................................................219 Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


vi


Contents

A.1.16 How to Change the Password for the Windows OS User ftpuser?......................................................................220 A.2 System Settings of the Huawei RH series rack server...............................................................................................221 A.2.1 How Do I Use iMana IP to Log In to a Remote Huawei RH series rack server.................................................... 221 A.2.2 How to View the IP Address of the iMana on the Huawei RH series rack server................................................. 222 A.2.3 How to Change the Password of iMana User Root................................................................................................ 224 A.2.4 How to Solve iMana Problems...............................................................................................................................225 A.2.5 Formatting disks (Huawei RH series rack server)..................................................................................................228 A.2.6 Viewing Hard Disk Information (Huawei RH series rack server)..........................................................................232 A.3 System Settings of the IBM Server........................................................................................................................... 235 A.3.1 How to Solve the Problem Where the Remote Control Desktop Appears and Then Disappears Immediately..... 236 A.3.2 How do I use an IMM IP address to remotely log in to an IBM server (IBM X3650 M4)....................................237 A.3.3 How to Use an IMM IP Address to Remotely Log In to an IBM Server(IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3). 239 A.3.4 How to View the IMM IP Address on the IBM Server.......................................................................................... 241 A.3.5 How to Change the Password of the IMM User USERID(IBM X3650 M4).........................................................245 A.3.6 How to Change the Password of the IMM User USERID(IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3)........................248 A.3.7 How to Solve IMM Problems.................................................................................................................................249 A.3.8 Viewing Hard Disk Information in Local Mode (IBM Server)..............................................................................251 A.3.9 Viewing Hard Disk Informationin Remote Mode (IBM X3650 M4).....................................................................252 A.3.10 Viewing Hard Disk Informationin Remote Mode (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3)..................................256 A.3.11 Formatting disks in Local Mode (IBM Server).................................................................................................... 260 A.3.12 Formatting the disks in Remote Mode (IBM X3650 M4)....................................................................................265 A.3.13 Formatting the disks in Remote Mode (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3)...................................................272 A.3.14 How to Configure the HTTPS on the IMM(IBM X3650 M4)............................................................................. 279 A.3.15 How to Configure the HTTPS on the IMM(IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3)............................................281 A.4 SQL Server Database.................................................................................................................................................283 A.4.1 How to Check Whether the SQL Server Database Has Been Installed..................................................................283 A.4.2 How to Shut Down the SQL Server Database........................................................................................................284 A.4.3 How to Start the SQL Server Database.................................................................................................................. 284 A.4.4 How to Change the sa User Password If the U2000 Is Not Installed..................................................................... 284 A.4.5 How to Check Whether the SQL Server Database Can Be Sorted in Binary Mode.............................................. 285 A.4.6 How to Manually Uninstall the SQL Server Database...........................................................................................286 A.4.7 How to Check the Name of the SQL Server Database Server................................................................................289 A.4.8 How to Check the Version of the SQL Server Database Server.............................................................................289 A.4.9 How to Create a Replacement User for the SQL Server 2008 Database Administrator sa User........................... 290 A.4.10 How Do I Change the IP Address Bound to an SQL Server Database Port to 127.0.0.1?...................................292 A.5 U2000 System............................................................................................................................................................293 A.5.1 How to Start the MSuite Client.............................................................................................................................. 293 A.5.2 How to End Processes on the MSuite Server......................................................................................................... 294 A.5.3 Changing the Password of the MSuite....................................................................................................................295 A.5.4 Starting the Process of the MSuite Server.............................................................................................................. 295 A.5.5 How to Verify That the Processes of the U2000 Single-Server System Are Running on Windows......................296 A.5.6 How to Start the Processes of the U2000 Single-Server System on Windows...................................................... 297

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


vii


Contents

A.5.7 How to End the Processes of the U2000 Single-Server System on Windows........................................................298 A.5.8 How to Determine Which Types of Software Are Preinstalled..............................................................................300 A.5.9 Which Installation Packages Are Required for U2000 Installation........................................................................300 A.5.10 How to Handle the Problem Wherein the System Displays a Message Indicating That the Client Installation Packages and Basic Packages Cannot Exist at the Same Time During Decompression..................................................306 A.5.11 How to Check Downloaded Software Packages Using HashMyFiles Software.................................................. 306 A.5.12 How Do I Verify Downloaded Software Packages Using the PGPVerify Software?...........................................307 A.5.13 How to Set the Communication Mode on the U2000 server for the Single-Server System (Windows)..............311 A.5.14 Failure to Log In to the Database......................................................................................................................... 312 A.5.15 How to Burn the ISO File to DVD....................................................................................................................... 315 A.5.16 How to Check the U2000 Version........................................................................................................................ 316 A.5.17 How to Configure the FTP or SFTP Service on Windows OS.............................................................................317 A.5.18 How to Resolve the U2000 SyslogCollectorDM Service Startup Failure Due to a Port Conflict....................... 319 A.5.19 How Do I Obtain Third-Party Software and Hardware Materials?......................................................................320 A.5.20 How to Query Information About the Software and Hardware Installation and ESNs of a Huawei Rack Server .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 324 A.5.21 How Do I Change an H2 Database User's Password?..........................................................................................325 A.5.22 How Do I Change an H2 Database User's Password for the U2000 Guard?....................................................... 327 A.6 Install the U2000 Software Exception Processing ....................................................................................................329 A.6.1 How do I solve the problem where a failure message is displayed during the installation or the installation is abnormally interrupted..................................................................................................................................................... 329 A.6.2 Failure to Log In to the U2000 Server from a U2000 Client..................................................................................330 A.6.3 How to Resolve the Problem that the License Does Not Take Effect.................................................................... 333 A.6.4 How to Solve Common Problems About Using the Network Mode to Installing a U2000 Client........................333 A.6.5 How to Rectify the Failure to Open the CAU Download Web Page Because the Port Is Used.............................336 A.6.6 How to Process the Message Displayed During Installation of the U2000, Indicating That a Suspended File Has Been Created.....................................................................................................................................................................336 A.6.7 How to Process the Message Displayed During Installation of the U2000, Indicating That ISQL Connection Check Fails....................................................................................................................................................................... 337 A.6.8 How to Resolve the Problem that the Database Installation File Is Not Found During Installation......................337 A.6.9 How to Resolve the Problem Wherein the Message "PATH environment's length is too long" Is Displayed During Installation........................................................................................................................................................................ 338 A.6.10 How Do I Rectify the Fault Where the Environment Variable Information About the SQL Server Database Is Abnormal During U2000 Pre-Installation Check.............................................................................................................338 A.6.11 How to Address the U2000 Installation or Uninstallation Failure....................................................................... 339 A.6.12 How to Solve the Problem Where the Error 1935 Alarm Is Generated During the Installation of the vcredist_x86.EXE or vcredist_x64.EXE Patch..............................................................................................................340 A.6.13 How Do I Resolve the Problem Where the Installation File Fails to Be Executed After the U2000 Installation Package Is Decompressed?...............................................................................................................................................341

B Uninstalling the U2000 Server................................................................................................342 B.1 Uninstallation Preparations........................................................................................................................................343 B.2 Uninstallation Procedure............................................................................................................................................344 B.3 Verifyingthe U2000 Server Uninstallation................................................................................................................345

C Manual Commissioning Task................................................................................................ 347 Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


viii


Contents

C.1 How to Change the System Time and Time Zone of the Single-Server System on Windows..................................348 C.2 How to Change the Host Name of the Single-Server System (Windows 2008)........................................................348 C.3 How to Change the IP Address of the Single-Server System (Windows 2008)........................................................ 350 C.4 Configuring a Digital Certificate............................................................................................................................... 353 C.4.1 Replacing SSL Certificates Used for the U2000 Server.........................................................................................353 C.4.2 Replacing SSL Certificates Used for the Communication Between the U2000 and uTraffic................................357 C.4.3 Deploying the SSL Trust Certificate on the Internet Explorer............................................................................... 361 C.5 Configuring and Testing the FTP Service..................................................................................................................362 C.5.1 Overview of the FTP Service Used by the U2000..................................................................................................362 C.5.2 Procedure for Configuring and Testing the FTP Service on the U2000................................................................. 370 C.5.3 Checking the Startup Status of FTP Servers (Windows)........................................................................................ 371 C.5.4 Creating an FTP User..............................................................................................................................................373 C.5.5 Creating an FTP Account and Adding it to an FTP Application............................................................................374 C.5.6 Testing the FTP Service.......................................................................................................................................... 377

D Starting the U2000 Server in a Windows Single-Server System..................................... 378 D.1 Powering On the Server Safely..................................................................................................................................379 D.2 Starting the Database................................................................................................................................................. 380 D.3 Starting the U2000 Server Processes.........................................................................................................................381

E Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows).............................384 E.1 Stopping the U2000 Server Processes........................................................................................................................385 E.2 Shutting Down the Database......................................................................................................................................386 E.3 Powering Off the Server Safely................................................................................................................................. 387

F Glossary and Abbreviations....................................................................................................389

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


ix


About This Chapter

1

1 Installation Overview

Installation Overview

Before installing and commissioning the U2000, you must get an understanding of the software and hardware configuration requirements and networking requirements of the U2000 as well as the restrictions on installing and commissioning the U2000. 1.1 Networking Structure This topic describes the solutions that the U2000 supports as well as the networking of the single-server system (Windows) solution. 1.2 Configuration Requirements This topic describes the configuration requirements on the hardware and software of the server before installing the U2000. 1.3 Restrictions on Installation and Commissioning You must learn about the restrictions of the U2000 during the U2000 installation and commissioning.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


1



1.1 Networking Structure This topic describes the solutions that the U2000 supports as well as the networking of the single-server system (Windows) solution. The solutions can be classified into the following types based on OS type of the U2000 and whether the U2000 supports a high availability system. l

Single-Server System (Windows)

l l

Single-Server System (Solaris) Single-Server System (SUSE Linux)

l

single-server system (VMware, PC Server)

l

single-server system (VMware, E9000 blade server)

l

High Availability System (Solaris)

l

Local SUSE Linux High Availability System (PC server)

l

Remote SUSE Linux High Availability System (PC server)

This manual describes the installation and commissioning of the single-server system (Windows). Figure 1-1 shows the networking of the single-server system (Windows). Figure 1-1 Network diagram for a single-server system (Windows)

U2000 Server

Switch

Router

DCN

U2000 Client 1

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

U2000 Client N


2



Terms

To ensure the U2000 install successfully, definitions for terms as used in this document before introducing the U2000 scheme: l

Server: A server can refer to either hardware or software. In the client/server structure, a server refers to the server program. The term refers to hardware when used in reference to a computer where a server program runs.

l

Client: Refers to the client application of the software in a client/server structure. The client application can run on a computer along with the server application or on a separate computer. The term refers to hardware when used in reference to the computer where a client application runs.

l

Server and host: A server functions the same as a host. Generally, a server or host refers to the computer where services run in a Windows OS.

Networking Description:

The following describes the deployment of the U2000 server, U2000 client, switch, router, and gateway NEs, as well as the communication relationships. l

The U2000 client communicates with the server using a DCN.

l

NEs and the upper-layer NMS (OSS) communicate with the server using a DCN.

1.2 Configuration Requirements This topic describes the configuration requirements on the hardware and software of the server before installing the U2000.

Hardware Configuration The following table shows the configuration requirements on the hardware for the U2000 server. Table 1-1 Configuration requirements on the hardware for the U2000 server

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Network Scale

PC Server (Windows-Supported)

Small-scale network: less than 2000 equivalent NEs

RH2288H V2 l

CPU: 2 x Xeon 6Core 2.6 GHz or above

l

Memory: 32 GB or above

l

Hard disk: 8 x 300 GB or above


3



Network Scale

PC Server (Windows-Supported)

Medium-scale network: 2000-6000 equivalent NEs

RH5885H V3 l


l


l


NOTE The U2000 manages only access NEs. RH2288H V2 l


l


l


NOTE l

The preceding table shows the recommended delivery configuration. The compatible configuration varies according to managed NEs and network size. For details, see chapter Management Capabilities of the U2000 on Different Hardware Platforms in the U2000 Planning Guide.

l

For the incompatible servers with non-recommended configurations, you do not need to ensure that the U2000 can be properly installed, deployed, and operated on servers whose configurations are not compatible and recommended.

Software Configuration The following table shows the configuration requirements on the software for the U2000 server.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


4



Table 1-2 Configuration requirements on the software for the U2000 server

Configura tion Item

OS

Database

NMS software

Delivered software platform

Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard with SP1 (64-bit)

MS SQL Server 2008 SP3 Standard

U2000 software

NOTE l

The server OS can identify a memory with the size only of 32 GB or lower. If server the physical memory of the exceeds 32 GB, the OS can be installed properly, but only 32 GB memory can be identified and used.

l

Only a single OS can be installed, and the OS can be installed only on disk C.

l

If the OS is different from the OS patch versions on the live network, reinstalling the OS and patches of the required version is recommended to ensure that the U2000 runs properly. Perform the following steps for query the version of a Windows OS: 1. Log in to the OS as the dbuser. 2. Right-click Computerand choose Propertiesfrom the shortcut menu. 3. In the Systemdialog box, view the value of System type

NOTE

Third-party or incompatible OSs, such as Windows 7 , Windows XP , Windows 2003 and Windows Server 2008 Enterprise, cannot ensure normal installation, deployment, and operations on the U2000.

1.3 Restrictions on Installation and Commissioning You must learn about the restrictions of the U2000 during the U2000 installation and commissioning. Read carefully the following restrictions before installation and commissioning: l

To prevent program conflict, do not install the software that fails to pass the verification test in Huawei Lab on the U2000 server.

l

Only one U2000 can be installed on a server.

l

The U2000 software can be installed on the OS with either the simplified Chinese version or English version.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


5



l

A virtual machine supports the installation only of a single-server U2000 running on the SUSE Linux OS. The U2000 using other solutions cannot be installed on the virtual machine.

l

Installing the U2000 server software on Windows XP and Windows 7 are not supported.

l

The working temperature of the IBM server cannot exceed 41°C. Otherwise, the IBM server may be automatically stopped.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


6


2

2 Installation and Commissioning Process

Installation and Commissioning Process This topic describes the processes for installing and commissioning the single-server system (Windows) as well the time required for every operation. Usually, the server delivered by Huawei has been preinstalled and you do not need to reinstall the U2000 on the server. You can directly commission the U2000 and modify the system and U2000 parameters according to on-site requirements to allow for the normal use of the U2000. If the server has not been preinstalled by Huawei, install the U2000 and commission the system. A series of parameters need to be modified during commissioning. You must ensure that on-site parameters have been planned based on the U2000 Planning Guide before commissioning is performed. Figure 2-1 shows the installation commissioning process.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


7



Figure 2-1 Installation and commissioning flowchart for the single-server system (Windows)

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


8



NOTE

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l

The installation of the U2000 server software includes installing the database software. If the database has been installed on the system, check whether the database can meet U2000 installation requirements. If the database does not meet the installation requirements, uninstall and then reinstall it.

l

The database patch is required for the database installation on the Windows 2008 OS. The database patch software is stored in the OS patch.

l

After the U2000 software is installed, manually install the SetWin software on U2000version_VPPSetwinV300R003C22SPC200.zip in order to enhance the security of the Windows OS. Refer to the installation guide delivered with the SetWin software.

l

After the U2000 is installed, refer to U2000 AntiVirus Software Deployment Guide (OfficeScan10.5) to install the antivirus software on the U2000 server in order to prevent virus attacks.


9


About This Chapter

3 Installing the U2000

3

Installing the U2000

This topic describes how to obtain the required reference information about U2000 installation and how to install the U2000. If the U2000 has been preinstalled, skip this topic and directly commission the U2000. For details about how to commission the U2000, see Commissioning the U2000. 3.1 Installation Preparations This topic describes the information to get familiar with before installing the U2000 server. You must collect installation information, check the required software, check hardware connections, and apply for a U2000 license. 3.2 Powering On a Server This topic describes how to power on a server and the position of a power button on a server. 3.3 Configuring the iMana IP Address of Huawei server The iMana is integrated with the Huawei RH series rack server. It is used to remotely manage the server. IP address of the iMana can be used to remotely log in to a PC server to manage and maintain PC server in Web mode. Forexample, you can use this IP address for remote OS installation, or use it to maintain the PC server if the OS fails to start properly. Two modes of configuring the iMana IP address are available: through iMana management interface and through BIOS. 3.4 Configuring the IMM IP Address The IMM (Integrated Management Module) is integrated with the IBM X series servers. It is used to remotely manage the server. IP address of the IMM can be used to remotely log in to a PC server to manage and maintain PC server in Web mode. For example, you can use this IP address for remote OS installation, or use it to maintain the PC server if the OS fails to start properly. Two modes of configuring the IMM IP address are available: through IMM management interface and through BIOS. 3.5 Configuring the RAID The RAID needs to be configured before an operating system is installed in order to improve the efficiency and security of using server hard disks. 3.6 Installing a Windows 2008 Operating System and Patch This topic describes how to install Windows 2008 OS and patch, and then verify the installation of OS to ensure proper U2000 installation. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


10



3.7 Installing the U2000 Server This topic describes the pre-installation checks, how to install the U2000 server, involving the U2000 server installation and installation checks. 3.8 Loading a U2000 License This topic describes how to load a U2000 license. Before using a U2000, you must load a U2000 license. 3.9 Checking the Installation of the Single-Server System (Windows) This topic describes how to check the installation of the Single-Server System (Windows). Ensure that the Single-Server System (Windows) was properly installed before using it to manage a network. 3.10 Fast Restoration Scheme for the U2000 Cold Backup System(Optional) The fast restoration scheme for the U2000 cold backup system automatically backs up data and files on the primary site and restores the data and files on the secondary site. When the primary site malfunctions, the secondary site fast takes over network monitoring. The following introduces the realization process of this scheme.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


11



3.1 Installation Preparations This topic describes the information to get familiar with before installing the U2000 server. You must collect installation information, check the required software, check hardware connections, and apply for a U2000 license.

3.1.1 Collecting Installation Information This topic describes how to collect installation information. Before installation, collect required information, including the host name, IP address, time zone and time, user password, and Disk Partition Scheme. Complete planning for the information listed in the following tables according to the U2000 Planning Guide. NOTE

Print the following tables and fill in the blanks with the site-specific planning information. Examples provided in the tables are the default values of servers that come pre-installed with software from Huawei.

Host Name Planning Table 3-1 Host name list

Item

Example

Server

NMSserver

Plan

NOTICE To ensure that the NMS can run properly, host name planning must comply with the following rules and restrictions: l

The host name of the U2000 server must be unique on the network.

l

The host name must be a string consisting of no more than 30 characters that can only be letters (A to Z, or a to z), digits (0 to 9) and hyphen (-).

l

The first character must be a letter and the last character cannot be a hyphen.

l

The host name cannot contain --.

l

The host name must be case-sensitive.

l

The host name cannot be empty or contain spaces.

l

The host name cannot contain only one character.

IP Address Planning The following types of IP addresses need to be planned: Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


12



l

IP address of the IMM (Integrated Management Module) on the PC server: For IBM server, IP address of the IMM can be used to remotely log in to a PC server to manage and maintain PC server in Web mode. For example, you can use this IP address for remote OS installation, or use it to maintain the PC server if the OS fails to start properly.

l

IP address of the iMana on the PC server: For Huawei RH series rack server, IP address of the iMana can be used to remotely log in to a PC server to manage and maintain PC server in Web mode. For example, you can use this IP address for remote OS installation, or use it to maintain the PC server if the OS fails to start properly.

l

System IP address: This IP address can be used to log in to the server for OS management and maintenance as well as the U2000 communication, for example, the communication between the U2000 server and client and between the U2000 server and NEs.

Table 3-2 System IP address list

Item

Example

IMM/iMana IP address

10.9.1.20/255.255.255.0/10.9.1. 254

System IP address

10.9.1.1/255.255.255.0/10.9.1.2 54

Plan

NOTE l

The IMM/iMana IP address and system IP address can be located either on the same network segment or on different network segments.

l

The IP address is in the format of IP address/subnet mask/gateway .

l

Planning Principles for IP Addresses are: l

The IP addresses must be unique on the network.

l

The U2000 servers communicate with U2000 clients in the normal state.

l

You can plan only one IP address for one network interface. It is not allowed to plan or set multiple IP addresses for the same network interface. If multiple IP addresses are configured for the same network interface on the server, back up the current IP address and delete all the IP addresses except the primary IP address. After the U2000 is installed, add the deleted IP addresses.

Time Zone and Time Planning Table 3-3 Time zone and time list

Item Timezone

Time

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Example

Plan

(UTC +08:00)Beijing,Chongqing,Hon gKong,Urumqi 14:00


13



User Name and Password Planning

NOTICE The passwords are examples only. To ensure system security, change the password promptly, update it periodically, and save it properly. The default password indicates the initial password used when the U2000 is installed for the first time. Production preinstallation indicates the U2000 software has been installed initially.

Table 3-4 User and password list

User

DefaulPt assword

OS user administrator

Changeme_123 NOTE

Passw ord Set After Preinst allatio n

Planne d Passwo rd

Change me_123

During OS installation, a message will be displayed asking you whether to set the password for the OS user administrator .

OS user

Changeme_123

ossuser

Change me_123

OS user dbuser

Changeme_123

Change me_123

OS user ftpuser

Changeme_123

Change me_123

IMM user USERID

PASSW0RD

PASSW 0RD

NOTE The sixth character is digit 0 but not letter O.

iMana user root

Huawei12#$

Huawei 12#$

Database user sa

Changeme_123

Change me_123

Database user dbuser

None.

Change me_123

NOTE The dbuseruser does not have a default password. The password of the dbuseruser must be configured during U2000 installation.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


14


User

DefaulPt assword

H2 database user dbuser

Changeme_123 NOTE


Passw ord Set After Preinst allatio n

Planne d Passwo rd

Change me_123

H2 database is used to store U2000 Guard alarm information. To change the H2 database password, see How Can I Change the Password of the H2 Database? .

H2 database user ossuser

Changeme_123 NOTE

Change me_123

The H2 database is mainly used to store data of NBI configuration items. To change the H2 database password, see How Do I Change an H2 Database User's Password for the U2000 Guard? .

Customized database administrator

Same as the sa password when the sa user is disabled.

Change me_123

NOTE In order to enhance the security of the database after the U2000 is installed, the sa user may be manually disabled and replaced with a customized administrator name, such as dbadmin.

U2000 user

Changeme_123

Admin_

admin

NOTE

123

Msuite user admin

l

You must change the default password during firsttime login.

l

The password for the U2000 System Monitor must be the same as that for the U2000 client.

Changeme_123 NOTE

Change me_123

You must change the default password during first-time login.

Disk Partition Scheme

NOTICE Partition OS disks according to the recommendations mentioned in the following table. If disks are not partitioned as planned, for example, the Windows OS is installed in disk D, the U2000 installation or uninstallation fails.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


15



Table 3-5 Server disk partition list (A single hard disk is 300 GB)

Partition

Size(GB)

DiskC

100

DiskD

Sizeofthe remaining space

Description ItisusedtoinstalltheOSanddatabase software. It is used to install the U2000 software, store the database data and store the backup data for the U2000.


Partition

Size(GB)

Description

DiskC

40

ItisusedtoinstalltheOSanddatabase software.

DiskD

100

ItisusedtoinstalltheU2000softwareand store the database data.

DiskE

Sizeofthe remaining space

It is used to store the backup data for the U2000.


Partition DiskC

Size(GB) 80

Description ItisusedtoinstalltheOS,databaseandU2000 software.

NOTE

You must specify the principles and scheme for disk partitioning before installing the U2000 server. For details about how to set the Windows virtual memory to the system managed size, seeA.1.5 How to Set the Virtual Memory to the System Managed .Size The basic principles for disk partitioning are as follows: l

Disk C, as the system disk, is used to install the OS and database software.

l

Disk D is used to install the U2000 software and store the database data.

l

The remaining space is allocated for free use. It can be used for NMS data backup.

3.1.2 Checking Required Software This topic describes the software required to be checked. Ensure that the required software is on-hand and meets the installation requirements before installing the U2000. Installation engineers can install the U2000 in either of the following ways: l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Using software packages: Required software packages must be on-hand. Only Huawei engineers have the permissions to download software packages. If the installation using software packages is required, contact Huawei engineers to obtain software packages. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Single-Server System Software Installation and Commissioning Guide (Windows) l


Using DVDs: Required DVDs must be on-hand. The DVDs are delivered along with the product.

Using Software Packages Ensure that the ServerGuide boot disk, windows OS installation DVD and software packages are on-hand before installing the U2000. Perform the following operations: NOTE

If the Read Me_U2000 Version(English) file exists, read the Read Me_U2000 Version(English) file before downloading the software packages. The Read Me_U2000 Version(English) file is stored in the same path as software packages.

1.

2.

Contact a Huawei engineer to download the software packages. –

For carrier, Log in to http://support.huawei.com/carrier. Search for U2000 and select iManager U2000 in the search box on the Software tab and select a desired version.

–

For enterprise, Log in to http://support.huawei.com/enterprise. Search for U2000 and select iManager U2000 in the search box on the Support tab. Then, click Downloads and select a desired version.

Download re quired software packages listed in Table 3-8. It is recommended that you use the download tool (for example, NetAnts). If you use Windows Internet Explorer, some software packages may be renamed automatically after being downloaded to the local computer. In this case, you must manually change the software package names to the same as those on the http://support.huawei.com/carrier. NOTE

The PGP verification file of the software file in the .asc format must be obtained by clicking the in the Operationcolumn at the same time. For example, the software package is , the corresponding PGP verification file is U2000version_server_nmsbase_win32_x86.7z . U2000version_server_nmsbase_win32_x86.7z.asc

3.

Use the PGPverify to verify correctne ss of the software packages. For details, see A.5.12 How Do I Verify Downloaded Software Packages Using the PGPVerify Software?.

4.

Obtain the 7-zip software. Use the 7-zip tool to decompress the software packages, obtain the 7-zip tool with the latest version from Web site http:// downloads.sourceforge.net/sevenzip and install the tool. For more information about software operation, see the software Help or go to the official website of the software for technical support.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


17



NOTE l

The Windows OS can be installed only by using DVDs. Therefore, if you install the U2000 by using software packages, ensure that the Windows OS installation DVD is available. The installation DVD must be kept properly. If it is lost, the customer needs to purchase it a gain.

l

The .iso file of ServerGuide DVD-ROM is archived in http://support.huawei.com/carrier . You can contact Huawei engineers to log in to the website to download the ServiceGuide disk. The support path: Tools> Controlled Tool(Mini-tool Software) > Network OSS&Service > Universal . OS& Patches> Windows> IBM_ServerGuide

l

The files in the ServiceCD of the Huawei RH series rack server are archived in Support website. Perform the following operations to obtain the ISO files: 1. Log in to http://enterprise.huawei.com . 2. Choose SUPPORT> Servers. 3. Choose Solution and Software > FusionServer Tools > Downloads> V100R002C00> V100R002C00SPC300 . 4. Download the FusionSe rver Tools-ServiceCD2.0-V109.zip software packages. 5. Use the PGPverify to verify correctness of the softw are packages. For details, see A.5.12 How Do I Verify Downloaded Software Packages Using the PGPVerify Software? .

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l

In an installation DVD or installation package,versionindicates the detailed version number of the software.

l

The commonly used recording software is Nero. Nero 8 is used as an example here. To ensure that the contents of the burnt DVD are the same as those in the ISO file, select theVerify data on disc . after burningcheck box. For details, see How to Burn the ISO File to DVD


18



Table 3-8 Software package list

Softwar e Type

Softwar e

MediumName

Thirdparty software package

OS DVDROM +OS patch package

Standard deliver: Windows 2008 OS Prepare the following items before installing the Windows 2008 OS is installed: 1. OS DVD-ROM: Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard (64-bit version) 2. OS patch software: U2000version_server_Wind ows2008_ospatch_en_win64 _x86.zip

Description Optional These items must be obtained for the installation of the Windows 2008 OS and OS patch. NOTE After Windows 2008 is installed, it needs to be activated. The product key required for activating Windows 2008 is recorded on the COA label delivered together with the OS software DVD. Obtain the label and keep it secure.

3. ServerGuide DVD-ROM of IBM Server: Download the ServerGuide_for_HW_Wi ndows2008.iso file and burn it to the DVD (selected when the IBM X3650 M4 server is used). 4. ISO files in the ServiceCD DVD-ROM of Huawei RH series rack server:FusionServer ToolsServiceCD2.0-V109.iso (selected when the Huawei RH series rack server is used).

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

ISO image file of the quick RAID configura tion DVD

l

For Huawei RH series rack server, the Win_server_raid_x64_for_ Huawei_dvd.iso file is must be ready.

l

For IBM server, the Win_server_raid_x64_for_ IBM_dvd.iso file is must be ready.

SetWin software

U2000version_VPPSetwinV300 R003C22SPC200.zip

Optional It is used to enhance the security of Windows system.

AntiVirus Software

U2000version_Trend_OfficeSca n10.5_win.zip

Optional In order to prevent virus attacks.


It must be available. It is used to configure RAID.

19


Softwar e Type


Softwar e

MediumName

Description

Database software

SQL Server standard edition (installing the database in the Windows Server 2008 OS): U2000version_server_sqlserver 2008_dbstd_en_win64_x86.zip

It must be available. It is used to install the database. Only an English OS, the database and U2000 only of the English version can be installed.

U2000

U2000

Basic components:

It must be available. It is used

software package

server software

U2000version_server_nmsbase _win32_x86.7z

to install the U2000.

Core components: U2000version_server_nmscore_ win32_x86.7z

It must be available. It is used to install the U2000.

Transport domain component: U2000version_server_nmstrans _win32_x86.7z

It is required only if the U2000 needs to manage Huawei transport equipment. Huawei transport equipment includes: l

MSTP equipment

l

WDM equipment

l

NA WDM equipment

l

Submarine equipment

l l

RTN equipment PTN equipment NOTE Software packages for the transport and IP components must be available so as to manage PTN 6900 series NEs.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


20


Softwar e Type

Softwar e

MediumName IP domain components: U2000version_server_nmsip_w in32_x86.7z


Description It is required only if the U2000 needs to manage Huawei IP equipment. Huawei IP equipment includes: l

ATN Series Equipment

l

Routers

l

Switches Metro service equipment

l

Access domain components: U2000version_server_nmsacces s_win32_x86.7z

ESN tool software

U2000version_ESN_win32_x8 6.zip

l

Broadband access equipment

l

VoIP gateways

l

Firewalls

l

Service inspection gateway

l

SVN equipment

l

Internet Cache System

It is required only if the U2000 needs to manage Huawei access equipment. Huawei access equipment includes: l

FTTx equipment

l

MSAN equipment

l

DSLAM equipment

l

BITS equipment

The ESN tool is required only when you apply for the U2000 License before installing the U2000. NOTE The tool is a software package. It will not be delivered as a DVDROM. After the U2000 is installed, the ESN tool is available in the U2000 installation path. Therefore, to apply for the U2000 license after the U2000 is installed, use the ESN tool in this path directly.

Using DVDs Ensure that the following DVDs are on-hand before installing the U2000 by using DVDs.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


21



NOTE

The disk label delivered with the server is 1/3 if the mantissa of the disk name is dvd1; the disk label delivered with the server is 2/3 if the mantissa of the disk name is dvd2, and so on.

Table 3-9 DVD list

Software

MediumName

OS DVDROM+OS

Standard deliver: Windows 2008 OS

patch package

installing the Windows 2008 OS is installed:

Prepare the following items before

1. OS DVD-ROM: Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard (64-bit version) 2. OS patch DVD-ROM: U2000version_server_ospatch_w in64_x86_dvd1

Description Optional These items must be obtained for the installation of the

Windows 2008 OS and OS patch. NOTE

After Windows 2008 is installed, it needs to be activated. The product key required for activating Windows 2008 is recorded on the COA label delivered together with the OS software DVD. Obtain the label and keep it secure.

NOTE It contains the Windows OS patch and SQL Server database patch.

3. ServerGuide DVD-ROM of IBM Server: ServerGuide_for_HW_Windows 2008 (selected when the IBM X3650 M4 server is used) 4. ServiceCD DVD-ROM of Huawei RH series rack server: The ServiceCD DVD-ROM is delivered with Huawei RH series rack server. You can also obtain the FusionServer ToolsServiceCD2.0-V109.iso file and burn it into the DVDROM(selected when the Huawei RH series rack server is used). ISO image file of the quick RAID configurati on DVD

l

It must be available. It is used to For Huawei RH series rack server, the configure RAID. Win_server_raid_x64_for_Hua wei_dvd.iso file is must be ready.

l

For IBM server, the Win_server_raid_x64_for_IBM

Database software DVD

SQL Server standard edition (installing the database in the Windows Server 2008 OS): U2000version_server_dbstd_win64_ x86_dvd2

_dvd.iso file is must be ready.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)



22



Software

MediumName

Description

U2000 server software DVD

U2000version_server_nms_win32_x 86_dvd3

SetWin

U2000version_VPPSetwinV300R00

Optional It is used to enhance the

software AntiVirus Software

3C22SPC200.zip U2000version_Trend_OfficeScan10. 5_win.zip

security of Windows system. Optional In order to prevent virus attacks.

ESN tool software

U2000version_ESN_win32_x86.zip

The ESN tool is required only when you apply for the U2000 License before installing the U2000.


NOTE U2000 server software include SetWin software package, it is used to enhance the security of Windows system.

NOTE The tool is a software package. It will not be delivered as a DVD-ROM. After the U2000 is installed, the ESN tool is available in the U2000 installation path. Therefore, to apply for the U2000 license after the U2000 is installed, use the ESN tool in this path directly.

Obtaining Tools Table 3-10 shows the tools required to be available before the U2000 is installed. Table 3-10 Tool list

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

No.

Tool

Usage

Description

1

7-Zip tool

For extracting files.

Refer to http://downloads.sourceforge.net/sevenzip to download the latest version. For more information about software operation, see the software Help or go to the official website of the software http://www.7-zip.org/support.html for technical support.


23



No.

Tool

Usage

Description

2

ForIBM Server, JRE with the version of 1.8.0_65 .

on the PC or laptop, JRE is used to access the remote control desktop

l

If a JRE has been installed, run the java -version command in the CLI to view the JRE version. If a JRE has not been installed, running the command fails.

l

If the version of the installed JRE is not 1.8.0_65, downloading and installing JRE 1.8.0_65 is recommended. You can uninstall the existing JRE in Control Panel.

through IE.

l

If a message is displayed asking you to enter a user name and a password. Enter the user name administrator and the user password.

If the JRE version does not meet requirements, use any of the following methods to reinstall the JRE: l

Method one: Download the JRE 1.8.0_65 version from official websites http://www.java.com/en/ download/ie_manual.jsp? locale=en&host=java.com:80 of the third-party software and install it. For more information about software operation, see the software Help or go to the official website of the software http:// www.java.com/en/download/help/ for technical support.

l

Method two: Obtain the latest JRE version from the ISO image file Win_server_raid_x64_for_IBM_dvd.iso in the quick RAID configuration DVD-ROM. The procedure is as follows: 1. Copy and paste the ISO image file in the quick RAID configuration DVD-ROM to the PC or laptop. 2. Right-click the ISO image file and choose 7-zip > Open archive from the shortcut menu. 3. Double-click the executable file in the Java_jre directory.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


24



No.

Tool

Usage

Description

3

PGPveri fy tool

Download software compressio n package used to verify the correctness .

Refer to http://support.huawei.com/carrier/ digitalSignatureAction to download the latest version. 1. Download and decompress the PGPverify tool. l

For carrier: visit http://support.huawei.com/ carrier/digitalSignatureAction to download the OpenPGP Signature Verification Guide package and decompress it. Continue to decompress the VerificationTools.zip package in the current folder.

l

For enterprise: visit http://support.huawei.com/ enterprise/toolNewInfoAction!showDetail? pid=8221819&show=showServiceDetail&versio nid=TV1000000016 to download and decompress the VerificationTools.zippackage.

2. Go to the VerificationToolsfolder that is generated after decompression and obtain different versions of verification tools for different OSs. 3. KEYS is the public key file.

3.1.3 Checking Hardware Connections This topic describes how to check hardware installation and cable connections before installing a U2000. If hardware is improperly installed or cable is improperly connected, unexpected error may occur during installation of the U2000.

Prerequisites The server hardware must have been installed and equipment cables must have been connected, for details, see U2000 Hardware Installation Guide (Huawei N610E cabinet).

Procedure Step 1 Ensure that the power cables and ground wires for all components are tightly connected and in good contact and that the polarities are properly placed. NOTE

Generally, the server has two or more power modules which are used to provide power supply protection. Connect each power module to a specific power input. For details, see U2000 Hardware Installation Guide (Huawei N610E cabinet).

Step 2 Ensure that all cables are bundled and free of visible damage. Step 3 Check hardware connections and network cables according to the hardware connection diagram.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


25



NOTE

Connect the network interface that is configured with a system IP address during pre-installation to the network. If the network interface is not connected to the network, the U2000 fails to network configurations or be started. Configuring the system IP address for the network interface with the smallest interface serial number is preferred. For example, the serial number of 1 can be used for the IBM X3650M4, IBM X3850X5, IBM X3650 M3 and Huawei RH series rack server. l

The following figures show hardware connections for the Huawei RH5885H V3 server. Figure 3-1 Hardware connection for the Huawei RH5885H V3 server

l


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


26


l


The following figures show hardware connections for the IBM X3650 M4 server. Figure 3-3 Hardware connection for the IBM X3650 M4 server

l


l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

The following figures show hardware connections for the IBM X3850 X5 server.


27



Figure 3-5 Hardware connection for the IBM X3850 X5 server

Step 4 Check the plugs and sockets. 1.

Ensure that the latches of cable plugs are locked fast.

2.

Ensure that the pins in each socket are complete and in good order. Curved pins may cause short circuits.

----End

Follow-up Procedure Ensure that all debris (cable straps, stubs, or moisture-absorbent packets) are picked up. Remove unnecessary items from the telecommunications room. The workbench must be neat and the movable floor must be level and clean.

3.1.4 Applying for a U2000 License The U2000 license file is used to control the functions and management capabilities of the U2000. If the license file is unavailable, you cannot log in to the U2000 client, but can log in to the MSuite.

Context l

The license file is not delivered to customers along with a U2000 installation DVD. Contact Huawei engineers to apply for a license according to the contract number and the equipment serial number (ESN) of the U2000 server.

l

An ESN is a string consisting of 40-digit numerals or letters obtained through encrypted calculation on the MAC addresses of the U2000 server network interface. The number of ESNs is the same as the number of MAC addresses on the U2000 server. The ESN for the USB interface of the IMM is also contained in the echo information. To avoid applying for a new license due to replacing certain network interface cards (NICs), save all the ESNs to ensure proper use of the U2000 license.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


28



A license needs to be bound to an ESN of the server. If an ESN is changed because an NIC or server is replaced, contact Huawei technical support engineers to apply for a new U2000 license.

Procedure Step 1 Obtain the contract number. Step 2 View ESNs. NOTE

If the U2000 has been installed, using the ESN tool of the U2000 to view the ESN is recommended. The directory of ESN tool of the U2000 is %IMAP_ROOT%\platform\bin . In the preceding directories, %IMAP_ROOT% represents the installation directory of the U2000. For example, D:\oss \server.

Mode 1: View the ESN using the ESN tool of the NMS after installing the U2000. On Windows, perform the following steps to obtain ESNs: 1.

Choose Start > Run.

2.

In the Run dialog box, enter cmd. A command line interface (CLI) is displayed.

3.

Run the following commands: >esn

A message similar to the following will be displayed: ESN0:EBB74B99612CEDC82AD0A59886EC5018CE44DDD4 ESN1:BDA706C825FE0543DC028209778AA66396545412 ESN2:E1B00EEF6947DD95687AA5C608B72ACC532AB2BD ESN3:F72F9EC08AEE78AA05A42EFD7BFD89F5E03139C4 .....

Mode 2: Use the ESN tool to generate ESNs before installing the U2000. 1.

You can contact Huawei engineers to obtain ESN tools. NOTE

Huawei engineers can go to http://support.huawei.com/carrier or http://support.huawei.com/ enterpriseto download the ESN tool delivered with the version. The ESN tool is named U2000version_ESN_win32_x86.zip. versionindicates the detailed version number of the U2000. For example, V200R015C60SPCxxx.

2.

Decompress the ESN tool package, and then double-click the esn.exe file to view ESNs. A message similar to the following will be displayed: ESN0:EBB74B99612CEDC82AD0A59886EC5018CE44DDD4 ESN1:BDA706C825FE0543DC028209778AA66396545412 ESN2:E1B00EEF6947DD95687AA5C608B72ACC532AB2BD ESN3:F72F9EC08AEE78AA05A42EFD7BFD89F5E03139C4 .....

Mode 3: Query information about the software and hardware installation and ESNs of a Huawei rack server at http://texpert.huawei.com/TExpert/Pages/PageContainer.htm. For details, see A.5.20 How to Query Information About the Software and Hardware Installation and ESNs of a Huawei Rack Server .

Step 3 Send the project contract number and the preceding server ESNs to Huawei engineers or a Huawei local office. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


29



NOTE

Huawei engineers access the http://license.huawei.com Web site according to the information you provide to apply for a license file. For details about how to apply for a license file, see the iManager U2000 License Instructionsarchived at http://support.huawei.com/carrier or http:// support.huawei.com/enterprise .

Step 4 Huawei engineers send the license file to you after obtaining it. The license file delivered along with the U2000 is in.dat format. ----End

3.2 Powering On a Server This topic describes how to power on a server and the position of a power button on a server. 1.

Power on a Huawei RH2288H V2/Huawei RH5885H V3/IBM X3650 M4/IBM X3650 M3/IBM X3850 X5 server.

NOTICE l

Huawei RH2288H V2/Huawei RH5885H V3 server supports 100 to 240 VAC input voltage.

l

IBM X3650 M4/IBM X3650 M3/IBM X3850 X5 server supports 100 to 132 VAC and 200 to 240 VAC input voltage.

l

Configure power supply based on the rated system power requirement, see U2000 Hardware Installation Guide (Huawei N610E cabinet). If the power supply is insufficient, the server automatically stops.

2.

Press the power buttons on the peripherals and monitor connected to a server.

3.

Wait 2 to 3 minutes. When the green indicator on the front panel of the server blinks every 1s, press the power button on the shelf of the server. NOTE

If the power button is steady on, the server has been successfully powered on. For details about IBM server indicators, see the manual for IBM servers or log in to the official IBM website. For details about Huawei server indicators, see the manual for Huawei servers or log in to the official Huawei website. For official websites of software and hardware documents, see A.5.19 How Do I Obtain Third-Party Software and Hardware Materials? .

The red boxes in the following figures show the positions of power buttons on Huawei RH2288H V2, Huawei RH5885H V3, IBM X3650 M4, IBM X3650 M3 and, IBM X3850 X5.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


30



Figure 3-6 Position of the power button on Huawei RH5885H V3 server


Figure 3-8 Position of the power button on IBM X3650 M4


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


31



Figure 3-10 Position of the power button on IBM X3850 X5

3.3 Configuring the iMana IP Address of Huawei server The iMana is integrated with the Huawei RH series rack server. It is used to remotely manage the server. IP address of the iMana can be used to remotely log in to a PC server to manage and maintain PC server in Web mode. For example, you can use this IP address for remote OS installation, or use it to maintain the PC server if the OS fails to start properly. Two modes of configuring the iMana IP address are available: through iMana management interface and through BIOS. If a server is not equipped with the KVM, the mode through iMana management interface is recommended. l

l

Through iMana management interface: –

Advantage: The Huawei RH series rack server does not need to be equipped with a monitor, mouse, or keyboard. Fewer operations are required, compared with the mode of using BIOS.

–

Disadvantage: The Internet Explorer may shut down automatically or not respond. The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: i.

Right-click the Internet Explorer icon on the taskbar to close the Internet Explorer. If the Internet Explorer is still open, stop the iexplore.exe process on the Processes tab page in the Task Manager.

ii.

Open the Internet Explorer.

Through BIOS: –

Advantage: No abnormality will occur if operations are performed correctly.

–

Disadvantage: The Huawei RH series rack server must be equipped with a monitor, mouse, and keyboard. More operations using the iMana management interface.are required, compared with the mode of

NOTE

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l

For more operations on the Huawei RH5885H V3 server, log in to the server's official website at http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/productsupport? lang=en&pid=9768163&idAbsPath=7919749|9856522|9856792|9768163 .

l

For more operations on the Huawei RH2288H V2 server, log in to the server's official website at http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/productsupport? lang=en&pid=9581539&idAbsPath=7919749|9856522|9856792|9581539 .


32



3.3.1 Configuring the iMana IP Address Through iMana Management Interface After an iMana IP address is set for a Huawei RH series rack server, you can remotely manage the server in Web mode. This topic describes how to configure the iMana IP address through iMana management interface.

Prerequisites l

A PC or laptop on which the Internet Explorer browser is installed is ready.

l

The version of the Internet Explorer browser must be 7.0, 8.0, or 9.0 and the Internet Explorer cannot be configured with a proxy server.

l

A network cable is available. As network interfaces on a Huawei RH series rack server are enabled with auto-negotiation, either parallel or crossover network cables can be used. NOTE

If an IE or Remote Virtual Console fault occurs in the iMana, see A.2.4 How to Solve iMana Problemsto rectify the fault.

Context l

The system allows a maximum of four users to log in concurrently, one user to use the Remote Control function at a time.

l

By default, the system timeout period is five minutes. That is, if you do not perform any operation on the Web UI within five minutes, you are logged out of the Web UI of the system in again.automatically. In this case, you need to enter the user name and password to log

l

The system locks a user if the user fails to enter a correct password for consecutive five times. The user is automatically unlocked five minutes later, and the administrator user can unlock the user in command line.

l

To ensure system security, change the initial password after the first login, and then change your password periodically.

Procedure Step 1 View the position of the iMana interface on the Huawei RH series rack server. A management network port for iMana is at the end of the Huawei RH series rack server. You can visit iMana through this port, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


33



Figure 3-11 Huawei RH5885H V3 Server

Figure 3-12 Huawei RH2288H V2 Server

Step 2 Use a network cable to connect the PC and the iMana management interface of the server. Step 3 Change the IP address and subnet mask of the PC. The IP address of the PC and the default IP address of the iMana must be in the same network segment. NOTE

The default IP address of the iMana is 192.168.2.100and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 . If the default IP address of the iMana is changed, see A.2.2 How to View the IP Address of the iMana on the Huawei RH series rack server .

Step 4 Run the Internet Explorer, and then enter "https://ipaddress" in the address box. NOTE

The ipaddress is the IP address of the iMana management network interface.

Step 5 In the displayed Warning dialog box, click Yes. Step 6 Enter the user name and password, choose whether to log in to the local computer or to the user domain. Then click Log In. NOTE

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l

Default user name: root.

l

Default password: Huawei12#$. If the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password. For details, see A.2.3 How to Change the Password of iMana User Root .


34



Step 7 Click the Network icon in the Common Operations area.

Step 8 Choose Manually Set an IP Address in the IPv4 area. Set the IP, the subnet mask, and the default gateway of the iMana as required.

Step 9 Click OK in the IPv4 area. NOTE l

The window stays at the page for changing IP, ignore it.

l

Type the new iMana IP in the address bar of Internet Explorer. The Web management page of iMana is displayed.

Step 10 Disconnect the iMana management interface of the server from the PC and connect the iMana management interface to the network. ----End

3.3.2 Configuring the iMana IP Address Through BIOS After an iMana IP address is set for a Huawei RH series rack server, you can remotely manage the server in Web mode. This topic describes how to configure the iMana IP address through BIOS.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


35



Prerequisites l

You must ensure that the server is connected to the KVM.

l

Use a network cable to connect the switch and the iMana management interface of the server.

Procedure Step 1 Press the power button to restart the PC server. Step 2 When the BIOS start page appears, press Delete until the BIOS Setup Utility program is started.

NOTE

If the BIOS password has been modified, a dialog box asking you to enter a password will be displayed during startup. Enter the required password to access the Setup Utilityapplication.

Step 3 Configure the IP address of the integrated management module (iMana). l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

On Huawei RH5885H V3 server, perform the following operations: a.

Choose Server Mgmt > BMC network configuration, and press Enter. The BMC network configuration page is displayed.

b.

Select IPv4 IP Source, and press Enter. The menu dialog box is displayed.


36


l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)



Choose Advanced > IPMI BMC Configuration, and press Enter. The IPMI BMC Configuration page is displayed.

b.

Select BMC Configuration, and press Enter. The BMC Configuration page is displayed.


37


c.


Select IPv4 IP Source, and press Enter. The menu dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Select Static, and press Enter. Step 5 Enter the planned iMana IP, subnet mask, and gateway in IPv4 IP Address, IPv4 Subnet Mask, and IPv4 Gateway Address respectively.

Step 6 Press Enter to accomplish the IP configuration of the iMana management module. Step 7 Press F10 and select Yes from the dialog box to save the configurations and quit the configuration page. ----End Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


38



3.4 Configuring the IMM IP Address The IMM (Integrated Management Module) is integrated with the IBM X series servers. It is used to remotely manage the server. IP address of the IMM can be used to remotely log in to a PC server to manage and maintain PC server in Web mode. For example, you can use this IP address for remote OS installation, or use it to maintain the PC server if the OS fails to start properly. Two modes of configuring the IMM IP address are available: through IMM management interface and through BIOS. If a server is not equipped with the KVM, the mode through IMM management interface is recommended. l

l

Through IMM management interface: –

Advantage: The IBM server does not need to be equipped with a monitor, mouse, or keyboard. Fewer operations are required, compared with the mode of using BIOS.

–

Disadvantage: The Internet Explorer may shut down automatically or not respond. The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: i.

Right-click the Internet Explorer icon on the taskbar to close the Internet Explorer. If the Internet Explorer is still open, stop the iexplore.exe process on the Processes tab page in the Task Manager.

ii.

Open the Internet Explorer.

Through BIOS: –

Advantage: No abnormality will occur if operations are performed correctly.

–

Disadvantage: The IBM server must be equipped with a monitor, mouse, and keyboard. More operations are required, compared with the mode of using the IMM management interface.

NOTE l

For more operations on the IBM X3650 M4 server, log in to the server's official website at http:// www-947.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/product/system_x/system_x3650_m4? . productContext=1128598353

l

For more operations on the IBM X3850 X5 server, log in to the server's official website at http:// www-947.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/documentation_expanded_list/hardware/systems/ system_x/system_x3850_x5 .

3.4.1 Configuring the IMM IP Address Through IMM Management Interface(IBM X3650 M4) After an IMM IP address is set for an IBM X series server, you can remotely manage the server in Web mode. This topic describes how to configure the IMM IP address through IMM management interface.

Prerequisites l


l


l

A network cable is available. As network interfaces on an IBM X series server are enabled with auto-negotiation, either parallel or crossover network cables can be used.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


39



NOTE

If an IE or Video Viewerfault occurs in the IMM, see A.3.7 How to Solve IMM Problems to rectify the fault.

Procedure Step 1 View the position of the IMM interface on the IBM server. The management interface SYS MGMT specific to the IMM is available at the rear of the server. You can use theSYS MGMT interface to access the IMM.

Step 2 Use a network cable to connect the PC and the IMM management interface SYS MGMT of the server.

Step 3 Change the IP address and subnet mask of the PC. The IP address of the PC and the default IP address of the IMM must be in the same network segment. NOTE

The default IP address of the IMM is 192.168.70.125and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 . If the default IP address of the IMM is changed, see A.3.4 How to View the IMM IP Address on the IBM Server .

Step 4 Enter the default IMM IP address on the Internet Explorer of the PC to access the IMM Web login window. NOTE

The IMM uses HTTP by def ault. To ensure system security, use HTTPS. For details about how to configure HTTPS, see A.3.14 How to Configure the HTTPS on the IMM(IBM X3650. M4)

Step 5 Enter an IMM user name and a password, and click Log In. NOTE l

The default user name is USERID.

l

The default password is PASSW0RD. Note that the sixth character is digit 0 but not letter O. If the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password. For details, see A. 3.5 How to Change the Password of the IMM User USERID(IBM X3650 . M4)

Step 6 Click IMM Management > Network.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


40



Step 7 In the dialog box, select Use static IP address from the Configure IP address settings dropdown list, set parameters in the Static IP Address Settings.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


41



Step 8 Click Apply.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


42



Step 9 In the Confirm Apply dialog box, click OK. Step 10 Click IMM Management > Restart IMM to restart the IMM. After the IMM is restarted, enter a new IMM IP address on the Internet Explorer address bar to access the IMM management web page. NOTE

During restart of the IMM, run the ping IMM IP address-t command on the CLI of the PC or laptop. If the IMM IP address can be pinged through, the IMM is successfully restarted. Restarting IMM takes about 3 minutes.

IMM management interface of the server from the PC and connect the IMM Step 11 Disconnect managementthe interface to the network. ----End

3.4.2 Configuring the IMM IP Address Through IMM Management Interface (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3) After an IMM IP address is set for an IBM X series server, you can remotely manage the server in Web mode. This topic describes how to configure the IMM IP address through IMM management interface.

Prerequisites l


l


l

A network cable is available. As network interfaces on an IBM X series server are enabled with auto-negotiation, either parallel or crossover network cables can be used. NOTE

If an Internet Explorer or Video Viewerfault occurs in the IMM, see A.3.7 How to Solve IMM Problemsto rectify the fault.

Procedure Step 1 View the position of the IMM interface on the IBM server. The management interface SYS MGMT specific to the IMM is available at the rear of the server. You can use theSYS MGMT interface to access the IMM. The following figure uses the IBM X3650 M3 as an example.

Step 2 Use a network cable to connect the PC and the IMM management interface SYS MGMT of the server. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


43



Step 3 Change the IP address and subnet mask of the PC. The IP address of the PC and the default IP address of the IMM must be in the same network segment. NOTE



The IMM uses HTTP by default. To ensure system security, use HTTPS. For details about how to configure HTTPS, see A.3.15 How to Configure the HTTPS on the IMM(IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3).

Step 5 Enter an IMM user name and a password, and click Login. NOTE l


l

The default password is PASSW0RD. Note that the sixth character is digit 0 but not letter O. If the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password. For details, see A. 3.6 How to Change the Password of the IMM User USERID(IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3).

Step 6 Click Continue to access the Integrated Management Module web page. NOTE

You do not need to set Inactive session timeout value . Keep the default value no timeout.

Step 7 Choose Network Interfaces from the navigation tree. In the right-hand pane, clear the selection of IPv6 Enabled, select Disabled - Use static IP Configuration from the DHCP drop-down list, set parameters in the Static IP Configuration area, and click Save.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


44



Step 8 In the Note dialog box, click OK. Step 9 Restart the IMM to make the changed IP address take effect. Choose Restart IMM from the navigation tree. In the right-hand pane, click Restart to restart the IMM. After the IMM is restarted, enter a new IMM IP address on the Internet Explorer address bar to access the IMM management web page.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


45



NOTE


Step 10 Disconnect the IMM management interface of the server from the PC and connect the IMM management interface to the network. ----End

3.4.3 Configuring the IMM IP Address Through BIOS After an IMM IP address is set for an IBM X series server, you can remotely manage the server in Web mode. This topic describes how to configure the IMM IP address through BIOS.

Prerequisites l

You must ensure that the server is connected to the KVM.

l

Use a network cable to connect the switch and the IMM management interface SYS MGMT of the server. (As network interfaces on an IBM X series server are enabled with auto-negotiation, either parallel or crossover network cables can be used.)

Procedure Step 1 Press the power button to restart the PC server. Step 2 After the IBM System X dialog box is displayed, wait about 1 minute until Setup is displayed.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


46



Step 3 Press F1 to select Setup, and press Enter.

Step 4 Use arrow keys to select System Settings, and press Enter. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

For IBM X3650 M3 or IBM X3850 X5, show as follows:


47


l


For IBM X3650 M4, show as follows:

Step 5 Use arrow keys to select Integrated Management Module, and press Enter. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)



48



Step 6 Use arrow keys to select Network Configuration press Enter and access the page for modifying the IMM IP address. l

For IBM X3850 X5, show as follows:

l


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


49



Step 7 Select Static IP in DHCP Control and enter the planned IMM IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address in IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.

Step 8 Optional: For IBM X3650 M3 or IBM X3850 X5, run the following steps. 1.

Use arrow keys to select Save Network Settings, and press Enter. The dialog box asking you to restart the IMM is displayed.

2.

Enter Y. The IMM reset command has been sent successfully dialog box is displayed.

3.

Press Enter to restart the IMM. NOTE


4.

Press Esc to exit Network Configuration.

5.

Press Esc to exit Integrated Management Module.

6.

Press Esc to exit System Settings.

7.

Press Esc to exit System Configuration and Boot Management. The Do you want to exit Setup Utility? dialog box is displayed.

8.

Enter Y to exit BIOS.

Step 9 Optional: For IBM X3650 M4, run the following steps. 1.

Use arrow keys to select Save Network Settings, and press Enter. The Network Settings have been saved successfully dialog box is displayed.

2.

Press Enter. Wait about 3 minutes for the changes to take effect. NOTE

Run the ping IMM IP address-t command on the CLI of the PC or laptop. If the IMM IP address can be pinged through, the changes take effect.

3.

Press Esc to exit Network Configuration.

4.

Press Esc to exit Integrated Management Module.

5.

Press Esc to exit System Settings.

6.

Press Esc to exit System Configuration and Boot Management. The Do you want to exit Setup Utility? dialog box is displayed.

7.

Enter Y to exit BIOS.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


50



NOTE

This operation takes wait about 30 seconds. Wait patiently.

----End

3.5 Configuring the RAID The RAID needs to be configured before an operating system is installed in order to improve the efficiency and security of using server hard disks. RAID is a technology used to combine multiple independent physical hard disks in various modes to form logical hard disk groups. A logical hard disk group provides storage capacity greater than that of a single hard disk and allows implementation of data redundancy protection.

3.5.1 Configuring the RAID in Remote Mode (Huawei RH series rack server, ISO) The RAID needs to be configured before an operating system is installed in order to improve the efficiency and security of using server hard disks.

Prerequisites l


l

The version of the Internet Explorer browser must be 7.0, 8.0, or 9.0 and the Internet

l

Explorer cannot be configured with a proxy server. The IP address of the iMana is available. For details about how to set the IP address of the iMana, see 3.3.1 Configuring the iMana IP Address Through iMana Management Interface.

l

ISO image file of the quick RAID configuration DVD Win_server_raid_x64_for_Huawei_dvd.iso must be ready.

l

Ensure that eight hard disks of the server are available. Otherwise, RAID configuration fails. For details, see A.2.6 Viewing Hard Disk Information (Huawei RH series rack server).

Context RAID is a technology used to combine multiple independent physical hard disks in various modes to form logical hard disk groups. A logical hard disk group provides storage capacity greater than that of a single hard disk and allows implementation of data redundancy protection. The standard Huawei RH series rack server for delivery is equipped with eight hard disks. The RAID level planning is as follows: Configure RAID 10+Hotspare (hot standby) l

The first, second, third, and fourth hard disks are configured as RAID 10.

l

The fifth and sixth hard disks act as the hot spare disks, and the remaining seventh and eighth hard disks for backup.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


51



NOTE l

Using an ISO image file of the quick RAID configuration DVD to configure a RAID is recommended because it improves the configuration efficiency and reduces misoperations.

l

If an Internet Explorer, two pointers, or Remote Virtual Console fault occurs in the iMana, see A. 2.4 How to Solve iMana Problems .

Procedure Step 1 Optional: If OS has been installed on the server, manually format disks; otherwise, OS installation will fail because the old (Huawei RH series rack server) . data is not clear. For details, see A.2.5 Formatting disks

Step 2 Save the ISO mirroring file to any directory on the PC or laptop. Step 3 Log in to the server. For details, see A.2.1 How Do I Use iMana IP to Log In to a Remote Huawei RH series rack server.

Step 4 Click

on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console.

Step 5 In the virtual disk dialog box, select Image File and click Browse. Step 6 In the Open dialog box, select the ISO file of the quick RAID configuration DVD Win_server_raid_x64_for_Huawei_dvd.iso and click Open.

Step 7 In the virtual disk dialog box, click Connect. If Connect is displayed as Disconnect, the virtual disk is connected to the server.

Step 8 Click

on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console and select Cold

Reset.

Step 9 In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes to restart the server. Step 10 Configure the server to start from the drive. l

On Huawei RH5885H V3 server, perform the following operations: After the server is started, press F11 or F3 (on Remote Keyboard). Wait about 3 minutes, the Please select boot device: window is displayed. NOTE

If a dialog box asking you to enter a password displayed during startup, enter the required password. The default password is Huawei12#$, if the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password.

a.

Due to different BIOS versions, the content display and operations on the Please select boot device: page may be different, as follows: n

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

If the BIOS is a new version, the following page is displayed.


52


n

b.

If the BIOS is an old version, the following page is displayed.

Boot from a DVD driver. n

n

l


If the BIOS is a new version: ○

Boot from a virtual drive: Select HUAWEI DVD-ROM VM 1.1.0 225, and press Enter.

○

Boot from a physical drive: Select P5: TSSTcorp CDDVDW SN-208DB, and press Enter.

If the BIOS is an old version: Select P5: TSSTcorp CDDVDW SN-208DB to

start from the drive and press Enter. On Huawei RH2288H V2 server, perform the following operations: a.

After the server is started, press F11. Wait about 3 minutes, the Boot Manager window is displayed. NOTE

If a dialog box asking you to enter a password displayed during startup, enter the required password. The default password is Huawei12#$, if the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


53


b.


Boot from a DVD driver. n

n

Boot from a virtual drive: Select HUAWEI DVD-ROM VM 1.1.0, and press Enter. Boot from a physical drive: Select SATA P5 TSSTcorp CDDVDW SN-208DB, and press Enter.

Step 11 Select Tecal RAID Config Tooland press Enter. Step 12 On Huawei RH5885H V3 server, wait about 5 minutes. On Huawei RH2288H V2 server, wait about 20 minutes. The RAID configuration is completed, as shown in the following figure.

Step 13 Press Enter. The system will automatically restart. Step 14 Click

on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console. Click Disconnect.

NOTICE If you don't click Disconnect, it will configure the RAID repeatedly.

Step 15 Check whether RAID configurations are correct. 1.

After the basic input/output system (BIOS) check is completed, the BIOS information about the RAID is displayed, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

This screen stays for a short period of time. Press Ctrl+H the moment you see Ctrl+H on the screen. If Ctrl+H is not pressed, restart the system.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


54


2.


Press Ctrl+H as prompted to access the Adapter Selection window. NOTE

Two pointers will be displayed. You can click on the toolbar above Remote Virtual Console and select the Single Mousecheck box to make only one pointer displayed in the window. To exit from the Remote Virtual Console , click Ctrl+Alt+Shift . To exit from the single-pointer mode, click

3.

and clear theSingle Mousecheck box.

–

On Huawei RH2288H V2 server, the following window is displayed.

–


Click Start to access the WebBIOS window of the RAID card. If the WebBIOS window displays information as shown in the following figure, the RAID configurations are correct. Otherwise, configure the RAID card again. –

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)



55

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Single-Server System Software Installation and Commissioning Guide (Windows) –



Step 16 Click Exit to exit the WebBIOS window. The Exit Application dialog box is displayed. Step 17 Click Yes, A dialog box is displayed.

Step 18 Restart the server. 1.

Click Reset.

on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console and select Cold

2.

In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes to restart the server.

----End

3.5.2 Configuring RAID in Remote Mode (IBM X3650 M4, ISO) This topic describes how to configure the RAID of IBM X3650 M4 in remote mode.

Prerequisites l l

A PC or laptop on which the Internet Explorer browser is installed is ready. The version of the Internet Explorer browser must be 7.0, 8.0, or 9.0 and the Internet Explorer cannot be configured with a proxy server.

l

The IP address of the IMM is available. For details about how to set the IP address of the IMM, see 3.4.1 Configuring the IMM IP Address Through IMM Management Interface(IBM X3650 M4).

l

ISO mirroring file of the quick RAID configuration DVD Win_server_raid_x64_for_IBM_dvd.iso must be ready.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


56



Ensure that eight hard disks of the server are available. Otherwise, RAID configuration fails. For details, see A.3.9 Viewing Hard Disk Informationin Remote Mode (IBM X3650 M4).

Context RAID is a technology used to combine multiple independent physical hard disks in various modes to form logical hard disk groups. A logical hard disk group provides storage capacity greater than that of a single hard disk and allows implementation of data redundancy protection. The standard IBM server for delivery is equipped with eight hard disks. The RAID level planning and partition rules are as follows: Configure RAID 10+Hotspare (hot standby) l


l


NOTICE l

Open one Video Viewer window on a PC or laptop. Open the Video Viewer window on a PC or laptop for each server when you operate multiple servers. Otherwise, the failure to open multiple Video Viewer windows on a PC or laptop or the failure that the Video Viewer window does not respond may occur.

l

If an Internet Explorer or Video Viewer fault occurs in the IMM, see A.3.7 How to Solve IMM Problems to rectify the fault. NOTE l

Using ISO mirroring file of the quick RAID configuration DVD to configure a RAID is recommended because it improves the configuration efficiency and reduces misoperations.

l

The operation snapshots in this topic vary according to the IBM WebBIOS versions and do not affect the RAID configuration. During the RAID configuration, use actual snapshots.

l

If no window is displayed after you click a button during the configuration, move the mouse and try again.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: If OS has been installed on the server, manually format disks; otherwise, OS installation will fail because disks are protection. For details, see A.3.12 Formatting the disks in Remote Mode (IBM X3650 M4) .

Step 2 Save the ISO mirroring file to any directory on the PC or laptop. Step 3 Open the Internet Explorer and enter the IMM IP address of the IMM in the address bar to access the page for logging into the IMM. NOTE


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


57





l


Step 5 Click Remote Control, select Use the ActiveX Client > Start remote control in single-user mode to access the remote control desktop.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


58



NOTE l

When logging in to the IBM server for the first time, perform the following operations: 1. Click Start remote control in single-user mode and wait about 2 minutes. In the dialog box asking you whether to install the IMM_KVMVM32.cab, click Install.

2. During the installation, click Run in the Warning-Security dialog box asking you whether to trust this site. l

Do not close the ActiveX KVM Client dialog box. Otherwise, the Video Viewerdialog box cannot be displayed.

l

If the remote control desktop appears and then disappears immediately, see A.3.1 How to Solve the to Problem Where the Remote Control Desktop Appears and Then Disappears Immediately solve the problem.

l

If Use the ActiveX Client is unavailable, just click Start remote control in single-user mode to access the remote control desktop.

l

Keep the default values of other parameters unchanged.

l

For the IBM X3650 M4 server, if CAPS is displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewer window, letters are entered in upper case; if CAPS is not displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewer window, letters are entered in lower case. The Caps indicator on the keyboard cannot indicate whether letters are entered in upper or lower case.

l

For the IBM X3650 M4 server, if NUM is displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewer window, digits can be entered; if NUM is not displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewerwindow, digits cannot be entered. The Num indicator on the keyboard cannot indicate whether the number keypad is available.

l

If a message is displayed indicating that the application is prohibited to run, chooseStart > Control dialog box, click the Securitytab, Edit Site List , Panel and click Java. In the Java Control Panel and Add, enter an iMana IP address, such as http://192.168.2.100 , and click OK. Click OK, restart the IE Explorer, and log in to iMana again.

Step 6 The desktop window Video Viewer is displayed, choose Tools > Launch Virtual Media from the main menu. The virtual media window is displayed.

Step 7 Load the installation DVD-ROM or ISO mirroring file. If the ISO mirroring file of the quick RAID configuration DVD-ROM is used, click Add Image to add the RAID DVD-ROM and select Map.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


59



NOTICE l

Do not close the window Virtual Media Session until the RAID is configured.

l

Do not close the desktop display window Video Viewer until all operations in the chapter are completed. You can operate the server using the desktop display window Video Viewer.

Step 8 Click Mount Selected to mount the ISO mirroring file of the quick RAID to the IMM. If Mount Selected changes into Unmount All indicating that the mount is complete.

Step 9 Choose Tools > Power > Reboot from the main menu to reboot the system.

NOTE l

If a message asking you whether to continue is displayed, click Yes.

l

If Rebootis unavailable, choose Tools> Power> On and then choose Tools> Power> Rebootto restart the system.

Step 10 After the IBM System X window is displayed, wait for about 2 minutes until Select Boot Device is displayed.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


60



Step 11 Press F12 to choose Select Boot Device. If you miss the F12, choose Tools > Power > Reboot from the main menu and click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed to reboot the IBM server.

Step 12 Use arrow keys to select CD/DVD and press Enter to start the system from the DVD-ROM.

Step 13 Wait about two minutes, the system restarts and the IBM ToolsCenter Customized Media window is displayed, and configure RAID automatically. NOTE

Do not perform any operation before the IBM ToolsCenter Customized Media page is displayed.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


61



Step 14 Wait about 20 minutes. The window for automatic RAID configuration stops, as shown in the following figure.

Step 15 Press Enter. The system will automatically restart. NOTE

When the system is restarting, in the Virtual Media Session window, if the Map for the ISO mirroring file of the quick RAID configuration DVD-ROM is still selected, clear the selection of Map. And click Exit to close the virtual media window.



2.

–

Wait about 5 minutes until BIOS information about the RAID is displayed. Do not perform any operation when the IBM System Xwindow is displayed.

–



Two pointers will be displayed. You can choose Tools> Single Cursorfrom the main menu to change to the single pointer mode. Select the pointer mode according to individual operation habits. To quit single pointer mode, press F12.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


62


3.


Click Start to access the WebBIOS window of the RAID card. If the WebBIOS window displays information as shown in the following figure, the RAID configurations are correct. Otherwise, configure the RAID card again.

----End

3.5.3 Configuring RAID in Remote Mode (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3, ISO) This topic describes how to configure the RAID of IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3 in remote mode.

Prerequisites l


l


l

The IP address of the IMM is available. For details about how to set the IP address of the IMM, see 3.4.2 Configuring the IMM IP Address Through IMM Management Interface (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3) .

l

ISO mirroring file of the quick RAID configuration DVD Win_server_raid_x64_for_IBM_dvd.iso must be ready.

l

Ensure that eight hard disks of the server are available. Otherwise, RAID configuration fails. For details, see A.3.10 Viewing Hard Disk Informationin Remote Mode (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3).

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


63



Context RAID is a technology used to combine multiple independent physical hard disks in various modes to form logical hard disk groups. A logical hard disk group provides storage capacity greater than that of a single hard disk and allows implementation of data redundancy protection. The standard IBM server for delivery is equipped with eight hard disks. The RAID level planning and partition rules are as follows: Configure RAID 10+Hotspare (hot standby) l The first, second, third, and fourth hard disks are configured as RAID 10. l


NOTICE l

Open one Video Viewer window on a PC or laptop. Open the Video Viewer window on a PC or laptop for each server when you operate multiple servers. Otherwise, the failure to open multiple Video Viewer windows on a PC or laptop or the failure that the Video Viewer window does not respond may occur.

l

If an Internet Explorer or Video Viewer fault occurs in the IMM, see A.3.7 How to Solve IMM Problems to rectify the fault.

NOTE l

Using ISO mirroring file of the quick RAID to configure a RAID is recommended because it improves the configuration efficiency and reduces misoperations.

l


l


Procedure Step 1 Optional: If OS has been installed on the server, manually format disks; otherwise, OS installation will fail because disks are protection. For details, see A.3.13 Formatting the disks in Remote Mode (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3) .

Step 2 Sve the ISO mirroring file to any directory on the PC or laptop. Step 3 Open the Internet Explorer and enter the IMM IP address of the IMM in the address bar to access the page for logging into the IMM. NOTE

The default IP address of the IMM is 192.168.70.125and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 . If the default IP address of the IMM is changed, see A.3.4 How to View the IMM IP Address on the . IBM Server

Step 4 Enter an IMM user name and a password, and click Login. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


64



NOTE l


l




Step 6 Enable remote control. Choose Tasks > Remote Control from the navigation tree. In the right-hand pane, click Use the ActiveX Client with Microsoft Internet Explorer > Start Remote Control in Single User Mode to access the remote control desktop. The remote control desktop consists of two parts: virtual media window and desktop display window.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


65



NOTE l



If the remote control desktop appears and then disappears immediately, see A.3.1 How to Solve the to Problem Where the Remote Control Desktop Appears and Then Disappears Immediately solve the problem.

l

If Use the ActiveX Client with Microsoft Internet Explorer is unavailable, just click Start Remote Control in Single User Mode to access the remote control desktop.

l


l

If a message is displayed indicating that the application is prohibited to run, chooseStart > Control Panel and click Java. In the Java Control Panel dialog box, click the Securitytab, Edit Site List , and Add, enter an iMana IP address, such as http://192.168.2.100 , and click OK. Click OK, restart the IE Explorer, and log in to iMana again.

Step 7 The desktop window Video Viewer is displayed, choose Tools > Launch Virtual Media from the main menu. The virtual media window is displayed.

Step 8 Load ISO mirroring file of the quick RAID configuration DVD-ROM. If the ISO mirroring file of the quick RAID configuration DVD-ROM is used, click Add Image to add the RAID DVD-ROM and select Map.

NOTICE l

Do not close the window Virtual Media Session until the RAID is configured.

l

Do not close the desktop display window Video Viewer until all operations in the chapter are completed. You can operate the server using the desktop display window Video Viewer.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


66



Step 9 Click Mount Selected to mount the ISO mirroring file of the quick RAID configuration DVD-ROM to the IMM.

Step 10 Choose Tools > Power > Reboot from the main menu to reboot the system.

NOTE l


l

If Rebootis unavailable, choose Tools> Power> On and then choose Tools> Power> Rebootto restart the system.

Step 11 After the IBM System X window is displayed, wait for about 2 minutes until Select Boot Device is displayed.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


67



Step 12 Press F12 to choose Select Boot Device. If you miss the F12, choose Tools > Power > Reboot from the main menu and click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed to reboot the IBM server.

Step 13 Use arrow keys to select CD/DVD Rom and press Enter to start the system from the DVDROM.

Step 14 Wait about two minutes, the system restarts and the IBM ToolsCenter Customized Media window is displayed, and configure RAID automatically. NOTE

Do not perform any operation before the IBM ToolsCenter Customized Media page is displayed.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


68



Step 15 Wait about 20 minutes. The window for automatic RAID configuration stops, as shown in the following figure.

Step 16 Press Enter. The system will automatically restart. NOTE

When the system is restarting, in the Virtual Media Session window, if the Map for the ISO mirroring file of the quick RAID configuration DVD-ROM is still selected, clear the selection of Map. And click Exit to close the virtual media window.



2.

–


–




Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


69


3.


Click Start to access the WebBIOS window of the RAID card. If the WebBIOS window displays information as shown in the following figure, the RAID configurations are correct. Otherwise, configure the RAID card again.

----End

3.5.4 Configuring the RAID in Local Mode (Huawei RH series rack server, Manually) The RAID needs to be configured before an operating system is installed in order to improve the efficiency and security of using server hard disks.

Prerequisites The server has been connected to the monitor, mouse, and keyboard properly.

Context RAID is a technology used to combine multiple independent physical hard disks in various modes to form logical hard disk groups. A logical hard disk group provides storage capacity greater than that of a single hard disk and allows implementation of data redundancy protection. The standard Huawei RH series rack server for delivery is equipped with eight hard disks. The RAID level planning is as follows: Configure RAID 10+Hotspare (hot standby) Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


70



l


l

The fifth and sixth hard disks act as the hot spare disks, and the remaining seventh and eighth hard disks for backup. NOTE l

The operation snapshots in this topic vary according to the WebBIOS versions and do not affect the RAID configuration. During the RAID configuration, use actual snapshots.

l


Procedure Step 1 Optional: If OS has been installed on the server, manually format disks; otherwise, OS installation will fail because the old data is not clear. For details, see A.2.5 Formatting disks (Huawei RH series rack server).

Step 2 Press the power button to restart the PC server. Step 3 Perform the following operations to configure the first to fourth hard disks as RAID 10: 1.

After the system BIOS self-check is complete, the BIOS information about the RAID card is displayed. NOTE

This screen stays for a short period of time. Press Ctrl+H the moment you see Ctrl+H on the screen. If Ctrl+H is not pressed, restart the server.

2.

3.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Press Ctrl+H to access the WebBIOS configuration window for the RAID card. –


–


Select the RAID card adapter to be configured and click Start to access the configuration window.


71



NOTE

The snapshot information in the configuration window is similar to the following. You do not need to focus on the snapshot information. You only need to en sure that theConfiguration Wizard option exists in the navigation tree.

4.

Click Configuration Wizard. The following dialog box is played.

5.

Select New Configuration and click Next to access t he RAID configuration wizard window. The following dialog box is played.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


72



6.

Click Yes. The following dialog box is played.

7.

Select Manual Configuration and click Next.

8.

Select Slot 0 and Slot 1, and click Add To Array to add them to Drive Groups, as shown in the following figure. –

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)



73


9.



Click Accept DG.

10. Select Slot 2 and Slot 3, and click Add To Array to add them to Drive Groups, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–


–



74



11. Click Accept DG to complete the Drive Groups configuration. 12. Click Next. Select the two created driver group and click Add to SPAN to add DG to Span, as shown in the following figure.

13. Click Next. 14. Click Update Size. Set Strip Size to 128KB and Drive Cache to Disable, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–

If the number pad is unavailable, press Num Lockor use the main keyboard.

–

If the Update Sizebutton is unavailable, enter a value in Select Sizeas prompted.


75



15. Click Accept. The following dialog box is played.

16. Click Yes. The following dialog box is played.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


76



17. Add Virtual Drives by using the default settings for all parameters. Click Next. The following dialog box is played.


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


77



19. Click Yes. 20. Optional: If the following dialog box is displayed. Click Cancel.

21. The following dialog box is played. Click Yes to initialize the created virtual drives.

22. Complete the RAID 10 configuration. Click Home. Return to the Home window and check that the status of the virtual drives is Optimal and the status of the four hard disks is Online. –

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)



78


–



Step 4 Perform the following operations to configure the other two hard disks as the hot spare disks: 1.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Click Slot4, and select Make Global HSP, as shown in the following figure.


79



2.

Click Go. The following dialog is played.

3.

Click Back. The WebBIOS page is displayed.

4.

Double-click Slot5, repeating the above three steps.

5.

After the configuration succeeds, RAID levels are displayed, as shown in the following figure. If the configurations are incorrect, reconfigure the RAID. –

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)



80


–



Step 5 After the configuration is complete, click Exit. The Exit Application dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click Yes, A dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to restart the server. ----End Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


81



3.5.5 Configuring the RAID in Local Mode (IBM X3650 M4, Manually) The RAID needs to be configured before an operating system is installed in order to improve the efficiency and security of using server hard disks.

Prerequisites The server has been connected to the monitor, mouse, and keyboard properly.

Context RAID is a technology used to combine multiple independent physical hard disks in various modes to form logical hard disk groups. A logical hard disk group provides storage capacity greater than that of a single hard disk and allows implementation of data redundancy protection. The standard IBM server for delivery is equipped with eight hard disks. The RAID level planning and partition rules are as follows: Configure RAID 10+Hotspare (hot standby) l


l


The operation snapshots in this During topic vary to the IBM use WebBIOS versions and do not affect the RAID configuration. the according RAID configuration, actual snapshots. l


Procedure Step 1 Optional: If OS has been installed on the server, manually format disks; otherwise, OS installation will fail because the old data is not clear. For details, see A.3.11 Formatting d isks in Local Mode (IBM Server).

Step 2 Perform the following operations to configure the first to fourth hard disks as RAID 10: 1.

Start the IBM server. After the system BIOS self-check is complete, the BIOS information about the RAID card is displayed.

2.

Press Ctrl+H to access the WebBIOS configuration window for the RAID card.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


82



3.

Select the RAID card adapter to be configured and click Start to access the configuration window.

4.

Click Configuration Wizard. The following dialog box is played.

5.

Select New Configuration and click Next to access t he RAID configuration wizard window. The following dialog box is played.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


83



6.


7.


8.

Select Slot 0 and Slot 1, and click Add To Array to add them to Drive Groups, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


84


9.


Click Accept DG. The following dialog box is played.

10. Click Yes. 11. Select Slot 2 and Slot 3, and click Add To Array to add them to Drive Groups, as shown in the following figure.

12. Click Accept DG to complete the Drive Groups configuration. Click Next. The following dialog box is played.

13. Click Yes, click Next. 14. Select the two created driver group and click Add to SPAN to add DG to Span, as shown in the following figure. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


85



15. Click Next. 16. Click Update Size as prompted. Keep default settings for other options, as shown in the following figure. NOTE


NOTE



Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


86





Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


87




21. Click Yes. 22. Optional: If the following dialog box is displayed. Click Cancel.

23. The following dialog box is played. Click Yes to initialize the created virtual drives. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


88



24. Complete the RAID 10 configuration. Click Home. Return to the Home window and check that the status of the virtual drives is Optimal and the status of the four hard disks is Online.


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Double-click Slot4, and select Make Global HSP, as shown in the following figure.


89



2.


3.


4.


5.

After the configuration succeeds, RAID levels are displayed, as shown in the following figure. If the configurations are incorrect, reconfigure the RAID.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


90




Step 6 Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to restart the server. ----End

3.5.6 Configuring the RAID in Local Mode (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3, Manually) The RAID needs to be configured before an operating system is installed in order to improve the efficiency and security of using server hard disks.

Prerequisites

The server has been connected to the monitor, mouse, and keyboard properly.

Context RAID is a technology used to combine multiple independent physical hard disks in various modes to form logical hard disk groups. A logical hard disk group provides storage capacity greater than that of a single hard disk and allows implementation of data redundancy protection. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


91



The standard IBM server for delivery is equipped with eight hard disks. The RAID level planning and partition rules are as follows: Configure RAID 10+Hotspare (hot standby) l


l


l

The operation snapshots in this topic vary according to the IBM WebBIOS versions and do not affect the RAID configuration. During the RAID configuration, use actual snapshots. If no window is displayed after you click a button during the configuration, move the mouse and try again.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: If OS has been installed on the server, manually format disks; otherwise, OS installation will fail because the old data is not clear. For details, see A.3.11 Formatting d isks in Local Mode (IBM Server).

Step 2 Perform the following operations to configure the first to fourth hard disks as RAID 10: 1.

Start the IBM server. After the system BIOS self-check is complete, the BIOS information about the RAID card is displayed, as shown in the following figure.

2.

Press Ctrl+H to access the WebBIOS configuration window for the RAID card. The following dialog box is played.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


92



3.

Select the RAID card adapter to be configured and click Start to access the configuration window. The following dialog box is played.

4.

Click Configuration Wizard, Select New Configuration, as shown in the following figure.

5.

Click Next to access the RAID configuration wizard window. The following dialog box is played.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


93



6.


7.


8.

Select Slot 0 and Slot 1, and click Add To Array to add them to Driver Groups. Then click Accept DG, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


94


9.


Select Slot 2 and Slot 3, and click Add To Array to add them to Driver Groups. Then click Accept DG to complete the Driver Group configuration, as shown in the following figure.

10. Click Next. Select the two created driver groups and click Add to SPAN to add DG to Span, as shown in the following figure.

11. Click Next. 12. Set Select Size as prompted. Keep default settings for other options, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–


–



95





Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


96





17. Click Yes. 18. Optional: If the following dialog box is displayed. Click Cancel. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


97



19. The following dialog is pl ayed, click Yes to initialize the created virtual drives.

20. Complete the RAID 10 configuration. Click Home and check that the status of the virtual drives is Optimal and the status of the four hard disks is Online, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


98




Double-click Slot4, and select Make Global HSP, as shown in the following figure.

2.


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


99



3.


4.


5.

After the configuration succeeds, RAID levels are displayed, as shown in the following figure. If the configurations are incorrect, reconfigure the RAID.


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


100




3.6 Installing a Windows 2008 Operating System and Patch This topic describes how to install Windows 2008 OS and patch, and then verify the installation of OS to ensure proper U2000 installation.

3.6.1 Procedure for Installing the Windows 2008 OS This topic describes precautions for installing Windows 2008 OS to avoid installation errors in local mode.

Prerequisites l

It needs to configure the RAID before installing the windows 2008 Operating System. For details, see 3.5 Configuring the RAID.

l

Obtain the OS installation DVD-ROM Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard (64-bit version).

l

Obtain the OS patch installation DVD-ROM U2000version_server_ospatch_win64_x86_dvd1 or OS patch installation package U2000version_server_Windows2008_ospatch_en_win64_x86.zip.

l

If the OS is to be installed in local mode, the server has been connected to the monitor, mouse, and keyboard properly. Ensure that server driver is available and can read CDs and DVDs properly.

l

If the OS is to be installed in remote mode, you must ensure that the following preparations are ready:

l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–


–


–

The IP address of the iMana is available. For details about how to set the IP address of the iMana, see3.3.1 Configuring the iMana IP Address Through iMana Management Interface.

If the installation is performed on the IBM X3650 M4 server, you must obtain the ServerGuide DVD-ROM.


101



NOTE

The ServerGuide DVD-ROM of IBM Server is delivered with the server, or the ServerGuide_for_HW_Windows2008.iso file is burnt to a DVD-ROM. The .iso file of ServerGuide DVD-ROM is archived in http://support.huawei.com/carrier . You can contact Huawei engineers to log in to the website to download the ServiceGuide disk. The support path: Tools> Controlled Tool(Mini-tool Software) > Network OSS&Service > Universal OS& Patches > Windows> IBM_ServerGuide . l

If the installation is performed on the Huawei RH2288H V2 or Huawei RH5885H V3 server, you must obtain the ServiceCD DVD-ROM or the FusionServer ToolsServiceCD2.0-V102.zip file. NOTE

The ServiceCD DVD-ROM of Huawei RH series rack server is delivered with the server. The files in the ServiceCD of the Huawei RH series rack server are archived in Support website. Perform the following operations to obtain the ISO files: 1. Log in to http://enterprise.huawei.com . 2. Choose SUPPORT> Servers. 3. Choose Solution and Software > FusionServer Tools > Downloads> V100R002C00> V100R002C00SPC300 . 4. Download the FusionSe rver Tools-ServiceCD2.0-V109.zip software packages. 5. Use the PGPverify to verify correctness of the software packages. For details, see A.5.12 How Do I Verify Downloaded Software Packages Using the PGPVerify Software? .

Procedure Step 1 When installing Windows 2008, pay attentions to the prompts. l

When installing Windows 2008 OS on the Huawei RH5885H V3 server, pay attentions to the prompts listed in Table 3-11. NOTE

The ServiceCD boot disk is needed to install the windows 2008 OS on the Huawei RH5885H V3 server.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


102



Table 3-11 Installation procedure for installing Windows 2008 OS

No.

Prompt

Precautions

1

Restart the server.

– If the OS is installed in local mode,

press the power button to restart the PC server. – If the OS is installed in remote mode,

perform the following operations: 1. Log in to the server. For details, see A.2.1 How Do I Use iMana IP to Log In to a Remote Huawei RH series rack server.

2. Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console and select Cold Reset. 3. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes to restart the server. 2

Configure the system time and date.

1. Press F3 to access BIOS Setup Utility. NOTE If the BIOS password has been modified, a dialog box asking you to enter a password will be displayed during startup. Enter the required password to access the Setup Utilityapplication.

2. Click the Main tab. 3. Select System Time and press Enter to switch between the second, minute, and hour options. Set the system time as required. 4. Select System Date and press Enter to switch between the second, minute, and hour options. Set the system date as required. 3

Configure the order of server startup mode.

1. Use left and right arrow keys to select Boot. 2. Use up and down arrow keys to select CDROM: TSSTcorp CDDVDW SN-208DB on the FIXED BOOT ORDER Priorities tab. Shift + + to configure CDROM: 3. Press TSSTcorp CDDVDW SN-208DB as the first startup item.

4. Press F10 to save the configuration and exit. 5. In the dialog box that is displayed, select Yes to save the configuration and restart it.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


103



No.

Prompt

Precautions

4

Obtain the ServiceCD DVD.


insert the ServiceCD DVD to Huawei RH5885H V3 server DVD-ROM. – If the OS is installed in local mode,

perform the following operations: 1. Save the ISO file of the ServiceCD disk to any directory on a PC or laptop. NOTE

Use the 7zip software. Right-click the downloaded FusionServer ToolsServiceCD2.0-V109.zip software package and choose Decompressfrom the shortcut menu to obtain the ISO file FusionServer Tools-ServiceCD2.0V109.iso of the ServiceCD DVDROM.

2. Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console. 3. In the virtual disk dialog box, select Image File and click Browse. 4. In the Open dialog box, select the ISO file of the ServiceCD disk and click Open. 5. In the virtual disk dialog box, click Connect. If the virtual drive has successfully connected to the server, the Connect changes to Disconnect. 5

Restart the server.



perform the following operations: 1. Log in to the server. For details, see A.2.1 How Do I Use iMana IP to Log In to a Remote Huawei RH series rack server. 2. Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console and select Cold Reset. 3. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes to restart the server.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


104



No.

Prompt

Precautions

6

Configure to start the system from the drive.

1. When the server starts, press F11. Wait about 3 minutes, the Please select boot device: window is displayed. 2. Boot from a DVD driver. n

If the BIOS is a new version: ○

○

n

7

Select a Windows OS type.

Boot from a virtual drive: Select HUAWEI DVD-ROM VM 1.1.0 225, and press Enter. Boot from a physical drive: Select P5: TSSTcorp CDDVDW SN-208DB, and press Enter.

If the BIOS is an old version: Select P5: TSSTcorp CDDVDW SN-208DB to start from the drive and press Enter.

1. Access the ServiceCD initial page, select Microsoft Windows Server (2008/2012), and press Enter. 2. Select Install Microsoft Windows 2008 for x64 and press Enter.

8

The ServiceCD automatically loads files. After files are loaded, the window for creating system partition is displayed.

1. Select the Create partitions on the hard disk check box. 2. Select a record with ID set to 0 and click New. NOTE If the OS has been installed before, the New button is unavailable. Delete all the existing partitions and then re-partition the system.

3. In the Service CD dialog box, deselect the Use Free Size check box. 4. Set Partition Size to the partition size of disk C. For details about the partition size of disk C, see Disk Partition Scheme in 3.1.1 Collecting Installation Information. 5. Click OK. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK. 6. Click Next.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


105



No.

Prompt

Precautions

9

Accessthe Input installation information and configure the password and host name of the OS.

1. Enter passwords in the Administrator Password and Confirm Password text boxes, such as Changeme_123. To ensure the security of the U2000, passwords must be complex enough. For example, a password must contain eight or more characters of two types. The allowed characters are digits, letters, and special characters. Regularly update the password, and keep it safe. For details, see A.1.3 How to Change the Password of the OS Administrator. 2. Enter a host name in the Host Name text box. 3. Click Next.

10

Insert the OS DVD as prompted.

1. Remove the ServiceCD disk and insert the OS disk. n

n

If the OS is installed in local mode, remove the ServiceCD disk from the physical drive and insert the OS disk to the physical drive of Huawei RH5885H V3 server. If the OS is installed in remote mode, perform the following operations: a. Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console. b. Click Eject. c. Insert the OS disk to the physical drive of a PC or laptop. d. Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console. e. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the OS disk drive letter displayed on the PC or laptop from the drop-down list next to CD/DVD. f. Click Connect. If Connect is displayed as Disconnect, the virtual drive is connected to the server.

2. Click Next as prompted.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


106



No.

Prompt

Precautions

11

Configure Language to install, Time and currency format, and Keyboard or input method as prompted.

– Set Language to install to English.

12

Select an OS version as required.

Click Next. Select Windows Server 2008 R2 SERVERSTANDARD and click Next.

13

Configure the partition for installing the OS as prompted.

Select the partition with the size similar to that of disk C and click Next.

14

A message is displayed indicating that the OS is being installed.

The Installing Windows dialog box is displayed. Wait about 40 minutes until the system is installed.

– Set Time and currency format to

English(United States). – Set Keyboard or input method to US.

NOTE If an installation error occurs and the system fails to return to the preceding step during installation, click the close button in the upper right corner of the window and then install the OS again.

15

Remove the OS DVD-ROM.


remove the OS disk from the physical drive of Huawei RH5885H V3 server. – If the OS is installed in remote mode,

perform the following operations: 1. Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console. 2. Click Eject. 3. Remove the OS disk from the physical drive of the PC or laptop.

l

When installing Windows 2008 OS on the Huawei RH2288H V2 server, pay attentions to the prompts listed in Table 3-12. NOTE

The ServiceCD boot disk is needed to install the windows 2008 OS on the Huawei RH2288H V2 server.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


107




No.

Prompt

Precautions

1

Restart the server.



perform the following operations: 1. Log in to the server. For details, see A.2.1 How Do I Use iMana IP to Log In to a Remote Huawei RH series rack server.

2. Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console and select Cold Reset. 3. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes to restart the server. 2

Configure the system time and date.

1. Press Del to access BIOS Setup Utility. NOTE If the BIOS password has been modified, a dialog box asking you to enter a password will be displayed during startup. Enter the required password to access the Setup Utilityapplication.

2. Click the Main tab. 3. Select System Time and press Enter to switch between the second, minute, and hour options. Set the system time as required. 4. Select System Date and press Enter to switch between the second, minute, and hour options. Set the system date as required. 3

Configure the order of server startup mode.

1. Choose Boot > Legacy and press Enter. 2. Select Boot Type Order and press Enter. 3. Select Hard Disk Drive and press F5 HardDrive Disk as Drive to adjust the order ofDisk and configure Hard the first startup item.

4. Press F10 to save the configuration and exit. 5. In the dialog box that is displayed, select Yes to save the configuration and restart it.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


108



No.

Prompt

Precautions

4

Obtain the ServiceCD DVD.


insert the ServiceCD DVD to Huawei RH2288H V2 server DVD-ROM. – If the OS is installed in local mode,

perform the following operations: 1. Save the ISO file of the ServiceCD disk to any directory on a PC or laptop. NOTE

Use the 7zip software. Right-click the downloaded FusionServer ToolsServiceCD2.0-V109.zip software package and choose Decompressfrom the shortcut menu to obtain the ISO file FusionServer Tools-ServiceCD2.0V109.iso of the ServiceCD DVDROM.

2. Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console. 3. In the virtual disk dialog box, select Image File and click Browse. 4. In the Open dialog box, select the ISO file of the ServiceCD disk and click Open. 5. In the virtual disk dialog box, click Connect. If Connect is displayed as Disconnect, the virtual disk is connected to the server. 5

Restart the server.



perform the following operations: 1. Log in to the server. For details, see A.2.1 How Do I Use iMana IP to Log In to a Remote Huawei RH series rack server. 2. Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console and select Cold Reset. 3. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes to restart the server.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


109



No.

Prompt

Precautions

6

Configure to start the system from the drive.

1. After the server is started, press F11 to access the Boot Manager window. 2. Choose to start from the drive. n

n

7

Select a Windows OS type.

If the OS is installed in local mode, select SATA P5 TSSTcorp CDDVDW SN-208DB to start from the physical drive and press Enter. If the OS is installed in remote mode, select HUAWEI DVDROM VM 1.1.0 to start from the virtual drive and press Enter.

1. Access the ServiceCD initial page, select Microsoft Windows Server (2008/2012), and press Enter. 2. Select Install Microsoft Windows 2008 for x64 and press Enter.

8

The ServiceCD automatically loads files. After files are loaded, the window for creating system partition is displayed.

1. Select the Create partitions on the hard disk check box. 2. Select a record with ID set to 0 and click New. NOTE If the OS has been installed before, the New button is unavailable. Delete all the existing partitions and then re-partition the system.

3. In the Service CD dialog box, deselect the Use Free Size check box. 4. Set Partition Size to the partition size of disk C. For details about the partition size of disk C, see Disk Partition Scheme in 3.1.1 Collecting Installation Information. 5. Click OK. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK. 6. Click Next.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


110



No.

Prompt

Precautions

9

Accessthe Input installation information and configure the password and host name of the OS.

1. Enter passwords in the Administrator Password and Confirm Password text boxes, such as Changeme_123. To ensure the security of the U2000, passwords must be complex enough. For example, a password must contain eight or more characters of two types. The allowed characters are digits, letters, and special characters. Regularly update the password, and keep it safe. For details, see A.1.3 How to Change the Password of the OS Administrator. 2. Enter a host name in the Host Name text box. 3. Click Next.

10

Insert the OS DVD as prompted.

1. Remove the ServiceCD disk and insert the OS disk. n

n

If the OS is installed in local mode, remove the ServiceCD disk from the physical drive and insert the OS disk to the physical drive of Huawei RH2288H V2 server. If the OS is installed in remote mode, perform the following operations: a. Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console. b. Click Eject. c. Insert the OS disk to the physical drive of a PC or laptop. d. Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console. e. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the OS disk drive letter displayed on the PC or laptop from the drop-down list next to CD/DVD. f. Click Connect. If Connect is displayed as Disconnect, the virtual drive is connected to the server.

2. Click Next as prompted.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


111



No.

Prompt

Precautions

11

Configure Language to install, Time and currency format, and Keyboard or input method as prompted.

– Set Language to install to English.

12

Select an OS version as required.

Click Next. Select Windows Server 2008 R2 SERVERSTANDARD and click Next.

13

Configure the partition for installing the OS as prompted.

Select the partition with the size similar to that of disk C and click Next.

14

A message is displayed indicating that the OS is being installed.

The Installing Windows dialog box is displayed. Wait about 40 minutes until the system is installed.

– Set Time and currency format to

English(United States). – Set Keyboard or input method to US.

NOTE If an installation error occurs and the system fails to return to the preceding step during installation, click the close button in the upper right corner of the window and then install the OS again.

15



remove the OS disk from the physical drive of Huawei RH2288H V2 server. – If the OS is installed in remote mode,

perform the following operations: 1. Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console. 2. Click Eject. 3. Remove the OS disk from the physical drive of the PC or laptop.

l

When installing Windows 2008 OS on the IBM X3650 M4, pay attentions to the prompts listed in Table 3-13. NOTE

the ServerGuide boot disk is needed to install the windows 2008 OS on the IBM X3650 M4 server.


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

No.

Prompt

Precautions

1

Ready the ServerGuide CD-ROM.

Insert the ServerGuide CD-ROM to the drive on an IBM X3650 M4.


112



No.

Prompt

Precautions

2

Restart the IBM server and Set the IBM server start from the DVD-ROM.

1. Press the power button to restart the PC server. 2. After the IBM System X window is displayed, wait for about 2 minute until Select Boot Device is displayed. 3. Press F12 to access Select Boot Device. 4. Use arrow keys to select CD/DVD and press Enter to start the system from the DVDROM.

3

Wait about two minutes, the system restarts. And the system displays a message indicating that Loading ServerGuide.

Wait about five minutes, select English to access IBM ServerGuide web page.

4

Execute tasks listed in the IBM ServerGuide window.

– Select United States in the Localization

dialog. – Select I Accept in the License Agreement

dialog. – Select Microsoft ® Windows Server 2008

R2 x64 from the drop-down list in the Select Operating System dialog box, then select Windows Server 2008,Standard x64 Edition. – In the Create Partition dialog box, partition

the hard disk as required and set Select the partition size based on Partition range. Select the partition size indicates the size of disk C. see Disk Partition Scheme in the topic of 3.1.1 Collecting Installation Information. NOTE

5

The system displays a message indicating you to insert the OS CD-ROM.

–

Select an OS based on the OS delivery software listed in the configuration requirements.

–

Use default values, except for the preceding steps.

1. Remove the ServerGuide boot disk. 2. Insert the OS disk into the drive of the IBM X3650 M4. 3. Continue the operation as prompted, click Next until Exit ServerGuide.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


113



No.

Prompt

Precautions

6

The system displays a message indicating that Setup is starting

Wait 3 minutes, The system displays a message indicating that Install Windows. NOTE If an installation error occurs and the system fails to return to the preceding step during installation, click the close button in the upper right corner of the window and then install the OS again.

The system displays a message indicating that Language to install, Time and currency format and Keyboard or input method.

– Select English in the Language to install.

8

Click Next. The system displays a message indicating that Please read the license terms

Click I accept the license terms. Click Next.

9

The system displays a message indicating that Installing Windows

Wait 40 minutes. The system will automatically restart after the installation.

7

l

– Select English(United States) in the Time

and currency format. – Select US in the Keyboard or input method.

When installing Windows 2008 OS on the IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3, pay attentions to the prompts listed in Table 3-14. NOTE

the ServerGuide boot disk and ServiceCD boot disk are not needed to install the windows 2008 OS on the IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3.


No.

Prompt

Precautions

1

Obtain the OS installation DVD-ROM.

Insert the DVD-ROM to the drive of the IBM X3850 X5 or IBM X3650 M3 server.

2

Restart the IBM server and press F1 to access the BIOS configuration window as prompted.

1. Press the power button to restart the PC server. 2. When the server starts, press F1 to access the BIOS configuration window as prompted. Use arrow keys to select Load Default Settings, press Enter. 3. Select Exit Setup, press Enter to exit BIOS.

4. Press Y to save, the system will automatically restart.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


114



No.

Prompt

Precautions

3

Press F12 to configure the server to boot from the DVDROM drive.

1. Press F12 to access Select one time Boot Device. 2. Use arrow keys to select CD/DVD Rom. 3. Press any key to continue as prompted.

4

The system displays a message indicating that Windows is loading files.

Wait 3 minutes, The system displays a message indicating that Starting Windows. NOTE If an installation error occurs and the system fails to return to the preceding step during installation, click the close button in the upper right corner of the window and then install the OS again.

5

The system displays a message indicating that Language to install, Time and currency format and Keyboard or input method.

– Select English in the Language to

install. – Select English(United States) in the

Time and currency format. – Select US in the Keyboard or input

method.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


115



No.

Prompt

Precautions

6

Click Next, click Install now, the system displays a message indicating that Setup is starting.

1. Wait 2 minutes, the system displays a message indicating that Select the operating system you want to install, Select Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard(Full Installation), Next 2. The system displays a message indicating that Please read the license terms, select I accept the license terms. Click Next. 3. The system displays a message indicating that Which type of installation do you want?, select Custom(advanced). 4. The system displays a message indicating that Where do you want to install Windows?, Select Drive options(Advances), select New, input the size of C disk in Size. see Disk Partition Scheme in the topic of 3.1.1 Collecting Installation Information. Click Apply. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK. NOTE If the OS has been installed before, the New button is unavailable. Delete all the existing partitions and then re-partition the system.

5. Select a partition that the size is close to the size of the C drive, click Next. 7

The system displays a message indicating that Installing Windows.

Wait 40 minutes. The system will automatically restart after the installation.

8

After installation, the system displays a message indicating that the password needs to be changed at initial login.

1. Click OK. 2. Enter and confirm the password for user Administrator, such as Changeme_123. To ensure the security of the U2000, passwords must be complex enough. For example, a password must contain eight or more characters of two types. The allowed characters are digits, letters, and special characters. Regularly update the password, and keep it safe. For details, see A.1.3 How to Change the Password of the OS Administrator. 3. Press Enter and click OK to log in to the system.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


116


No.

Prompt

9



Precautions Remove the OS DVD-ROM from the drive.

Step 2 Optional: If the Initial Configuration Tasks dialog box is displayed and you do not want the dialog box to be displayed upon every login, select the Do not show this window at logon check box and click Close.

Step 3 Configure the server IP address manually, seeIP Address Planning about IP address planning information.

Step 4 Disk partition, run the following steps. 1.

Click Start. Right-click Computer, select Manage.

2.

Click Storage > Disk Management.

3.

Right-click CD-ROM, chooseShrink Volume from the shortcut menu and the Querying Shrink Space dialog box is displayed, wait for a while.

4.

In the Shrink C: dialog box, enter the disk space size to be released and click Shrink. NOTE

Volume shrink has the following limitations: –

Only the back part of the disk partition space can be released.

–

Due to MFT reserved space existing in the middle part of the NTFS partition, only less than half space of a partition can be released.

5.

Right-click CD-ROM. In the Change Drive Letter and Paths dialog box, Click Change.

6.

Select a new drive letter in addition to C, D and E from the drop-down list in the Assign the following drive letter dialog box. Click OK. In the Disk Management dialog box, click Yes.

7.

Right-click Unallocated, select New Simple Volume. The New Simple Volume Wizard dialog box is played. For details about the rules for creating a simple volume, see Disk Partition Scheme in 3.1.1 Collecting Installation Information.

8.

Continue the operation according to New Simple Volume Wizard by default.

Step 5 Perform the following operations to install the .NET Framework. 1.

Choose Start > All Programs > Administrative Tools > Server Manager.

2.

Click Features node, click the Add Features.

3.

Check .NET Framework 3.5.1 Features > .NET Framework 3.5.1 whether selected.If selected, indicating Framework has been installed, execute Step 6. If not selected,

4.

check .NET Framework 3.5.1. Please install the Framework3.5 as prompted by default.

Step 6 Perform the following operations to install the Windows Server 2008 OS patch. 1.

Obtain the OS patch installation file. The Windows Server 2008 OS patch can be installed by using software packages or installation DVDs. –

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Mode 1: Installation with a DVD: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117


–


i.

Insert the Windows Server 2008 OS patch installation DVD-ROM U2000version_server_ospatch_win64_x86_dvd1.

ii.

Copy all the contents in the patch installation DVD-ROM to a directory on the server, such as D:\oss. Do not change the hierarchical levels and names of the files and directories.

Mode 2: Installation with a software package: i.

Copy the OS patch package U2000version_server_Windows2008_ospatch_en_win64_x86.zip to the server on which the U2000 is to be installed, such as D:\oss. NOTE

The installation path, including the installation package path and the U2000 installation path, can contain only letters, digits, and underscores (_). The installation path cannot contain spaces or brackets; otherwise, the installation fails.

2.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

ii.

After the copying is complete, check whether the copied software packages are appropriate. For details, see A.5.12 How Do I Verify Downloaded S oftware Packages Using the PGPVerify Software?.

iii.

Decompress the OS patch package.

Install the Windows server 2008 OS patch. a.

Navigate to the directory patch\win2008\SP1 of the OS patch. Double-click the windows6.1-KB976932-X64.exe file.

b.

When the confirm dialog appears, click Next.

c.

Select the I accept the license terms, and then click Next

d.

Clear Automatically restart the computer, and click Install. This operation takes

e.

about 20 minutes. Wait patiently. After the installation is completed, click Restart. The system restarts automatically.

f.

Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights.

g.

If the information indicating successful installation the Service Pack 1 is displayed, click Close.

h.

Navigate to the directory patch\win2008\patch1 of the OS patch. Double-click the update.bat file. This operation takes about 60 minutes. Wait patiently.

i.

If a message Complete the installation, Please restart the operating system! is displayed, the OS patch has been installed. Press any key to close the window.

j.

Restart the OS.

k.


l.

Navigate to the directory patch\win2008\patch2 of the OS patch. Double-click the update.bat file. This operation takes about 60 minutes. Wait patiently.

m.

If a message Complete the installation, Please restart the op erating system! is displayed, the OS patch has been installed. Press any key to close the window.

n.

Restart the OS.


118



NOTE

–

If a message asking you to restart the OS is displayed during OS patch installation. Ignore it. Restart the OS only after all patches are installed.

–

If the update.batfile is used to install patches and some patches have not been installed within 30 minutes, press Ctrl+Cto stop the installation of failed patches. After the rest of the patches are installed, manually install the failed patches.

–

If the Error 1935dialog is displayed, see A.6.12 How to Solve the Problem Where the Error 1935 Alarm Is Generated During the Installation of the vcredist_x86.EXE or vcredist_x64.EXE Patch .

–

If the OS is installed on the IBM server, you can access the IMM using the DHCP server's IP address 169.254.95.118 that is generated by default after the IBM USB NIC is started. The DHCP server's IP address cannot be used to a ccess the IMM from the external.

----End

3.6.2 Activate the 2008 Windows OS After the Windows 2008 OS is installed, you must active the Windows OS.

Prerequisites l

The Windows 2008 OS has been installed.

l

The COA label delivered together with the Windows 2008 software DVD has been obtained. The COA label is a small card that records product key information.

l

Make paper and pencils ready for recording product key information.

Procedure Step 1 Record Primary Key on the COA label delivered together with the Windows 2008 software DVD.

NOTICE Obtain the product key and record the information. Keep the product key. l

The product key is a string of characters. The following is a product key example: Primary Key:XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX

l

The Windows installation DVD-ROM contains two types of product keys: Primary Key and Second Key. Only Primary Key needs to be recorded.

Step 2 Log in to the Windows OS and obtain the product installation password. Dial up the Microsoft hotline to obtain the product confirmation password to activate the Windows OS. 1. Click Start. Right-click Computer on the desktop and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 2.

On the Windows activation bar, click Activate Windows now. The Windows activation dialog box is displayed.

3.

Click Show me other ways to activate. In the Type your product ke y dialog box, enter the value of Primary Key as prompted and click Next.

4.

Click Use the automated phone system. Click Next.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


119



5.

Select United States, click Next.

6.

Dial up the Microsoft hotline to obtain the product confirmation password as prompted.

7.

Enter the product confirmation password and complete the password activation as prompted.

----End

3.6.3 Verifying OS Installation This topic describes how to verify OS installation.

Procedure Step 1 Check the OS version. 1.

Choose Start > Computer.

2.

Right-click Computer and choose Properties.

3.

In the System dialog box, view the computer information.

If the Windows OS version is Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard, the OS patch is Service Pack 1, the OS installation is successful. Otherwise, reinstall the OS and patches.

Step 2 Verify that the disk partition and partition sizes meet configuration requirements. For details, see 3.1.1 Collecting Installation Information. ----End

3.7 Installing the U2000 Server This topic describes the pre-installation checks, how to install the U2000 server, involving the U2000 server installation and installation checks.

3.7.1 Preparing Software Packages

The U2000 can be installed by using software packages or installation DVDs. Software packages and the PGP verification files of the software file in the .asc format must be uploaded to the server if the software packages are used to install the U2000. If the U2000 is installed by using DVD-ROMs, skip this operation.

Prerequisites Installation software is on-hand. For details, see 3.1.2 Checking Required Software. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


120



Procedure Step 1 After downloading all of the required software packages and the PGP verification files to the PC, copy the software packages and the PGP verification files of the software file in the .asc format to the server, such as D:\oss.

NOTICE l

Do not upload and decompress client installation packages U2000version_client_win32_x86.7z. Otherwise, the U2000 server software fails to be installed.

l

The installation path, including the installation package path and the U2000 installation path, can contain only letters, digits, and underscores (_). The installation path cannot contain spaces or brackets; otherwise, the installation fails.

l

Do not save the installation package on disk C. The U2000 installation and operation may be affected due to hard disk insufficiency. Files that are irrelevant to the installation package cannot be saved to the directory where the installation package is stored. NOTE

Ensure that all mandatory software packages are uploaded. If a software package is not uploaded, the U2000 installation may be interrupted because a file is lacked. Selecting the components of the transport, IP, and access domains is recommended. After the components are selected, you only need not to download software again when adding domains. In this situation, only the disk space, not the database space, is occupied. The installation packages to be uploaded are as follows: 1. OS patch + Database software (Required for the Windows 2008 OS) : U2000version_server_Windows2008_ospatch_en_win64_x86.zip + U2000version_server_sqlserver2008_dbstd_en_win64_x86.zip 2. Basic components (Mandatory) : U2000version_server_nmsbase_win32_x86.7z 3. Core components (Mandatory) : U2000version_server_nmscore_win32_x86.7z 4. Transport domain component (Optional). Prepare this compone nt if managing tran sport or PTN equipment: U2000version_server_nmstrans_win32_x86.7z 5. IP domain compo nents (Optional). Prepare these com ponents if mana ging routers, switches, or security equipment: U2000version_server_nmsip_win32_x86.7z 6. Access domain components (Optional). Prepare this component if managi ng access equip ment: U2000version_server_nmsaccess_win32_x86.7z

Step 2 Use the PGPverify software to verify the uploaded software packages. NOTE

Refer to http://support.huawei.com/carrier/digitalSignatureAction to download the latest version. 1. Download and decompress the PGPverify tool. –

For carrier: visit http://support.huawei.com/carrier/digitalSignatureAction to download the package and decompress it. Continue to decompress the OpenPGP Signature Verification Guide package in the current folder. VerificationTools.zip

–

For enterprise: visit http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/toolNewInfoAction!showDetail? pid=8221819&show=showServiceDetail&versionid=TV1000000016 to download and decompress the VerificationTools.zip package.

2. Go to the VerificationTools folder that is generated after decompression and obtain different versions of verification tools for different OSs. 3. KEYS is the public key file.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


121



1.

Upload the obtained PGPverify software and public key file KEYS to the C:\ directory on the server.

2.

Run the following commands to verify the installation software packages: > "C:\PGPVerify.exe" -k "C:\KEYS" -d "D:\oss" NOTE

–

Assume that the signature file and software package are stored in the D:\ossdirectory, and the PGPVerify tool and public key file are stored in the C:\ directory.

–

To verify a single file, run the C:\PGPVerify.exe" -k "C:\KEYS" -f "C:\V200R015C60.zip.asc command.

–

For a certain file, if the command output does not contain "WARN" or "FAIL", the signature file is valid.

–

If a version has multiple signature files to be verified, the version is secure only when the verification results of all files are "PASS". If the verification results contain "WARN" or "FAIL", the verification is not passed and security risks exist. In that event, re-download the software packages.

Step 3 There is no requirement on the decompression sequence of software packages. It is required that the installation software be decompressed to an NT file system (NTFS) partition. Rightclick a drive and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to check whether the file system is in the NTFS partition. If the corresponding partition does not use the NTFS, convert it to an NTFS partition before decompressing the installation package. For details, see A.1.2 How to Convert the File System Type to NTFS.

Step 4 Decompress all installation packages into the same directory. NOTE l

There is no specific sequence for decompressing all software packages.

l

7-zip is recommended to decompress the software packages, obtain the 7-zip tool with the latest version from Web site http://downloads.sourceforge.net/sevenzip and install the tool. For more information about software operation, see the software Help or go to the official website of the software for technical support. Perform the following operations to use the 7-zip. Choose Start > All Programs> 7-Zip > 7-Zip File Manager . Select the directory where the installation package is stored on the address bar. Select all the packages to be decompressed, rightclick, and choose 7-Zip > Extract Herefrom the shortcut menu.

l

During the decompression of all selected software packages, if a message is displayed asking you whether to overwrite an existing file, click Yes to overwrite the existing file.

----End

3.7.2 Pre-installation Check (Windows 2008) This topic describes the checks that need to be performed before you install the U2000 on Windows 2008.

Prerequisites l

The U2000 server is powered on.

l

Disk C, which is a system disk, must exist. Otherwise, the U2000 fails to be installed.

Procedure Step 1 Ensure that the OS version and disk partition are correct. See 3.6.3 Verifying OS Installation. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


122



Step 2 Ensure that the OS patches are installed. 1.

Choose Start > Control Panel > Uninstall a program. The Uninstall a program window is displayed.

2.

Click View installed updates. The installed security update patches are displayed. Compare these patches with those in the installation patch package. If they are consistent, the OS patches are installed correctly. If they are different, see Install the OS patches to reinstall the OS patches.

NOTICE Ensure that all the preceding security update patches have be installed.

Step 3 Ensure that the Windows 2008 OS has been activated. For details about how to activate the Windows OS, see 3.6.2 Activate the 2008 Windows OS .

Step 4 Optional: To protect U2000 installation against network disconnection, change the value of the REG_DWORD item DisableDHCPMediaSense in the registry table to 00000001. 00000001 does not distinguish between decimal and hexadecimal, using the default hexadecimal, The procedure for adding and modifying the value of DisableDHCPMediaSense is as follows: 1.

Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter regedit to open the Windows registry table.

2.

Select \HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\services\Tcpip \Parameters. Check the value of the REG_DWORD item DisableDHCPMediaSense in the right pane.

3.

–

If DisableDHCPMediaSense is not listed, right-click and choose New > DWORD (32-bit) Value from the shortcut menu, enter DisableDHCPMediaSense, and set the value to 00000001.

–

If DisableDHCPMediaSense is listed, check its value. If the value is not 00000001, change it to 00000001.

Restart the OS.

Step 5 Ensure that the Windows 2008 OS is of the 64-bit type. For details, see A.1.8 How to Query the Type of a Windows OS.

Step 6 One NIC must have only one IP address. For details, see A.1.6 How to Check Whether an NIC Is Assigned Multiple IP Addresses (Windows) and A.1.7 How to Delete Unnecessary IP Addresses of an NIC (Windows). Ensure that the network is connected and an IP address

has been set. Setting the IP address to that planned for the U2000 server on the live network is recommended.

Step 7 Ensure that Framework3.5 has started. For details, see the Step 5 in installation procedure. Step 8 If the OfficeScan software has been installed, perform the following operations to shut down the OfficeScan software: 1.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Choose Start > All Programs > Trend Micro OfficeScan Server > OfficeScan Web Console (HTML). The Web console login page is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123



NOTE

–

If a security certificate message is displayed, click Continue to this website (not recommended) , and click OK.

–

If the Security Alertdialog box for the installation certificate is displayed, click OK to continue the installation.

–

If a message asking you to add the trusted sites is displayed, click Add, and click Add in the Trusted sites dialog, close the installation window.

–

If a message asking you to install the ActiveX control is displayed, click Install.

–

If a message is displayed indicating that the ActiveX control download fails, chooseTools> Internet Options Security the main of thesites Internet Click tab page, click Trusted sites and from click Sites . Themenu Trusted dialogExplorer. is displayed. Add the OfficeScan server address to Add this website to the zone .

2.

Set User name and Password and click Log On.

3.

Choose Agents > Agent Management from the navigation tree. On the Agent Management page in the right pane, choose Settings > Scan Settings > Real-time Scan Settings. In the Real-time Scan Settings dialog box, check whether the Enable virus/ malware scan check box is deselected. –

If the Enable virus/malware scan check box is deselected, the OfficeScan software has been shut down.

–

If the Enable virus/malware scan check box is selected, deselect it and then click Save .

Step 9 Checking password policies. 1.

Choose Start > All Programs > Administrator Tools> Local Security Policy. The Local Security Policy displays.

2.

SecurityinSettings Choose > Account tree as depicted the image below. Policies > Password Policy from the navigation

3.

Ensure that the value of Minimum password length is equal to or fewer than 12 characters.

----End

3.7.3 Starting the U2000 Installation Program This topic describes how to install U2000 server software.

Prerequisites l

The installation software is on-hand. For details about how to obtain the installation software, see 3.7.1 Preparing Software Packages.

l

Pre-installation checks have been completed. For details about how to perform preinstallation checks in Windows Server 2008, see 3.7.2 Pre-installation Check (Windows 2008).

l

At least one NIC has been started.

l

If the database has been installed, exit the SQL Server enterprise manager before the U2000 is installed. This operation prevents U2000 installation failures due to database errors.

l

Ensure that the system time of the U2000 server is set correctly. If the system time is incorrect, the SSL authentication will fail and the U2000 cannot be installed. The system time of the U2000 server is of great importance. Changing the system time during U2000 installation is prohibited.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


124



Context l

In the installation process, the installation program needs to start certain services of a network adapter. Therefore, the network adapter must be connected to the network; otherwise, the U2000 server cannot be installed.

l

If the U2000 software has been installed, the client is also installed on the server.

l

If the SQL Server 2008 has not been installed. The U2000 server software will automatically install the SQL Server 2008.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to Windows OS as an OS user with administrator rights.

NOTICE The name of the directory where the installation packages are stored can contain only letters, digits, and underscores (_). The directory name cannot contain spaces, brackets, or Chinese characters; otherwise, the installation fails.

Step 2 Starting U2000 installation, as follows: NOTE

When you run a .bat file on Windows Server 2008, a user account control dialog box may be displayed. In this case, click Yes to allow the program to make changes to the computer. l

Mode 1: Installation with a software package: Double-click the install.bat file in the directory where the installation package is decompressed. The Set the Installation Environment dialog box will be displayed. If database has been installed on the OS, wait 5 to 10 minutes. If no database has been installed on the OS, wait about 20 to 30 minutes until database installation is complete.

l

Mode 2: Installation with a DVD: –

–

If no database has been installed on the OS. i.

Insert a database installation DVD-ROM and copy the thirdparty folder to a local directory, such asD:\oss.

ii.

Insert a U2000 installation DVD-ROM. Double-click the install.bat file in the root directory of the installation DVD-ROM.

If database has been installed on the OS. Insert a U2000 installation DVD into the DVD-ROM. Double-click the install.bat file in the root directory of the installation disk. The Set the Installation Environment dialog box will be displayed. Wait 5 to 10 minutes.

NOTE

After double-click the install.batfile, the Decompressing the pack package.. dialog box will be displayed, ignore it.

Step 3 The Copyright dialog box will be displayed. NOTE

Read the installation license agreement carefully. If you accept the agreement, click theI accept these terms option button.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


125



Step 4 Click I accept the terms, and click Next to continue. The Select Language dialog box will be displayed.

Step 5 Select a language, such as English. Step 6 Click Next. The Select Installation Type dialog box will be displayed.

If Automatically configure the OSS license file during the installation needs to selected, upload the license file to the server before selecting it.

Step 7 If the License file has been uploaded to the server, click Next. Otherwise, clear the selection of Automatically configure the OSS license file during the installation , and then click Next. The Configure Server dialog box will be displayed.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


126



NOTE l

If there are multiple IP addresses existing on the server, the system cannot automatically obtain IP addresses. In this case, select the server IP. Specifically, set IP addresses to that for external communication.

l

The installation path is the directory where the installation package is decompressed, such asd:\oss. The installation path, including the installation package path and the U2000 installation path, can contain only letters, digits, and underscores (_). The installation path cannot contain spaces or brackets; otherwise, the installation fails.

Step 8 Click Next. The Select Domain dialog box will be displayed.

NOTE

This section assumes that the access, IP, and transport packages are uploaded and decompressed. If only the access package is uploaded and decompressed, the page will display Access domain alone. Select the domain need to be deployed based on the managed devices. Selecting all the displayed domains is recommended. To add other domains, upload and decompress the corresponding packages and perform the installation again. Software packages for the transport and IP components must be selected so as to manage PTN 6900 series NEs.

Step 9 Click Next. The Configure Database dialog box will be displayed. NOTE

1. If the uploaded and decompressed package involves the transport domain, the Version Style dialog box is displayed. The following is an example of the differences between the two styles: –

For the Default style , alarms come in the following descending order of severity: Critical, Major, Minor, and Warning.

–

For the North American style , alarms come in the following descending order of severity:

Critical, Major, Minor, Not Alarmed, and Not Reported. 2. Click Next. The Version Timeslot Mode will be displayed.

3. Select the time slot mode as required, such as Sequential mode . The Sequential mode , a timeslot numbering policy recommended by the ITU-T.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


127



The following table lists parameters for the database U2000 user and the database server.

Parameter

Settings

Data File Path

Specifies the path for storing data files. The default installation path is D:\data. NOTICE

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l

Please click Browseand change the data file save path. To meet space requirements for long-term running, changing this path to a path on another partition (especially the partition with the largest remaining space) by referring to the disk partition planning before installation is recommended.

l

Ensure that the disk for saving data files is not a compact disk. If the disk is a compact disk, creating an instance database will fail.

ServerAddress

Thedefaultvalueis

127.0.0.1.

ServerName

Thedefaultservernameis

ServerPort

Thedefaultserverportis

Administrator Name

The default database administrator is sa.


DBSVR. 1433.

128



Parameter

Settings

Administrator Password

Enter a password of the database administrator and refer to the following operations to verify the password. l

If the database is installed together with the U2000, enter the default password Changeme_123.

l

If the database has been installed before the U2000 installation, and the administrator password meets the following requirements, enter the database

l

administrator password. If the database has been installed before the U2000 installation, and the administrator password does not meet the following requirements, change the password based on the following requirements. For details, see A.4.4 How to Change the sa User Password If the U2000 Is Not Installed.

NOTE The database administrator password must meet the requirements: l

The password contains a minimum of eight characters and a maximum of 30 characters.

l

The password must contain at least four of the following combinations: –

At least one lower-case letter

–

At least one upper-case letter

–

At least one digit

–

At least one special character ~@#^*-_+[{}]:./? Other special characters are not supported. Do not include other special characters, such as ()|<>&`!$ \"%'=;,spacein passwords.

l

The password must be different from the user name or the user name in reverse order and cannot contain the complete user name (case-insensitive).

l

If the database has been installed before the U2000 installation and an incorrect password is entered, the U2000 will fail to connect to the database.

The default value is Changeme_123 .

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


129



Parameter

Settings

OSS Database User Password

The OSS database user password must meet the requirements: l

The password contains a minimum of eight characters and a maximum of 30 characters.

l

The password must contain at least four of the following combinations: – At least one lower-case letter – At least one upper-case letter – At least one digit – At least one special character ~@#^*-_+[{}]:./?

Other special characters are not supported. Do not include other special characters, such as ()| <>&`!$\"%'=;,space in passwords. l


Set a new password for OSS database user. For example, Changeme_123. NOTE Plan and enter a new password according to the preceding password rules to ensure system security. Make a note of your password and keep it in a safe place. Do not share your password with anyone.

Confirm OSS Database User Password

Confirms the DB user password.

Step 10 Set the installation parameters and click Next. The Preinstallation Check dialog box will be displayed.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


130



If a check item is abnormal, the Next button is unavailable and the installation fails to be continued. Perform the following operations to solve the issue. l

If the remaining space of the OS is insufficient, release the space as required. Click Retry in the Preinstallation Check dialog box until the check item is displayed normally.

l

If the user database is occupied, perform the following operations to solve the issue.

l

a.

Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools > SQL Server Configuration Manager, choose SQL Server Services from the navigation tree, right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) in the right pane, and then choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop the database server. Then, choose Start to start the database server to ensure that no external user accesses the SQL Server database.

b.

Click Retry in the Preinstallation Check dialog box until the check item is displayed normally.

If one item among the database command, database version number, database environment variable, and database sorting rule is abnormal, uninstall the database and then install the U2000 again. For details about the method of uninstalling the database, see A.4.6 How to Manually Uninstall the SQL Server Database .

Step 11 Click Next. Verify that the installation information is correct. Step 12 Click Next. A progress bar will be displayed. The time required for the installation depends on the number of components to be installed and the server configuration. Wait patiently.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


131



NOTE l

For Windows Server 2008, the system starts installing the database patch when the installation progress reaches 99%. If the following dialog box is displayed, do not manually close it. Otherwise, database patch installation fails.

l

If a message indicating an installation failure or interruption is displayed during installation, For details, see A.6.1 How do I solve the problem where a failure message is displayed during the installation or the installation is abnormally interrupted .

The system will display a prompt indicating that installation was successfully completed.

Step 13 After the preceding settings, click Finish to complete U2000 installation. The Are you sure you want to restart the operating system now? dialog box will be displayed.

Step 14 Optional: In Windows Server 2008, run the following procedures to install the database patch. l

For installation with a software package, the system automatically installs the database patch. You can click Yes to restart the OS.

l

For installation with a DVD: a.

Click Cancel to not restart the OS.

b.

Navigate to the directory patch\sql2008\en_us of the OS patch DVD, and doubleclick the SQLServer2008-KB2716436-x64.exe file. In the Install a SQL Server 2008 Patch dialog box, implement default installation as the left-side navigation prompts. Click Next to complete the installation. NOTE

c.

n

If License Termsis displayed, select the I accept the license terms check box and click Next.

n

If Ready to Updateis displayed, click Update.

Navigate to the directory patch\sql2008\en_us of the OS patch DVD, and doubleclick the SQLServer2008-KB2977321-x64.exe file. In the Install a SQL Server 2008 Patch dialog box, implement default installation as the left-side navigation prompts. Click Next to complete the installation. NOTE

d.

n


n

If Ready to Updateis displayed, click Update.

Navigate to the directory patch\sql2008\en_us\SP3 of the OS patch DVD, and double-click the SQLServer2008SP3-KB2546951-x64-CHS.exe file. In the Install a SQL Server 2008 Patch dialog box, implement default installation as the leftside navigation prompts. Click Next to complete the installation. NOTE


e. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Restart the OS manually. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132



Step 15 Perform the following operations to check the database version information: 1.

Choose Start > Run. The Run window will be displayed.

2.

Enter cmd and click OK.

3.

In the CLI, run the following commands to check the database version information: DBSVR C:\> isql -Usa -S NOTE

–

DBSVR specifies the database name.

–

Enter the database sa user password as prompted.

–

The prompt C:\> varies according to on-site conditions. If the system is logged in to as the dbuseruser, the default prompt is C:\Users\dbuaer>. You can run the cd command to switch the directory. A command example is C:\Users\dbuser> cd c:\ . The command prompt switches to c:\>.

1> select @@version 2> go

–

In Windows Server 2008, if the database version is correct, information similar to the following is displayed: ----------------------------------------------------------------Microsoft SQL Server 2008 (SP4) - 10.0.6241.0 (X64) Apr 17 2015 10:56:08 Co pyright (c) 1988-2008 Microsoft Corporation Enterprise Edition (64-bit) on Windows NT 6.1 (Build 7601: Service Pack 1) (1 row affected)

If the database version is not 10.0.6241.0, you must reinstall the database patch or contact Huawei technical support engineers.

Step 16 Optional: If the U2000 are installed in Windows Server 2008, in order to enhance the security of the SQL Server 2008 database after the U2000 is installed, you need to manually create a user to replace the database administrator sa and assign the user with same permissions as the sa user. After the permissions are assigned to the user, disable the sa user. For details, see A.4.9 How to Create a Replacement User for the SQL Server 2008 Database Administrator sa User. ----End

Follow-up Procedure l

After the U2000 software is installed, manually install the SetWin security hardening software U2000version_VPPSetwinV300R003C22SPC200.zip to enhance Windows security. For details about the installation, see the installation guide for the SetWin security hardening software.

l

After the U2000 software is installed, to enhance database security, perform operations described in How Do Port to 127.0.0.1? . I Change the IP Address Bound to an SQL Server Database

l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

U2000 server software has been installed. To protect U2000 server against the virus, for details about how to uninstall the OfficeScan server software, see U2000 AntiVirus Software Deployment Guide (OfficeScan10.5).


133



3.8 Loading a U2000 License This topic describes how to load a U2000 license. Before using a U2000, you must load a U2000 license.

Prerequisites l

The OS and database must run properly. If the database is not started, choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools > SQL Server Configuration Manager > SQL Server Services , right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) and choose Start to start the database. If the database has been started, this step is not required.

l

The processes of the U2000 must be properly started. If U2000 services have not been started, double-click the U2000 Server shortcut icon on the desktop or run the startnms.bat file in the %IMAP_ROOT%\platform\bin to start U2000 services manually.

l

The U2000 license file must be ready.

NOTICE The license file name can contain digits, letters, and special characters excluding the space or \ /:*?"<>|.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the ossuser user. Step 2 Load theU2000 license file. NOTE

To make both the U2000 commercial and temporary licenses take effect, use the GUI mode.

Method one: Load the license in the GUI. 1.

Copy and paste the authorized license to the server where the U2000 client is installed. If the U2000 and server are on the same computer, directly copying and pasting the license file to the %IMAP_ROOT%\etc\conf\license path is prohibited, copy the license file to another directory. NOTE

–

Do not modify the contents in the license file.

–

Check whether a temporary license file exists in the %IMAP_ROOT%\etc\conf\license folder. If the file exists, create a backup folder and then copy and paste the temporary license file to it.

2.

On the OS desktop, double-click the U2000 Client shortcut icon. The Login dialog box is displayed.

3.

In the Server drop-down list, select the server to be logged in to. Then, set User Name and Password to the valid values, and click Login. Click Login.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


134



NOTE

4.

–

If you have logged in to the System Monitor before, enter the password for logging in to the System Monitor.

–

The initial password of the admin user is Changeme_123(It is Admin_123for a U2000 that comes preinstalled). The password must be changed during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it regularly.

Update the U2000 license. –

If a message indicating that no license is available is displayed when you log in to the U2000 client. i.

In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. The Open dialog box will be displayed.

ii.

In the Open dialog box that is displayed, select the new license file and click Open. The License Comparison Results dialog box will be displayed.

iii. Click OK.

–

iv.

Click Yes and confirm the loaded license.

v.

Click OK.

If U2000 license is loaded before. i.

Choose Help > License Management > License Information from the main menu (traditional style); alternatively, double-click System Management in Application Center and choose License Management > Licenes Information from the main menu (application style).

ii.

In the License Information dialog box, click Update License.

iii.

Select the new license file and click Open.

iv.

Click Next.

v.

Select a scenario and perform the associated operations as required:

vi.

○

If Incremental is unavailable, click Next.

○

If Incremental is available and only the new U2000 license needs to be effective, select Full and click Next.

○

If Incremental is available and both the new and in-use U2000 licenses need to be effective, select Incremental and click Next. If the in-use U2000 license has a commercial license and a temporary license, the new license will replace the license of the same type. For example, if the new license is a commercial license, the commercial license in the in-use U2000 license will be replaced.

Click Finish.

vii. Click Yes and confirm the updated license. viii. Click Yes to close all windows. ix.

Click Yes to log out of the system.

Method two: Use commands to load the license. 1.

Copy the authorized license file to the U2000 server. Directly copying and pasting the license file to the %IMAP_ROOT%\etc\conf\license path is prohibited. NOTE

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–

Do not modify the contents in the license file.

–

Check whether a temporary license file exists in the %IMAP_ROOT%\etc\conf\license folder. If the file exists, create a backup folder and then copy and paste the temporary license file to it.


135


2.


Update the U2000 license. a.

Log in to the OS of the server.

b.

Run the following command to update the U2000 license file:

> updateLicense -file License_file_name NOTE

In the command, License_file_name indicates the combination of an absolute path and a file name. For example, if the license fine is named license123.datand stored in d:\, the command to rename the U2000 license file is > updateLicense -file d:\license123.dat. If illegible characters are displayed, set the environment variable: FILEIO_LOCAL_CHARSET=1.

Information similar to the following is displayed: state product old value new value no change: U2000 500 500 no change: U2000 1 1 no change: U2000 Export 1 1 no change: U2000 Client 1 1

feature

item

name

COMMON

LSW1CAPA01

Client

COMMON

LSW1CAPA01

Client

COMMON

LSW1FMCLT01

COMMON

LSW1RENOTI01

Alarm

Are you sure to update the license?(Y/N)

c.

Enter Y, and then press Enter.

NOTE

After the preceding operations are performed, the license file is automatically loaded to the%IMAP_ROOT %\etc\conf\license path and renamed.

----End

3.9 Checking the Installation of the Single-Server System (Windows) This topic describes how to check the installation of the Single-Server System (Windows). Ensure that the Single-Server System (Windows) was properly installed before using it to manage a network.

Context l

The client is installed at the same time as the Single-Server System (Windows).

l

During installation of the U2000 software, only one default NMS user, that is, user admin, is provided. The admin user is the administrator of the U2000 and has the highest rights of the U2000. The initial password of the admin user is Changeme_123 (It is Admin_123 for a U2000 that comes preinstalled). The password must be changed during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it regularly.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


136



Step 2 Check the shortcut icons. The following shortcut icons are displayed on the desktop: l

U2000 Client

l

U2000 System Monitor

l

U2000 Server

l

U2000 MSuite

Step 3 Check the installation directory. NOTE

After the U2000 server software is installed, the following directories will be generated. Do not delete these directories at random; otherwise, the U2000 server software cannot be used properly. l

d:\oss

l

d:\oss\engr

l

d:\oss\OSSJRE

Step 4 Ensure that the database is running. 1.

Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools> SQL Server Configuration Manager > SQL Server Services.

2.

Right-click SQL Server (MSSQLS ERVER) and view the startup information about the database. –

If Start is dimmed, Microsoft SQL Server 2008 is running.

–

If Microsoft SQL Server 2008 is not running, right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) and select Start.

Step 5 Ensure U2000 is running. 1.

Ensure U2000 server processes is running. a.


b.


c.

In the CLI, run the daem_ps command to check whether the U2000 process is started. n

If information similar to the following is displayed, the U2000 process has started. imapmrb.exe 28,788 K imapeventmgr.exe 21,400 K imapsysd.exe 41,216 K imapwatchdog.exe 11,688 K ResourceMonitor.exe 23,112 K imap_sysmonitor.exe 35,408 K python.exe 18,736 K httpd.exe 11,220 K java.exe 100,712 K httpd.exe 16,756 K

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

25532 Services

0

22412 Services

0

15348 Services

0

32432 Services

0

27412 Services

0

33080 Services

0

34552 Services

0

23320 Services

0

8276 Services

0

21160 Services

0


137



If no command output is displayed, the U2000 process is not started. You can run the D:\oss\server\platform\bin\startnms.bat command in the CLI to start the U2000 process.

n

NOTE

2.

○

D:\ossspecifies the installation path of the U2000.

○

Starting the U2000 process takes about 3 minutes.

Check the running status of every process on the System Monitor client. a.

b.

Choose Start > Programs > Network Management System > U2000 System Monitor or click the shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U2000 System Monitor client. In the Login dialog box, enter a user name and a password. NOTE

–

Two data transmission modes are available: Commonand Security(SSL) . You can run a command on the server to query the data transmission mode. The default data transmission mode is Security(SSL) . For details, see A.5.13 How to Set the Communication Mode on . the U2000 server for the Single-Server System (Windows)

–


–

If the U2000 processes with the startup type of Automatic have started properly, the U2000 runs properly.

–

If some processes have not started, select them, right-click, and choose Start the Service from the shortcut menu.

–

If the U2000 does not run properly, contact Huawei engineers.

Step 6 Checking Environment Variables. 1.


2.


3.

In the CLI, run the set Environment Variable Name command to check the environment variables listed in the following table. For example, run the set IMAP_CONFIG_PATH command to check whether the value of IMAP_CONFIG_PATH is set to D:\oss\server \etc\conf. Table 3-15 Environment variables used for installing the U2000 server and client

Environment Variable Name

Value

IMAP_CONFIG

D:\oss\server\etc\conf

_PATH

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

IMAP_ROOT

D:\oss\server

IMAP_JAVA_H OME

D:\oss\OSSJRE\jre_win

IMAP_LOCALE

UTF-8

OSS_ROOT

D:\oss


138



Environment Variable Name

Value

Path

D:\oss\server\3rdTools\lib;D:\oss\server\3rdTools\python\bin;D: \oss\server\3rdTools\python\lib;D:\oss\server\3rdTools\bin;D:\oss \server\platform\bin;D:\oss\server\platform\lbin;D:\oss\server \platform\lib;D:\oss\server\cbb\platform\lib;

PYTHONHOME

D:\oss\server\3rdTools\python

NOTE

–

Use the installation of a U2000 in the D:\osspath as an example. If the U2000 server is installed in another path, the D:\osspath values are different.

–

Relevant environment variables set for the U2000 engineering directory on disk C must be consistent with those listed in the preceding table.

–

The environment variable in the Path folder is the oss core environment variable. If the actual Path environment variable does not have the preceding information, uninstall and reinstall the U2000. If the actual Path environment variable has more information than the preceding, ignore the variable setting because it does not affect the U2000 operation.

Step 7 Checking the U2000 Version. 1.

2.

Log in to a client. a.

On the desktop, double-click the U2000 Client shortcut icon.

b.

In the dialog box that is displayed, enter a user name and password.

Choose Help > About from the main menu. In the About dialog box, check the U2000 version. If the U2000 version information contains V200R015C60, the installed U2000 version is correct. Otherwise, reinstall the U2000 version.

----End


To save the server disk space, need to delete software package name.zip, software package name.7z and thirdparty folder in the software packages directory, such as D: \oss.

l

The Network Management System Maintenance Suite is used for U2000 commissioning, maintenance, and redeployment. In the Windows Task Managerdialog box, check whether msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe are listed. –

If the two processes are listed, the MSuite server has started.

–

If the two processes are not listed, the MSuite server has not started. Navigate to the D:\oss\engr\engineering directory and double-click startserver.bat to start the MSuite server.

l

If login to a U2000 client fails, see A.6.2 Failure to Log In to the U2000 Server from a U2000 Client to resolve the problem.

l

The installation is not complete if any of the preceding checks are not passed. For details, see A.6.11 How to Address the U2000 Installation or Uninstallation Failure .

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


139



3.10 Fast Restoration Scheme for the U2000 Cold Backup System(Optional) The fast restoration scheme for the U2000 cold backup system automatically backs up data and files on the primary site and restores the data and files on the secondary site. When the primary site malfunctions, the secondary site fast takes over network monitoring. The following introduces the realization process of this scheme.

3.10.1 Introduction to the Fast Restoration Scheme for the U2000 Cold Backup System The fast restoration scheme for the U2000 cold backup system fast restores single-server systems. The following introduces the realization process of this scheme.

Context If only one single server U2000 is deployed at a site, network management functions will become unavailable if the U2000 fails. The cold backup feature is therefore introduced by HUAWEI to implement fast restoration in the case of a system failure. In the cold backup solution, two single server U2000 systems with the same version, deployment domain, language, OS type, server time, and time zone are deployed. One system is run on the primary site and the other is run on the secondary site. l In normal conditions, the primary site provides the network management functions. The network management process and maintenance tool on the secondary site are stop while the database is running. The primary site backs up the network management data periodically, and the secondary site obtains the backup file from the primary site at regular intervals. l

If the U2000 on the primary site fails, the U2000 on the secondary site starts immediately to provide network management functions. NOTE l

l

l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

The backup object is the entire database, including the custom data at the U2000 side (excluding the custom options of the system), network layer trail data, NE-side configuration data, alarm data and performance data. In addition, a backup is created for the structure of the entire database, all database tables (including the system tables and the user tables), table structure, and stored procedures. The personal information (including personal name, phone numbers and addresses) on the U2000 and all user names and passwords are also backed up. Therefore, you are obligated to take considerable measures, in compliance with the laws of the countries concerned and the user privacy policies of your company, to ensure that the personal data of users is fully protected. The following data is not backed up when you back up the U2000 database: l

The data that is not saved at the NE side, that is, the data that cannot be uploaded.

l

The custom options of the system. For example, font, color setting, and audio setting.

The function of the fast restoration scheme for the cold backup system and the scheduled tasks on the U2000 MSuite or U2000 overlaps. If the fast restoration scheme for the cold backup system is employed, do not manually import data to the MSuite. Instead, directly use the manual backup & restoration function of the scheme.


140



Restriction l

Before starting the secondary site, ensure that the license of the U2000 has been loaded on the secondary site. NOTE

Please refer Applying for a U2000 License to generate the both primary and secondary sites ESNs and send the contract number and the server ESNs to Huawei en gineers or the local Huawei office to apply a U2000 license . The U2000 license is loaded at both sites. l

Automatic backup and restoration scenario:

OS for Automatic Backup

OS for Automatic Restoration

WindowsServer2008

WindowsServer2008

Solaris

Solaris

SUSE Linux

SUSE Linux

Process Introduction to Fast Restoration Scheme for the U2000 Cold Backup System The fast restoration scheme for the U2000 cold backup system supports manual and automatic backup and restoration. If you use manual backup and restoration, you need to manually start the backup or restoration task each time. If you use automatic backup and restoration is used, you only need to configure a scheduled backup and a scheduled restoration task. The automatic backup and restoration is recommended. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Automatic backup and restoration scheme: To automatically back up and restore data, you need to configure scheduled backup tasks on the primary site and automatic restoration tasks on the secondary site. The process is as follows: a.

On the secondary site, install a single server U2000 whose version, deployment domain, language and database username are the same as those on the primary site.

b.

Configure scheduled backup tasks on the primary site. The backup files are generated through backup modules and stored on the primary site.

c.

Configure scheduled restoration tasks on the secondary site. Obtain the backup files through SFTP from the primary site and restore the files on the secondary site.

d.

When the primary site malfunctions, start the U2000 on the secondary site to fast restore the U2000.


141



Figure 3-13 Automatic backup and restoration scheme

l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Manual backup and restoration scheme: The manual backup and restoration scheme requires a cold backup tool to back up and restore data. The process is as follows: a.

On the secondary site, install a single server U2000 whose version, deployment domain, language and database username are the same as those on the primary site.

b.

Use a cold backup tool to back up the U2000 data on the primary site as backup files and store the files on the primary site.

c.

Copy the backup files from the primary site to the secondary site, and use the cold backup tool to restore the files on the secondary site.

d.

Start the U2000 on the secondary site.


142



Figure 3-14 Manual backup and restoration scheme

3.10.2 Creating Backup and Restoration Tasks After installing a U2000 whose version and deployment domain are the same as those on the primary site on the secondary site, users need to manually create backup and restoration tasks.

3.10.2.1 Configuring Automatic Backup Tasks on the Primary Site To realize fast system restoration in the cold backup solution, users need to manually create automatic backup tasks after installing a U2000 single-server system on the secondary site.

Prerequisites l

A single server U2000 system whose version, deployment domain, language, OS type, server time, and time zone are the same as those on the primary site is installed on the secondary site. For details about the installation procedure, see the U2000 Single-Server System Software Installation and Commissioning Guide .

l

The U2000 processes and the database are running on the primary site.

l

Network communication between the primary site and the secondary site is normal, and the minimum bandwidth is 10 Mbit/s.

l

The SFTP Server service has been activated on the primary site, and related ports (including the SFTP service port 22) have been enabled.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


143



NOTE

l

l

l

For details on enabling the SFTP Server service on a SUSE Linux operating system, see How to Start/Stop the FTP/SFTP/Telnet Service in the SUSE Linux OS.

l

For details on enabling the SFTP Server service on a Solaris operating system, see How to Start/Stop the FTP, SFTP, and Telnet Services.

l

For details on enabling the SFTP Server service on a Windows operating system, see A.5.17 How to Configure the FTP or SFTP Service on Windows . OS

If a firewall is deployed between the primary site and the secondary site, the SFTP service port (by default, port 22) on the firewall must be enabled. For details on enabling the SFTP service port on a firewall, see the firewall user guide. Only one scheduled backup or restoration task is allowed on a single server. For example, if you create a new automatic backup task on the primary site, the old backup task on the primary site will become invalid and only the new one will be retained.

Procedure Step 1 Run the following steps to execute the configuration script. NOTE

If execution of the configuration script fails, apply troubleshooting as prompted or contact Huawei technical support engineers. l

Windows Server 2008 OS: a.

Log in to the OS as the ossuser user.

b.

Navigate to the D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool directory and run the userconfig.bat script. Information similar to the following is displayed: Select a task type (1: backup, 2: restoration): NOTE

The preceding directory is true only if the U2000 is installed in D:\oss. If the U2000 is not installed in partition D, change the partition in the directory accordingly. l

Solaris or Linux OS: a.

Log in to the OS as the ossuser user through SSH by using PuTTY.

b.

Run the following command to switch to the root user and run the userconfig.sh script. $ su - root

Password: Password of the root user # cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool # ./userconfig.sh

Information similar to the following is displayed: Select a task type (1: backup, 2: restoration): NOTE

/opt/oss. If the U2000 is not The preceding directory true only the U2000 is installed installed in partition , change theifpartition in the directoryinaccordingly. /optis

Step 2 Enter a node for backup, such as 1 and press Enter. Information similar to the following is displayed: Set the interval of the scheduled task (1: daily, 2: weekly, 3: monthly)|1:

Step 3 Enter the backup interval, such as 1 and press Enter. Information similar to the following is displayed: Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


144



Set execution time (0-23)|1: NOTE

The time configured for the cold backup task does not overlap with the time when data is being restored using the MSuite. Cold backup may fail if the MSuite is restoring data.

Step 4 Enter the backup frequency, for example, if the frequency is 2:00 every day, enter 2 and press Enter.

Information similar to the following is displayed: Set the maximum number of backup files|30: NOTE l

The maximum number of backup files must match the size of disk that will hold the backup files, and is recommended to be 30.

l

It is recommended that you set the scheduled backup time to the time when network service traffic is light, such as at midnight (00:00 to 06:00).

Step 5 Enter the maximum number of backup files, such as 30, and press Enter. The scheduled task is successfully created if the following information is displayed. Scheduled task created successfully. NOTE

To query the configured maximum number of backup files, take either of the following approaches: l

For a Windows Server 2008 OS: Navigate to the path D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool\conf , and open the mark.inffile using Notepad. Information similar to maxbackupfiles=30 will be displayed.

l

For a Linux or Solaris OS: Navigate to the path /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool/conf , and run the cat mark.infcommand to view content in the mark.inffile. Information similar to will be displayed. maxbackupfiles=30

----End

Follow-up Procedure After a backup task is created on the primary site, use one of the following methods to verify whether the configuration of backup task is successful: l

Using query commands –

On the Windows Server 2008 OS: n

Check the backup task. 1)


2)

Run the following command in the command line window: > cd /d D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool > coldbackupInfo.bat -task

The backup task has been created if information similar to the following is displayed: cycle

time

daily 0:00 silent

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Command Line D:/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool/coldbackup.bat -


145



NOTE

The displayed value of cycle varies depending on the backup interval. For example:

n

l

If the configured backup interval is daily, the displayed value of Day is similar to daily.

l

If the configured backup interval is weekly, the displayed value of Day is similar to weekly: Sunday .

l

If the configured backup interval is monthly, the displayed value of Day is similar to monthly: 22.

Check the backup result. 1)


2)

Run the following command in the command line window: > cd /d D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool > coldbackupInfo.bat -result

The backup is successful if information similar to the following is displayed: 2015-07-28 21:20:29;Successful;backupDB;20150728211943.7z NOTE

The fields in the command output indicate the backup date and time, operation result (Successful/Failure), operation type (backupDB/restoreDB), and backup package (the timestamp in the file name indicates the backup time). NOTE

The directory D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool in the preceding command assumes that the U2000 is installed in the default directory D:\oss. If the U2000 is not installed in the default directory, replace the directory in the command accordingly.

–

On the Linux or Solaris OS: n

Check the backup task. 1)


2)

Run the following command to switch to the root user and run the coldbackupInfo.sh script. $ su - root

Password: Password of the root user # cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool # ./coldbackupInfo.sh -task

Information similar to the following is displayed: cycle time Command Line daily 0:00 cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool; ./ coldbackup.sh -silent > /dev/null 2>&1 NOTE

The displayed value of cycle varies depending on the backup interval. For example:

n

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l

If the configured backup interval is daily, the displayed value of Day is similar to daily.

l

If the configured backup interval is weekly, the displayed value of Day is similar to weekly: Sunday .

l

If the configured backup interval is monthly, the displayed value of Day is similar to monthly: 22.

Check the backup result. 1)


2)

Run the following command to switch to the root user and run the coldbackupInfo.sh script.


146



$ su - root

Password: Password of the root user # cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool # ./coldbackupInfo.sh -result

Information similar to the following is displayed: 2015-07-28 21:20:29;Successful;backupDB;20150728211943.7z NOTE

The fields in the command output indicate the backup date and time, operation result (Successful/Failure), operation type (backupDB/restoreDB), and backup package (the timestamp in the file name indicates the backup time). NOTE

The directory /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool in the preceding command assumes that the U2000 is installed in the default directory /opt/oss. If the U2000 is not installed in the default directory, replace the directory in the command accordingly. l

l

Check the log. –

On the Windows Server 2008 OS: When the scheduled time of the backup task is reached, check the d:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool\silent\coldbackupresult.txt file for the backup log.

–

On the Linux or Solaris OS: When the scheduled time of the backup task is reached, run tail -f /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool/silent/coldbackupresult.txt to check the backup log.

Check the backup files. –

On the Windows Server 2008 OS, the backup directory is D:\coldbackupdata and the backup files are in the 7z format.

–

On the Linux or Solaris OS, the backup directory is /opt/backup/ftpboot/ coldbackupdata and the backup files are in the 7z format.

3.10.2.2 Configuring Automatic Restoration on the Secondary Site This topic describes how to configure automatic restoration of the U2000 data on the secondary site.

Prerequisites l


l

On the secondary site, network management process and the maintenance tool are standby and the database is running. If the U2000 has started when the restoration task is performed, the U2000 process is automatically stopped.

l

Network communication between the primary site and the secondary site is normal, and the minimum bandwidth is 10 Mbit/s.

l

The primary site is running correctly. (If the primary site becomes faulty before automatic restoration starts, data cannot be restored on the secondary site.)

l

Only one scheduled backup or restoration task is allowed on a single server. For example, if you create a new automatic backup task on the primary site, the old backup task on the primary site will become invalid and only the new one will be retained.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


147



Procedure Step 1 Run the configuration script on the secondary site. NOTE

If execution of the configuration script fails, apply troubleshooting as prompted or contact Huawei technical support engineers. l



b.

Navigate to the D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool directory and run the userconfig.bat script. Information similar to the following is displayed: Select a task type (1: backup, 2: restoration): NOTE




b.

Run the following command to switch to the root user and run the userconfig.sh script. $ su - root

Password: Password of the root user # cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool # ./userconfig.sh

Information similar to the following is displayed: Select a task type (1: backup, 2: restoration): NOTE

The preceding directory is true only if the U2000 is installed in /opt/oss. If the U2000 is not installed in partition /opt, change the partition in the directory accordingly.

Step 2 Enter a node for restoration, such as 2 and press Enter. Information similar to the following is displayed: Set the interval of the scheduled task(1:daily,2:weekly,3:monthly)|1:

Step 3 Enter the automatic restoration interval, for example, if the automatic restoration task is performed once every day, enter 1 and press Enter. Information similar to the following is displayed: Set execution time (0-23)|1:

Step 4 Enter the time to start the automatic restoration task, such as 5 and press Enter. Information similar to the following is displayed: >>>>>Enter the peer SFTP user<<<<< Enter the peer SFTP IP address: Enter the password for SFTP user:

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


148



NOTE l

The interval between the automatic restoration time and the automatic backup time is fixed at 3 hours. For example, if the automatic backup time is 2 a.m., set the automatic restoration time to 5 a.m.

l

If connection to the primary site fails due to Primary Site Authentication Error when you enter the primary site's SFTP information, see How Do I Handle the Failure to Connect Two Servers Due to a Mutual Trust Authentication Error? for troubleshooting.

l

Reconfigure the automatic restoration task if the SFTP user's password is changed.

Step 5 Enter the IP address and SFTP user name of the primary site, and press Enter. In this example, IP address is 192.168.0.0 and default password of the SFTP user is Changeme_123. The information is used by the secondary site to obtain the backup file from the primary site by using the SFTP. The scheduled task is successfully created if the following information is displayed. Scheduled restoration will automatically shut down the U2000 and MSuite. Scheduled task created successfully.

----End

Result After an automatic restore task is created on the secondary site, use one of the following methods to verify whether the configuration of restore task is successful: l

Using query commands –

On the Windows Server 2008 OS: n

Check the restoration task. 1) 2)

Log in to the OS as the ossuser user. Run the following command in the command line window: > cd /d D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool > coldbackupInfo.bat -task

The restoration task has been created if information similar to the following is displayed: cycle time daily 0:00 silent

Command Line D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool\coldrestore.bat -

NOTE

The displayed value of cycle varies depending on the restoration interval. For example:

n

l

If the configured restoration interval is daily, the displayed value of Day is similar to daily.

l

If the configured restoration interval is weekly, the displayed value of Day is similar to weekly: Sunday .

l

If the configured restoration interval is monthly, the displayed value of Day is similar to monthly: 22.

Check the restoration result. 1)


2)

Run the following command in the command line window: > cd /d D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool > coldbackupInfo.bat -result

The restoration is successful if information similar to the following is displayed: 2015-07-28 21:48:56;Successful;restoreDB;20150728211943.7z

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


149



NOTE

The fields in the command output indicate the restoration date and time, operation result (Successful/Failure), operation type (backupDB/restoreDB), and backup package (the timestamp in the file name indicates the backup time of the data to be restored). NOTE

The directory D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool in the preceding command assumes that the U2000 is installed in the default directory D:\oss. If the U2000 is not installed in the default directory, replace the directory in the command accordingly.

–

On the Linux or Solaris OS: n

Check the restoration task. 1)


2)


Password: Password of the root user # cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool # ./coldbackupInfo.sh -task

Information similar to the following is displayed: cycle time Command Line daily 0:00 cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool; ./ coldrestore.sh -silent > /dev/null 2>&1 NOTE

The displayed value of cycle varies depending on the restoration interval. For example: l

If the configured restoration interval is daily, the displayed value of Day is

l

similar to daily. If the configured restoration interval is weekly, the displayed value of Day is similar to weekly: Sunday .

l

n

If the configured restoration interval is monthly, the displayed value of Day is similar to monthly: 22.

Check the restoration result. 1)


2)


Password: Password of the root user # cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool # ./coldbackupInfo.sh -result

Information similar to the following is displayed: 2015-07-28 21:48:56;Successful;restoreDB;20150728211943.7z NOTE

The fields in the command output indicate the restoration date and time, operation result (Successful/Failure), operation type (backupDB/restoreDB), and backup package (the timestamp in the file name indicates the backup time of the data to be restored). NOTE

The directory /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool in the preceding command assumes that the U2000 is installed in the default directory /opt/oss. If the U2000 is not installed in the default directory, replace the directory in the command accordingly. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Checking the log Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150



–

On the Windows Server 2008 OS: When the scheduled time of the backup task is reached, check the D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool\silent\coldbackupresult.txt file for the restore log.

–

On the Linux or Solaris OS: When the scheduled time of the backup task is reached, run tail -f /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackup tool/silent/coldrestoreresult.txt to check the restore log.

Follow-up Procedure After automatic is implemented first time, the U2000 process on the primary site andrestoration start the U2000 process onfor thethe secondary sitestop to ensure that the process can function properly. l

If the U2000 process runs properly on the secondary site, stop the U2000 process on the secondary sites start the U2000 process on the primary site.

l

If the U2000 process not runs properly on the secondary site, re-execute the restore task on the secondary sites or contact Huawei technical support personnel. NOTE

After data restoration fails, if the missing database files fault is found in the log file, rectify the fault by following the instructions provided in How to Rectify the Data Restoration Failure on a Secondary Site Because of Missing Databases.

3.10.3 Manually Execute Backup and Restoration Tasks You can manually execute backup tasks on the primary site and restoration tasks on the secondary site to implement system restoration in the case of an emergency.

3.10.3.1 Executing Backup Tasks on the Primary Site You can manually execute backup tasks on the primary site.

Prerequisites l


l

The U2000 processes and the database are running on the primary site.

l

The time configured for the cold backup task does not overlap with the time when data is being restored using the MSuite. Cold backup may fail if the MSuite is restoring data.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the U2000 on the primary site and manually execute the backup script. NOTE

If execution of the backup script fails, apply troubleshooting as prompted or contact Huawei technical support engineers. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Windows Server 2008 OS:


151



NOTICE – Do not close the command window when the backup script is running. – If you press Ctrl+C while the manual backup task is running, the manual backup operation will be forcibly terminated. When forcible termination is incurred, manually delete the file that is not completely backed up from the backup directory. a.


b.

Enter the D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool directory, and execute the coldbackup.bat script. Information similar to the following is displayed: Please enter a back up file path|D:\backup:

c.

Enter the directory (recommended: D:\backup) where the backup file resides, and press Enter. NOTE

The backup directory must not contain special characters. Only letters, digits, and underscores <_> are allowed.

The backup task is successfully executed if the following information is displayed. Running task Initialize the backup.............................................RunSucceeded Running task Back up U2000 service files.......................................RunSucceeded Running task Backup Database...................................................RunSucceeded Running task After backup operation............................................RunSucceeded

Compression is complete. Result:D:\backup\20150601114517.7z Execution completed. For detailed execution results, see the file: D:\oss \engr\tools\coldbackuptool\bcpoutput.zip NOTE


Solaris or Linux OS:

NOTICE If you press Ctrl+C while the manual backup task is running, the manual backup operation will be forcibly terminated. When forcible termination is incurred, manually delete the file that is not completely backed up from the backup directory. a.


b.

Run the following commands to switch to the root user, and execute the coldbackup.sh script. $ su - root

Password: Password of the root user

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


152



# cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool # ./coldbackup.sh

Information similar to the following is displayed: Please enter a back up file path|/opt/backup:

c.

Enter the directory (recommended: opt/backup) where the backup file resides, and press Enter. NOTE n

The backup directory must not contain special characters. Only letters, digits, and underscores <_> are allowed.

n

If a non-recommended backup directory is used, ensure that its owner is ossuserand the owner group is ossgroup. The owner must have the write permission on the backup directory.

The backup task is successfully executed if the following information is displayed. Running task Initialize the backup.............................................RunSucceeded Running task Back up U2000 service files.......................................RunSucceeded Running task Backup Database...................................................RunSucceeded Running task After backup operation............................................RunSucceeded

Compression is complete. Result:/opt/backup/20150601114517.7z Execution completed. For detailed execution results, see the file: /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool/bcpoutput.zip NOTE


----End

Result After the backup tasks are started on the primary site, perform the following operations to check whether the tasks are successfully executed: l

Check the backup file. Switch to the backup directory specified for the backup task, and check whether the backup file is generated.

After the backup tasks are executed successfully on the primary site, copy backup files to the secondary site in a timely manner.

3.10.3.2 Manually Execute Restoration Tasks on the Secondary Site You can manually execute restoration tasks on the secondary site to restore the system in the case of an emergency.

Prerequisites l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

A single server U2000 system whose version, deployment domain, language, OS type, server time, and time zone are the same as those on the primary site is installed on the Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153



secondary site. For details about the installation procedure, see the U2000 Single-Server System Software Installation and Commissioning Guide . l

On the secondary site, network management process and the maintenance tool are standby and the database is running. If the U2000 has started when the restoration task is performed, the U2000 process is automatically stopped.

l

The latest backup files have been obtained from the primary site, including the backup files in *.7z and *.asc formats. For example, use FileZilla to download the backup files from the primary site to the local and then upload them to the secondary site.

l

For Linux and Solaris, ensure that the owner for the backup file and the path in which backup file is stored is ossuser and the user group for the path is ossgroup and the path has the read and execution permissions. You do not need to change the permission for the /opt directory. Run the following commands as the root user for the last directory of the path: # chown -R ossuser:ossgroup path # chmod -R 750 path

Run the following command for the backup file: # chown ossuser:ossgroupbackup file name # chmod 600 backup file name

For example, if the path is /opt/backup, run the following commands as user root: # chown -R ossuser:ossgroup /opt/backup # chmod -R 750 /opt/backup

If the backup file is backupfile.7z, run the following commands as user root: # cd /opt/backup # chown ossuser:ossgroupbackupfile.7z # chmod 600 backupfile.7z

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the U2000 on the secondary site and manually execute the restoration script. NOTE

If execution of the restoration script fails, apply troubleshooting as prompted or contact Huawei technical support engineers. l

Windows Server 2008 OS:

NOTICE – Do not close the command window when the restoration script is running. – If you press Ctrl+C while the manual restoration task is running, the manual restoration operation will be forcibly terminated. When forcible termination is incurred, try the restoration task again.

a. b.

Log in to the OS as the ossuser user. Navigate to the D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool directory, execute the coldrestore.bat script, and enter the directory to which the .7z file for backing up source server data is stored or decompressed, for example, the directory of backing up source server data is D:\backup\20150531144932.7z. NOTE

If both the U2000 and MSuite are running, executing this file will automatically stop the U2000 and MSuite. In addition, related descriptions about service stopping will be displayed before you enter the directory for the .7z file.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


154



The restoration task is successfully executed if the following information is displayed. Running task Initialize before restore.............................................RunSucceeded Running task Restore Database...................................................RunSucceeded Running task Restore U2000 service files.......................................RunSucceeded Running task After restore operation............................................RunSucceeded

Successful tasks:4 Risky tasks:0 Execution completed. For detailed execution results, see the file: D:\oss \engr\tools\coldbackuptool\bcpoutput.zip NOTE


Solaris or Linux OS:

NOTICE If you press Ctrl+C while the manual restoration task is running, the manual restoration operation will be forcibly terminated. When forcible termination is incurred, try the restoration task again. a.


b.

Run the following commands to switch to the root user, execute the coldrestore.sh script, and enter the directory to which the .7z file for backing up source server data is stored or decompressed, for example, the directory of backing up source server data is /opt/backup/20150531144932.7z. $ su - root

Password: Password of the root user # cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool # ./coldrestore.sh Enter the directory to which the .7z file for backing up source server data is stored:Directory to the .7z file NOTE

If both the U2000 and MSuite are running, executing this file will automatically stop the U2000 and MSuite. In addition, related descriptions about service stopping will be displayed before you enter the directory for the .7z file.

The restoration task is successfully executed if the following information is displayed. Running task Initialize before restore.............................................RunSucceeded Running task Restore Database...................................................RunSucceeded Running task Restore U2000 service files.......................................RunSucceeded Running task After restore operation............................................RunSucceeded

Successful tasks:4 Risky tasks:0

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


155



Execution completed. For detailed execution results, see the file: /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool/bcpoutput.zip NOTE


----End

Result After thewhether restoration on theexecuted: secondary site, perform the following operations to check the tasks tasksare are started successfully l

Start the U2000 process and ensure that the U2000 process can start normally. NOTE

After data restoration fails, if the missing database files fault is found in the log file, rectify the fault by following the instructions provided in How to Rectify the Data Restoration Failure on a Secondary Site Because of Missing Databases.

3.10.4 Restoring the U2000 on the Secondary S ite This topic describes how to fast restore the U2000 on the secondary site when the primary site malfunctions.

Prerequisites l

U2000 MSuite is ended on the secondary site.

l

The last automatic restoration task on the secondary site is successfully executed. NOTE l

In this example, the U2000 installation directory is D:\oss\. On the Windows 2008 OS, check the d:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool\silent\coldrestoreresult file .txt for the status of the automatic restoration task.

l

On the Linux or Solaris OS, run tail -f /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool/silent/ coldrestoreresult.txt to check the status of the automatic restoration task.

l

The license of the U2000 has been loaded on the secondary site.

l

On SNMP-based routers, switches, PTN 6900, PTN 7900, access devices, and security devices, the server IP address of the primary site and that of the secondary site have been added to the list of IP addresses of the Trap destination host.

Procedure Step 1 End the restoration task on the secondary site and start the U2000. l

l



b.

Navigate to the D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool directory and execute the stopCron.bat script.

c.

Navigate to the D:\oss\server\platform\bin directory and execute startnms.bat command to start the U2000.


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Log in to the OS as the ossuser user through SSH by using PuTTY. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156


b.


Run the following commands to switch to the root user and end the restoration task on the secondary site: $ su - root

Password: Password of the root user # cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool # ./stopCron.sh

c.

Run the following commands to switch to the ossuser user and start the U2000: # su - ossuser $ cd /opt/oss/server/platform/bin $ ./startnms.sh

Step 2 End the backup task on the primary server. l

l



b.

Navigate to the D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool directory and execute the stopCron.bat script.



b.

Run the following commands to switch to the root user and end the backup task on the secondary site: $ su - root

Password: Password of the root user # cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool # ./stopCron.sh

Step 3 Log in to the U2000 by using the IP address of the new U2000 server. ----End


If the U2000 interworks with the upper-layer OSS or uTraffic, reconfigure their interworking to ensure that the upper-layer OSS or uTraffic is able to access the U2000 through the IP address and port number of the secondary site.

l

Reconnect to the U2000 client. For details, see the Logging In to a U2000 Client section in the U2000 Administrator Guide.

3.10.5 Switching to the Primary Site This topic describes how to switch the U2000 from the secondary site to the primary site after the primary site is recovered.

Context After the primary site is recovered, the U2000 needs to be switched back to the primary site.

Procedure Step 1 End the U2000 on the secondary site. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)



b.

Navigate to the D:\oss\server\platform\bin directory and execute the stopnms.bat command to end the U2000. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157



NOTE




b.

Run the following commands to end the U2000: $ cd /opt/oss/server/platform/bin $ ./stopnms.sh NOTE


Step 2 Start the U2000 on the primary site. NOTE

Ensure that you have stopped U2000 process on the secondary site before starting the U2000 process on the primary site. Otherwise, the U2000 process runs on both the primary and secondary sites. l

l



b.

Navigate to the D:\oss\server\platform\bin directory and execute the startnms.bat command to start the U2000.



b.

Run the following commands to start the U2000: $ cd /opt/oss/server/platform/bin $ ./startnms.sh

Step 3 Start the srcinal automatic backup tasks of the primary site. l

l

On the Windows Server 2008 OS a.


b.

Navigate to the D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool directory and execute the startCron.bat to start the automatic backup tasks.

On the Linux or Solaris OS a.


b.

Run the following command to switch to the root user and start the automatic backup tasks: $ su - root

Password: Password of the root user # cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool # ./startCron.sh NOTE

If the U2000 has been reinstalled or backup tasks need to be reconfigured due to special reasons, following the operation procedure described in 3.10.2.1 Configuring Automatic Backup Tasks on the Primary Site .

Step 4 Start the srcinal automatic backup tasks of the secondary site. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

On the Windows Server 2008 OS a.


b.

Navigate to the D:\oss\engr\tools\coldbackuptool directory and execute the startCron.bat to start the automatic backup tasks. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158



On the Linux or Solaris OS a.


b.

Run the following command to switch to the root user and start the automatic backup tasks: $ su - root

Password: Password of the root user # cd /opt/oss/engr/tools/coldbackuptool # ./startCron.sh NOTE

3.10.2.2 Configuring Automatic Restoration To the backup on reconfigure the Secondary Site . tasks of the secondary site, see

----End


If the U2000 interworks with the upper-layer OSS or uTraffic, reconfigure their interworking to ensure that the upper-layer OSS or uTraffic is able to access the U2000 through the IP address and port number of the secondary site.

l

Reconnect to the U2000 client. For details, see the Logging In to a U2000 Client section in the U2000 Administrator Guide.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


159


About This Chapter

4

4 Commissioning the U2000

Commissioning the U2000

This topic describes how to commission the U2000. Usually, the server delivered by Huawei has been preinstalled, and you do not need to reinstall the U2000 on the server.You can directly commission the U2000 and modify the system and U2000 parameters according to on-site requirements to allow for the normal use of the U2000.If the server has not been preinstalled by Huawei, install the U2000 and commission the system. To allow the U2000 to manage the network, you must commission the U2000 before using the U2000 to manage NEs and configuring services. NOTE

This chapter applies to commissioning of a newly installed U2000 server, instead of maintenance.

4.1 Commissioning Preparation This topic describes the preparations for the commissioning of the U2000. 4.2 Performing Commissioning This topic describes how to commission the U2000 and system parameters. If the system has been preinstalled, perform U2000 commissioning only.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


160



4.1 Commissioning Preparation This topic describes the preparations for the commissioning of the U2000.

4.1.1 Obtaining Commissioning Parameters Planning commissioning parameters is a prerequisite to U2000 commissioning. For details about the method of planning commissioning parameters, see the associated section in U2000 Planning Guide and fill in the commissioning parameter table. Table 4-1 U2000 commissioning parameters

Item

Parameter

PlanningMethod

Access

-

Transport

Deploy IP

Remarks some As of the domains may not be deployed during U2000 installation, you can use the domain deployment function to deploy a new domain as needed so that the U2000 can manage NEs in this domain. NOTE If some domains are gray, the domains have been deployed.

Access

-

Undeploy Transport

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


disable To the U2000 from managing NEs in a domain, undeploy the domain to improve system

161


Item

Parameter


PlanningMethod

Remarks operation efficiency. Do not select all the domains because there must be at least one domain deployed.

IP

NOTE If some domains are gray, the domains have not been deployed.

Set Controller

IMM/iMana IP Address:

Configure CORBA NBI instance Configure SNMP NBI instance

For details, see section IP Address Planning for the Single-Server System (Windows) in U2000 Planning Guide. For details, see section Table 4-2.

Configure XML NBI instance XML NBI Certificate

Configure performance Text NBI instance XML NBI Certificate CORBA NBI Certificate

Set Date Time Zone

For details, see section Time and Time Zone Planning in U2000 Planning Guide. Time zone:

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l


Time zone: Set this parameter to the local time zone, such as (UTC +08:00)Beijing,C hongqing,Hong Kong,Urumqi.

l

If only the time zone needs to be modified , restart the operatin g system after the modifica tion so

162


Item


Parameter

PlanningMethod

Date Time:

l

Remarks

Date Time: Set this parameter to the local time.

that the time is automati cally adjusted based on the new time l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Anti-Virus Software

Whether to enable Anti-Virus Software

Set Password

DataBase Administrato r

Old Passwo rd:

New Password :

DataBase User

Old Passwo rd:

New Password :

zone. If the time zone and time both need to be changed, change the time first and then the time zone. After the operatin g system is restarted, the new time is automati cally adjusted based on the new time zone.

For details, see section Antivirus in U2000 Planning Guide. For details, see section U2000 Server User Password Planning in U2000 Planning Guide.


163


Item

Parameter MSuite Administrato r

Internal NMS Certificate


PlanningMethod Old Passwo rd:

Remarks

New Password :

CertificateList

Includetwo Certificates: l

l

Set SBI Certificate

Set U2100 Certificate

Set Other Certificate

Security Hardening

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Certs folder Certs Path

Identity Certificate

FileName:

Trust Certificate

File Name:

SSL Client Certificate

FileName:

SSL Server Certificate

File Name:

l

Default folder:default.

l

Default path:D: \oss\server\etc\ssl \nemanager \default.

Trust Certifica te. CRL.

PFX Password:

PFX Password:

PFX Password:

Whether to enable security hardening

For details, see section OS Security Hardening Planning in U2000 Planning Guide.


164


Item

Parameter


PlanningMethod

Remarks The Windows OS does not support configuratio n of the U2000 server to

Set NTP

NTP server IP address:

For details, see section NTP Service Planning in U2000 Planning Guide.

function as the NTP server. Therefore, you must configure both the U2000 server and U2000 clients as NTP clients to trace external clock sources.

Route network segment 1

Set Route

Route network segment 2 ...

For details, see section Route Planning in U2000 Planning Guide.

Route network segment N

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


165


Item SetNetwork

Set Host Name

Parameter IPAddress:

Host Name:


PlanningMethod

Remarks

Fordetails,see section IP Address Planning for the Single-Server System (Windows) in U2000 Planning Guide.

After the server IP address is modified, you can run the svc_deploy -cmd queryhost command to view the server IP address. If the current server IP address is inconsistent with the planned IP address, modify it.

For details, see section Host Name Planning in U2000

Planning Guide.

Table 4-2 NBI commissioning parameters

Item

Parameter

Parameter

Naming service host address:

It is recommended that all IP addresses be the application IP addresses used on the U2000. If the IP addresses to be changed are in Configure Network, the commissioning tool automatically changes the IP addresses. Manual operations are not required. The IP addresses for the notification service and CORBA agent

Configure CORBA NBI Instance

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Notify service host address:


Remarks

166


Item

Parameter


Parameter

Remarks

are the same. The naming service may be deployed in centralized mode. You must confirm the deployment mode with upperlayer OSS.

CORBA Agent Host Address:

This IP address is used to interconnect with the upper-layer OSS. It can be different from the U2000 application IP address. It must allow the upperlayer OSS to use the IP address and port number to access the U2000. If address translation exists, host names can be used. However, if host names are used, you must modify the host files on the U2000 and upper-layer OSS server and provide the mappings between host names and IP addresses. For details, see U2000 CORBA NBI User Guide.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


167


Item

Parameter


Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the port used by the upperlayer OSS to obtain the naming service and to use CORBA NBIs to access the U2000. If this port is shielded on the

Naming Service Port:

firewall between the upper-layer OSS and U2000, the naming service may become unavailable. This port cannot conflict with ports used by other services on the U2000 server. Default value: 12001 for the non-SSL mode and 22001 for the SSL mode. Specifies the port used by CORBA NBIs to send

Notify Service Port:

notifications to the upper-layer OSS. If this port is shielded on the firewall between the upperlayer OSS and U2000, no notification is received. This port cannot conflict with ports used by other services on the U2000 server. Default value: 12002 for the non-SSL mode and 22002 for the SSL mode.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


168


Item

Parameter

CORBA Agent Port:


Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the port used by the CORBA service. This port cannot conflict with ports used by other services on the U2000 server. Default value: 12003 for the non-SSL mode and 22003 for the SSL mode.

Character Set: l

UTF-8

l

GBK

l

ISO8859-1

Specifies the encoding format of the information reported by CORBA NBIs. This parameter must be set according to the on-site situations of the upper-layer OSS. If the character set used by the upperlayer OSS is different from that used by CORBA NBIs, garbled characters may exist on the upper-layer OSS. Default value: UTF-8.

Set EMS Name:

Set EMS Name

Specifies the identifier used by the upper-layer OSS to distinguish different sets of U2000. If multiple sets of U2000 are integrated into the same upperlayer OSS, this parameter must be set based on carriers' NMS planning. Default value: Huawei/U2000.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


169


Item

Parameter


Parameter

Maximum Capacity of a Log File

Remarks

Specifies the maximum size of a log file, ranging from 1 MB to 20 MB. Keeping the default value is recommended. Default value: 20 MB.

Log Output Mode

l

Log periodically

l

Log immediately

Specifies the mode of generating logs. Keeping the default value is recommended. Default value: Log immediately.

l

Assertion/ Internal Error Log – Enable – Disable

l

External Error Log – Enable

Log Level

– Disable l

I/O Error Log – Enable – Disable

l

Runtime Trace Log – Enable

Specifies the level of generating logs. This parameter is used for troubleshooting. Keeping the default value is recommended. l Assertion/ Internal Error Log: Enable l

External Error Log: Enable

l

I/O Error Log: Enable

l

Runtime Trace Log: Disable.

– Disable

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


170


Item


Parameter

Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the type of an NE ID. If the NE ID type is incorrect, the upper-layer OSS fails to be parsed correctly. Configure this parameter after confirming with the upper-layer OSS. Only transport NEs have physical IDs. l

NE ID

NE ID Type

l

Logic al ID

l

Physi cal ID

Physical ID: is expressed in dotted decimal notation and equals to the NE ID x 65536 + extended ID. For example, if the NE ID is 1 and the extended ID is 9 for NE(9-1), the physical ID is 65545.

l

Physical ID: expressed in is dotted decimal notation and is automatically assigned by the U2000 to NEs. For example, 3145765. Default value: Logical ID.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


171


Item


Parameter

Virtual NE Enablin g

Parameter

Specifie s whether the query results contain virtual SDH Nes:

l

Enabl e

l

Disab le

Remarks

Specifies whether virtual NEs are enabled while querying NEs, SDH paths, routes, and fibers. If the upperlayer OSS uses virtual NEs or manages devices from other vendors, enable this function. Otherwise, disable this function. Default value: Enable.

Enablin g Correla tive Alarm

l

All

l

Root

Specifies whether CORBA NBIs are enabled with alarm correlative analysis so that correlative alarms are reported in alarm update mode. Default value: All. Specifies whether CORBA NBIs report maintenance alarms and need to be used along with the U2000 engineering task. By default, all alarms are reported.

Engine ering Alarm

l

Enable

l

Disable

l

Disable: specifies that all alarms are queried and reported.

l

Enable: specifies that all alarms excluding engineering alarms are queried and reported.

Default value: Disable.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


172


Item

Parameter


Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the rule for identifying objects reported from CORBA NBIs to the U2000.

Object Identifi er

l

Internal ID

l

Object name

l

Internal ID: specifies that the ID assigned by the U2000 is the unique identifier of an object.

l

Object name: specifies that the object name displayed on the U2000 is the unique identifier of an object. The object name on the U2000 client must be the same as that on the U2000 server. Otherwise, data conflicts may occur.

Default value: Internal ID. Specifies whether information about the fibers and paths affected by alarms is reported.

Alarmaffecte d Object Reporti ng

l

Disable

l

Enable

l

Enable: specifies that the names of the paths and fibers affected by alarms are queried and reported.

l

Disable: specifies that the names of the paths and fibers affected by alarms are not reported.

Default value: Disable.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


173


Item

Parameter


Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the IP address and port number used by the U2000 to interconnect with the upper-layer OSS. Ensure that SNMP NBIs can use the IP

Trap Sending Address/Port:

Configure SNMP NBI Instance

address and port number to send trap messages to the upper-layer OSS. Ensure that this port is not shielded by the firewall between the upper-layer OSS and U2000 and the port does not conflict with other ports used by the services of the upper-layer OSS. Default value of port: 6666.

SNMP Agent

Request Receiving Address/Port:

Specifies the IP address and port number used by the U2000 to interconnect with the upper-layer OSS. Ensure that upperlayer OSS can use the IP address and port number to send trap messages to the U2000. Ensure that this port is not shielded by the firewall between the upper-layer OSS and U2000 and the port does other not conflict with ports used by the services of the upper-layer OSS. Default value of port: 9812.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


174


Item


Parameter

Security Model

Parameter

USM

Remarks

SNMPv3 applies user-based security mechanism, and USM is such a security mechanism. Currently, only USM is supported. Default value: USM.

l

SNMP v3 Parame ters

l

With authe nticat ion, witho ut encry ption

l

With authe nticat ion and encry ption

Security Level

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

With out authe nticat ion and encry ption

Specifies the security level of SNMPv3. After the security level is configured, you must selected a required protocol and set the password. The security level configured must be the same as that used for the interconnection with the upper-layer OSS. Default value: Without authentication and encryption.


175


Item


Parameter

Parameter Specifies the authentication protocol used for users to access SNMP NBIs. The value of this parameter must be the same as the

l

Authent ication

HMA CMD 5 l

Remarks

HMA CSH A

authentication protocol used for the interconnection with the upper-layer OSS. The authentication protocol can be set when the security level is With authentication, without encryption or With authentication and encryption. Specifies the protocol used for encrypting

Data Encrypt ion

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l

DES

l

AES

communication data. The value of this parameter must be the same as the data encryption protocol used for the interconnection with the upper-layer OSS. The data encryption protocol must be set when the security level is With authentication and encryption. The AES protocol is recommended because it provides better security.


176


Item


Parameter

Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the IP address or port number of the upperlayer OSS. This parameter is used to receive trap messages sent by SNMP NBIs. Trap Destination Address/Port:

ThirdParty NMS

Ensure that this port is not shielded by the firewall between the upper-layer OSS and U2000 and the port does not conflict with other ports used by the services of the upper-layer OSS. Default value of port: 6666.

SNMP Version

l

v1

l

v2c

l

v3

Specifies the protocol version used by SNMP NBIs. SNMPv3 is recommended because it is more secure than SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c. Default value: v3.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


177


Item

Parameter


Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the password used for the upper-layer OSS to access the U2000 when the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c use read and write community names. Read/Write Community

If this parameter is set incorrectly, the upper-layer OSS cannot obtain U2000 information from SNMP NBIs. Default value of Read Community: Changeme_123. Default value of Write Community: Changeme_123.

v3 User Name

Specifies the user name and password used for SNMPv3– based security mechanism. If this parameter is not set, the upper-layer OSS cannot obtain U2000 information from SNMP NBIs. Default value: admin.

v3 Authentication Password

The authentication password must be set when the security level is set to With authentication, without encryption or With authentication and encryption. This parameter is used for the upper-layer OSS to access the U2000 using SNMP NBIs. Default value: Changeme_123.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


178


Item


Parameter

Parameter

Remarks

The communication encryption password must be set if the security level is With authentication and encryption.

v3 Privacy Password

Default value: Changeme_123.

Alarm Severity

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l

Critic al

l

Majo r

l

Mino r

l

Warn ing

Specifies the levels of the alarms reported by SNMP NBIs. The U2000 reports all alarms by default.


179


Item


Parameter

Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the types of alarms reported by SNMP NBIs. l

l

Alarm Categor y

l

Fault

l

Ackn owle dged

l

Unac know ledge d

l

Chan ged

Fault: An alarm is generated when a fault occurs. Acknowledged: After an alarm is confirmed, SNMP NBIs report an acknowledged alarm.

l

Unacknowledged : After an alarm is reversely confirmed, SNMP NBIs report an unacknowledged alarm.

l

Changed: If alarm information is changed, SNMP NBIs report a changed alarm which contains the alarm level change, alarm influence path, and alarm root cause identifier.

Default value: Fault

Heartb eat settings

Heartbeat period

Specifies the period of transmitting heartbeat messages. When the U2000 MIB is used, SNMP NBIs report heartbeat messages within the specified period. Default value: 60s

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


180


Item


Parameter

Parameter

l

Enabl e

l

Disab le

Remarks

Specifies whether to report heartbeat messages. U2000 MIB, instead of U2000–T MIB, supports the reporting of heartbeat messages. Default value: Enable

Alarm report field

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Specifies the binding variables contained in the alarm information reported by SNMP NBIs. This parameter must be set according to the alarm planning for the upper-layer OSS. For details, see U2000 SNMP NBI User Guide.


181


Item


Parameter

Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the mode of reporting trap messages by SNMP NBIs. Keeping the default value is recommended.

Report mode

l

Trap

l

Infor m

Report settings

l

Trap: After trap messages are reported, the system does not need to report the next trap message until a response is received from the upper-layer OSS.

l

Inform: After trap messages are reported, the system starts to report the next trap message until a response is received from the upper-layer OSS or the number of attempts exceeds the threshold.

Default value: Trap

Whethe r to use X.733

l

Yes

l

No

Specifies whether trap messages use the event type and level defined by X. 733. Default value: No

Trap sending interval

Specifies the interval for sending messages in Trap mode. Default value: 0

Inform delay

Specifies the delay for sending the next packet in Inform mode. Default value: 5

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


182


Item


Parameter

Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the number of allowed reconnection times in Inform mode upon a connection failure.

Inform retry attempts

Default value: 3 l

l

Report time format

Alarm Time Format l

Encodi ng Format

Filterin g correlat ive alarm

Alarm Encodin g Format:

UTC Time Local Time (with out time zone) Local Time (with time zone)

l

UTF8

l

GBK

Specifies the format of the time used by the upper-layer OSS. Default value: UTC Time

Set this parameter based on the planning for the upper-layer OSS. Default value: UTF-8 All: specifies that all alarms, including the root and correlative alarms, are queried and reported.

l

All

l

Root

Root: specifies that only root alarms and common alarms that have no correlative relationship are queried and reported. Default value: All

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


183


Item


Parameter

Parameter

Remarks

Default value: Disable

Filterin g enginee ring

l

Enable

Disable: specifies that all alarms are queried and reported.

l

Disable

Enable: specifies

alarm

that all alarms except for engineering alarms are queried and reported. Set this parameter based on the MIB file used for the integration of the upper-layer OSS.

MIB Frame

MIB

l

U200 0 MIB

l

U200 0-T MIB

T2000NETMANAGEME NT-MIB.mib: U2000-T MIB HWIMAPV1NORTHBO UND-TRAPMIB.mib or HWIMAPV2NORTHBO UND-TRAPMIB.mib: U2000 MIB

Others

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Whethe r to record logs

l

Enabl e

Specifies whether to record logs.

l

Disab le



184


Item


Parameter

Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the size of the cache for realtime alarms. Every upper-layer OSS user is assigned with an independent cache. Real-time alarm cache size

If the alarm generation rate is larger than the alarm report rate, NBI interfaces save alarm information to the cache. Default value: 10000 Specifies whether to use the common or SSL mode. The default port used varies according to the mode. The SSL mode is recommended because it enables better security.

Use SSL

Default value: Select the Use SSL check box. Configure XML NBI Instance

JMS Type

activeM Q

Specifies the middleware type of teh JMS service. Currently, the activeMQ middleware is supported. Specifies the IP address of the JMS service. Set this parameter to the IP

IP Address

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

address of the U2000 server. Ensure that the upper-level OSS can use this IP address to access the U2000.


185


Item

Parameter

Port


Parameter

Remarks

Specifics the number of the port used by the JMS middleware. This parameter is usedfor sending notifications to the upper-layer OSS. Default value: 13172

IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the Web service. Set this parameter to the IP address of the U2000 server. Ensure that the upper-level OSS can use this IP address to access the U2000. Specifies the number of the port used by XML NBIs. The upper-layer OSS

HTTPS Port Web Service

uses this port to obtain Web service data from XML NBIs. Default value: 9997

Register JMS service

When the upperlayer OSS needs to use AFB-based interface (such as getInventory), the JMS service needs to be registered. If only the synchronization mode (such as SIT or SRR) is used, do not register the JMS service in order to save system resources. Default value: Yes.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


186


Item


Parameter

Parameter

HTTP Protocol

l

Http

l

Https

Remarks

Specifies the protocol type of the Web service. This parameter is set based on the protocol selected by the upper-layer OSS. HTTPS is recommended because it is more secure than HTTP. Default value: Https

Product log level

l

Debug

l

Warn

l

Error

Specifies the level of the logs generated by XML NBIs. This parameter is used for troubleshooting. Default value: Warn

Filterin g correlat ive alarm

All: specifies that all alarms, including the root and correlative alarms, are queried and reported. l

All

l

Root

Root: specifies that only root alarms and common alarms that have no correlative relationship are queried and reported. Default value: All

Encoding format: l

UTF-8

l

GBK

Set this parameter based on the planning for the upper-layer OSS. Default value: UTF-8

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


187


Item


Parameter

Parameter

Manag ement domain

These parameters are used to distinguish different sets of U2000 when they are managed by the same upper-layer OSS. Set the parameters

Domain Name:

Remarks

according to carriers' NMS planning. Default value: Huawei/U2000 When XML NBIs are used to query WDM routes, WDM routes are returned based on a specified order, which is convenient for the analysis of the upper-layer OSS. WDM route return order

l

None

l

Forward

l

Backward

None: specifies that WDM routes are sent randomly. Forward: specifies that WDM routes are sent from the source to the sink. Backward: specifies that WDM routes are sent from the sink to the source. Default value: None

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


188


Item

Parameter l


Parameter

Remarks

Filter Out Alarm Notification – Enable – Disable

l

Filter Out Inventory Notification – Enable – Disable

l

Filter notifica tion theme

Filter Out Protection Notification – Enable – Disable

l

Filter Out Performance Notification

Specifies whether to filter out the notifications for these themes. Default value: The notification for all these themes are filtered out.

– Enable – Disable l

Filter Out Maintenance Notification – Enable – Disable

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


189


Item

Parameter


Parameter

Remarks

After this parameter is set to Enable, only users that have related operation rights can invoke the XML NBI.

Authen tication Switch

l

Enable

l

Disable

l

Installation: By default, this parameter is set to Enable.

l

Version upgrade: It is recommended that the value of this parameter be retained the same before and after the upgrade. Perform automatic upgrades with the NMS upgrade tool if possible. If the manual upgrade modethis is used, change parameter manually to keep consistency.

Default value: Enable

Filterin g enginee ring alarm

l

Internal ID

l

Object name

Specifies whether XML NBIs report maintenance alarms and the alarm reporting works along with U2000 engineering tasks. By default, all alarms are reported. Default value: Disable

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


190


Item

Parameter


Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the rule for identifying objects.

Object identifi er

l

Enable

l

Disable

l

Internal ID: specifies that the IDs assigned by the U2000 uniquely identify objects.

l

Object name: specifies that the U2000 client names are used to identify objects. The U2000 client names must be unique in order to prevent data conflicts.

Default value: Internal ID Specifies whether to report the names of the paths or services affected by the alarms.

Alarm and service associa tion

l

Enable

l

Disable

l

Enable: specifies that if an alarm affects paths or fibers, the names of the affected paths and the fibers are contained in the alarm information during alarm query and report.

l

Disable: specifies that the names of the affected paths and fibers are not reported.


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


191


Item


Parameter

Parameter

l

Single-period

l

Multi-period

Set this parameter to the collection period for performance data. The U2000 can be used to export performance data generated during one or more periods.

Configure Performance Text NBI

Perfor mance data exporti

Specifies the delay mode for exporting files. The value of this parameter for different device types varies. If the value of this parameter is the same for different device types, the performance data fail fails to be exported. The Auto mode is recommended. For details, see U2000

Instance

ng settings

Performance Text NBI User Guide.

Duratio n Settings

l

Auto

l

Manu al

Remarks

Default value: Auto

Collecti on Period (min)

Data

l

5

l

10

l

15

l

30

l

60

l

1440

l

5

l

10

l

Export Period (min)

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l

15 30

l

60

l

1440

Specifies the period of collecting performance data using performance text NBIs. The performance data can be exported based on the collection period. Specifies the interval for generating performance text files. This parameter can be customized. It is recommended to set this parameter to a value the same as the collection period.


192


Item

Parameter


Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the difference between the time performance data is generated on NEs and the time the performance text file is exported. Data Export Duration (min)

You must configure Data Export Duration (min) according to on-site requirements when Duration Settings is set to Manual. For details, see U2000 Performance Text NBI User Guide. Specifies the time the startup file is exported for the first time. This parameter cannot be set to a value ranging from

Export Start Time

23:00:00 to 01:00:00. If the value of this parameter ranges from 23:00:00 to 01:00:00, a data error occurs during DTS switching. yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss For example, 2009-09-01 01:00:00

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


193


Item

Parameter


Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the performance indicators that the performance text file can export. Performance indicators can be configured in two modes: template— based or manual configuration l

Indicator

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Template-based configuration: Before commissioning, you must confirm the performance indicators to be monitored and configure a performance indicator template and use the following operations to configure the performance indicators. For details, see U2000 Performance Text NBI User Guide. Full Import: specifies that performance indicators are fully imported to the performance indicator template to overwrite the srcinal indicator template. Incremental Import: specifies that performance indicators are incrementally imported to the performance


194


Item


Parameter

Parameter

Remarks

indicator template and only new indicators are added to the srcinal indicator template. Export: The performance indicator template is exported, backed up, or provided to another U2000 server. l

File exporti ng settings

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

□Export ing to the local server

Exportin g directory

Manual configuration: Before commissioning, you must confirm the performance indicators to be monitored and print the performance data. Modify: In the dialog box that is displayed, configure the indicators as required.

Set this parameter to the directory where the performance data file is saved. The upper-layer OSS accesses this directory to obtain performance data.


195


Item


Parameter

Parameter l

FTP Mode : – F

T P – S

F T P

□Export ing to a remote FTP server

l

FTP/ SFTP Serve r IP:

l

FTP/ SFTP Port:

l

FTP/ SFTP User:

l

FTP/ SFTP Pass

l

l

Log file settings

Remarks

The U2000 uploads performance data to the FTP server. You must create an FTP user and configure the FTP user password on the U2000. Using SFTP is recommended because SFTP provides higher security than FTP.

word: FTP/ SFTP Direc tory: SFTP Certif icate:

Maximum number of backup product logs

Maximum size of product logs

Specifies the maximum number of output logs. Default value: 20 Specifies the maximum size of output logs. Default value: 20

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


196


Item


Parameter

Product log level

Parameter l

Debu g

l

Info

l

Warn

l

Error

Remarks

Specifies the lowest level of generating logs. The logs with the level lower than the value cannot be recorded. Default value: Info

Encoding format: l UTF-8 l

GBK

Set this parameter based on the planning for the upper-layer OSS. Default value: UTF-8 Specifies the time format encoding for the performance text NBI file.

Time format for file export

Default value: UTC time Specifies the maximum number of records in a file.

Maximum number of records in a file

If the value exceeds the threshold, the extra records are stored in another file whose serial number is increased by 1. Default value: 100000

Others

Number of days to save exported files

Specifies the period during which files can be stored on the local server. The system automatically deletes the files generated after the period elapses. Default value: 3 days

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


197


Item

Parameter

Start time for file deletion


Parameter

Remarks

Specifies the start time for deleting files in a scheduled task. The value of this parameter is the same as the server time. Format: yyyy-mm— dd hh:mm:ss

XML NBI Certificate

CORBA NBI Certificate

Identity Certific ate

Certificate Type

Trust Certific ate

File Name

CRL

File Name

Identity Certific ate

Certificate Type

File Name

Default certificate Type: P12. For details, see section Security Certificate Description.

Default certificate Type: P1. For details, see section SSL Principle and Configuration.

4.1.2 Checking Hardware Connections This topic describes how to check hardware installation and cable connections before installing a U2000. If hardware is improperly installed or cable is improperly connected, unexpected error may occur during installation of the U2000.

Prerequisites The server hardware must have been installed and equipment cables must have been connected, for details, see U2000 Hardware Installation Guide (Huawei N610E cabinet).

Procedure Step 1 Ensure that the power cables and ground wires for all components are tightly connected and in good contact and that the polarities are properly placed. NOTE

Generally, the server has two or more power modules which are used to provide power supply protection. Connect each power module to a specific power input. For details, see U2000 Hardware Installation Guide (Huawei N610E cabinet).

Step 2 Ensure that all cables are bundled and free of visible damage. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


198



Step 3 Check hardware connections and network cables according to the hardware connection diagram. NOTE

Connect the network interface that is configured with a system IP address during pre-installation to the network. If the network interface is not connected to the network, the U2000 fails to network configurations or be started. Configuring the system IP address for the network interface with the smallest interface serial number is preferred. For example, the serial number of 1 can be used for the IBM X3650M4, IBM X3850X5, IBM X3650 M3 and Huawei RH series rack server. l


l


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


199


l



l


l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

The following figures show hardware connections for the IBM X3850 X5 server.


200



Figure 4-5 Hardware connection for the IBM X3850 X5 server

Step 4 Check the plugs and sockets. 1.

Ensure that the latches of cable plugs are locked fast.

2.

Ensure that the pins in each socket are complete and in good order. Curved pins may cause short circuits.

----End

Follow-up Procedure Ensure that all debris (cable straps, stubs, or moisture-absorbent packets) are picked up. Remove unnecessary items from the telecommunications room. The workbench must be neat and the movable floor must be level and clean.

4.2 Performing Commissioning This topic describes how to commission the U2000 and system parameters. If the system has been preinstalled, perform U2000 commissioning only.

4.2.1 Powering On a Server This topic describes how to power on a server and the position of a power button on a server. 1.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)



201



NOTICE l


l


l


2.


3.

Wait 2 to 3 minutes. When the green indicator on the front panel of the server blinks every 1s, press the power button on the shelf of the server. NOTE

If the power button is steady on, the server has been successfully powered on. For details about IBM server indicators, see the manual for IBM servers or log in to the official IBM website. For details about Huawei server indicators, see the manual for Huawei servers or log in to the official Huawei website. For official websites of software and hardware documents, see A.5.19 How Do I . Obtain Third-Party Software and Hardware Materials?

The red boxes in the following figures show the positions of power buttons on Huawei RH2288H V2, Huawei RH5885H V3, IBM X3650 M4, IBM X3650 M3 and, IBM X3850 X5.



Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


202





Figure 4-10 Position of the power button on IBM X3850 X5

4.2.2 Configuring System Commissioning Parameters After the U2000 is installed initially, you must use the commissioning tool to adjust system parameters, such as the IP address and host name. You do not need to modify parameters that do not require adjustment.

Prerequisites

NOTICE Manually changing the system IP address causes a failure to use the commissioning tool. Therefore, configure the system IP address through the commissioning tool. l

The U2000 has been installed.

l

Commissioning parameters have been planned and a commissioning parameter table is obtained. For details, see 4.1.1 Obtaining Commissioning Parameters.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


203



l

The server has been powered on. For details, see 3.2 Powering On a Server .

l

Ensure that the Windows 2008 OS has been activated. For details about how to activate the Windows OS, see 3.6.2 Activate the 2008 Windows OS .

Context The commissioning tool is used only after the initial installation of the U2000 is complete. Do not use the commissioning tool after the U2000 has running for a period of time. If system parameters need to be commissioned, see section MSuite in the U2000 Administrator Guide.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights. Step 2 Ensure that the U2000 is not running. 1.


2.


3.

In the CLI, run the daem_ps command to check whether the U2000 process is stopped. –

If no command output is displayed, the U2000 process has stopped.

–

If information similar to the following is displayed, the U2000 process is not stopped. In the CLI, run the D:\oss\server\platform\bin\stopnms.bat command to stop the U2000 process. imapmrb.exe 19,252 K imapeventmgr.exe 19,812 K imapsysd.exe 39,720 K imapwatchdog.exe 14,216 K ResourceMonitor.exe 25,024 K imap_sysmonitor.exe 36,628 K python.exe 21,216 K httpd.exe 11,140 K java.exe 92,424 K httpd.exe 16,476 K

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

30616 RDP-Tcp#1

3

4392 RDP-Tcp#1

3

27224 RDP-Tcp#1

3

36812 RDP-Tcp#1

3

29472 RDP-Tcp#1

3

8368 RDP-Tcp#1

3

33732 RDP-Tcp#1

3

14920 RDP-Tcp#1

3

21572 RDP-Tcp#1

3

15980 RDP-Tcp#1

3


204



NOTE n

If information similar to the following is displayed, the U2000 process is not stopped. Switch to the administrator and run the D:\oss\server\platform\bin\stopnms.bat command to stop the U2000 process. imapmrb.exe 0 30,392 K imapeventmgr.exe 0 21,404 K imapsysd.exe 0 42,116 K imapwatchdog.exe 0 11,676 K ResourceMonitor.exe 0 28,184 K imap_sysmonitor.exe 0 39,632 K

11116 Services 11164 Services 10236 Services 8584 Services 26056 Services 13168 Services

n


n

Stopping the U2000 process takes about 3 minutes.

Step 3 Perform the following operations to ensure that the SQL Server database has been started. Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools> SQL Server Configuration Manager, choose SQL Server Services from the navigation tree, right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) in the right pane, check whether the shortcut menu option Start is grayed out. l

If Start is grayed out, the SQL Server database is started.

l

If Start is not grayed out, the SQL Server database is stopped. Right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) and choose Start from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 Ensure that the MSuite server has been started. In the Windows Task Managerdialog box, check whether msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe are listed. l


l

If the two processes are not listed, the MSuite server has not started. Navigate to the D: \oss\engr\engineering directory and double-click startserver.bat to start the MSuite server.

Step 5 Perform the following operations to log in to the MSuite client: 1.

On a computer where the MSuite client is installed, double-click the U2000 NMS Maintenance Suite shortcut icon on the desktop and then wait about one minute. The Login dialog box is displayed.

2.

Set the login parameters.

3.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–

IP Address: Use the default value 127.0.0.1.

–

Port: Use the default value 12212.

–

User Name: Use the default value admin.

–

Password: The initial password of the admin user is Changeme_123. The password must be changed during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it regularly.

Click Login.


205



NOTE

–

When you log in to the MSuite client, a progress bar is displayed showing the progress of Refresh Deployment Information . Wait until the operation is complete.

–

The MSuite works in single-user mode. Specifically, only one MSuite client can log in to the MSuite at one time.

Step 6 Perform the following operations to implement system commissioning: 1.

Choose Tools > Commissioning Toolfrom the MSuite client main menu to access the Information dialog box.

2.

Read the information carefully and click Start to access the system commissioning window.

Step 7 Configure the commissioning items based on the planned commissioning parameter table. For details about the commissioning parameters, see 4.1.1 Obtaining Commissioning Parameters.

NOTICE l

If a message asking you to refer to the associated section in the installation guide is displayed during system commissioning, the system needs to be manually commissioned.

l

After the host name is configured, you cannot come back to modify other configurations. Otherwise, the commissioning may be abnormal. Configure the host name after other commission items are configured.

Aftereffect. system commissioning parameters are set, restart the system to make the modifications Step 8 take ----End

4.2.3 Commissioning U2000 Parameters This topic describes how to commission the U2000 parameters on a U2000 Client after the U2000 is installed.

Prerequisites l

If the delivered server has been preinstalled, ensure that system commissioning is performed. For details, see 4.2.2 Configuring System Commissioning Parameters.

l

If the delivered server has not been preinstalled, ensure that the U2000 is installed. For details, see 3 Installing the U2000.

l

Ensure that the U2000 license has been loaded. For details, see 3.8 Loading a U2000 License. NOTE

Using the resolution 1024 x 768 or higher is recommended. If the resolution is not used, the U2000 client GUI may be incomplete.

Context The U2000 commissioning parameters cover communication security, U2000 user security policy, communication between the U2000 and NEs, alarm function, and common U2000 configurations. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


206



Procedure Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with ossuser rights. Step 2 Perform the following operations to ensure that the U2000 server processes have been started. 1.


2.


3.

In the CLI, run the daem_ps command to check whether the U2000 process is started. –

If information similar to the following is displayed, the U2000 process3has started. imapmrb.exe 30616 RDP-Tcp#1 19,252 K imapeventmgr.exe 19,812 K imapsysd.exe 39,720 K imapwatchdog.exe 14,216 K ResourceMonitor.exe 25,024 K imap_sysmonitor.exe 36,628 K python.exe 21,216 K httpd.exe 11,140 K java.exe 92,424 K httpd.exe 16,476 K

4392 RDP-Tcp#1

3

27224 RDP-Tcp#1

3

36812 RDP-Tcp#1

3

29472 RDP-Tcp#1

3

8368 RDP-Tcp#1

3

33732 RDP-Tcp#1

3

14920 RDP-Tcp#1

3

21572 RDP-Tcp#1

3

15980 RDP-Tcp#1

3

NOTE

If information similar to the following is displayed, the U2000 process also has started. imapmrb.exe 30,392 K imapeventmgr.exe 21,404 K imapsysd.exe 42,116 K imapwatchdog.exe 11,676 K ResourceMonitor.exe 28,184 K imap_sysmonitor.exe 39,632 K

–

11116 Services

0

11164 Services

0

10236 Services

0

8584 Services

0

26056 Services

0

13168 Services

0

If no command output is displayed, the U2000 process is not started. You can run the D:\oss\server\platform\bin\startnms.bat command in the CLI to start the U2000 process. NOTE n n

D:\ossspecifies the installation path of the U2000. Starting the U2000 process takes about 3 minutes.

Step 3 Perform the following operations to log in to the U2000 Client. 1.

Double-click U2000 Client on the desktop to access the Login dialog box.

2.

Choose the server on which the U2000 resides from the Server drop-down list.

3.

Set User Name and Password and click Login.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


207



NOTE

–

The user name is admin, the same as the administrator name.

–


–

If a failure message is displayed during the login to the client, see A.6.2 Failure to Log In to the U2000 Server from a U2000 Client to address the problem.

Step 4 Perform the following operations to change the display style to the traditional style for the client: 1.

Choose File > Preferences from the U2000 Client main menu.

2.

Choose Client Display Style from the navigation tree on the Preferences page.

3.

Select Traditional style and click OK.

4.

Re-log in to the U2000 client.

Step 5 Choose Administration > NMS Commissioning Wizard from the U2000 Client main menu.

Step 6 Commission U2000 parameters as prompted. ----End

Result After U2000 parameters are commissioned, the U2000 and NEs can communicate with each other properly, and the U2000 works properly.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


208


A FAQs

A

FAQs

This topic provides answers to the most frequent questions concerning the installation. A.1 Windows OS This topic provides answers to FAQs about clients installed on Windows OS. A.2 System Settings of the Huawei RH series rack server This topic covers FAQs about Huawei RH series rack server system settings. A.3 System Settings of the IBM Server This topic covers FAQs about IBM Server system settings. A.4 SQL Server Database This topic describes the FAQs about the SQL server database. A.5 U2000 System This topic covers FAQs about the U2000 system. A.6 Install the U2000 Software Exception Processing This topic describes how to uninstall the U2000 software. Before reinstalling the U2000 software, you must uninstall U2000.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


209


A FAQs

A.1 Windows OS This topic provides answers to FAQs about clients installed on Windows OS.

A.1.1 How to Add a Static Route Question If the network connection is unstable, intermittently disconnected, or unreachable, the static route may be not added. How do I add a static route?

NOTICE If there are multiple network interfaces and their IP addresses are within different network segments, the static route can be configured on only one of these network interfaces. To prevent the failure of one network interface from causing the disconnection of the entire network, the static route needs to be added on other network interfaces.

Answer Step 1 Run the following command on the command prompt window to view the existing routes: C:\> route print

Step 2 Run the following command to add a route: C:\> route -p add network_IP_address mask netmask gateway_IP_address NOTE l

l

Set the following parameters: –

network_IP_address: An IP address on the network segment of the computer connected to the U2000 server.

–

netmask: subnet mask of the network segment on which the computer connected to the U2000 server is located.

–

gateway_IP_address: network management IP address for the network on which the U2000 server is located.

To delete a route, run the following command:

C:\> route deletenetwork_IP_addressmask netmask gateway_IP_address

----End

A.1.2 How to Convert the File System Type to NTFS Question How do I convert the file system type to NTFS? Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


210


A FAQs

Answer Step 1 Choose start > Run. The Run window will be displayed. Step 2 Enter cmd and click OK. Step 3 Enter convert Drive letter where the installation package is decompressed: /FS:NTFS. For example, enter convert F: /FS:NTFS if you need to decompress the installation package into disk F. Enter the corresponding information at the prompt.

Step 4 Restart the OS. ----End

A.1.3 How to Change the Password of the OS Administrator Question How to change the password of the OS administrator?

Answer Step 1 Log in to the OS as the administrator user. Step 2 Ensure that the SQL server database is started. NOTE l

If the database is not started, manually start it. Otherwise, login to the database fails after the password is changed.

l

If the password of the administratoris changed when the SQL server database is not started, login to the database fails. In this case, you need to change the password to the srcinal one, start the SQL server database, and then change the password of the administrator . To ensure the security of the U2000, passwords must be complex enough. For example, a password must contain eight or more characters of two types. The allowed characters are digits, letters, and special characters. Remember to change passwords regularly.

Step 3 Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to lock the current interface. Step 4 In the dialog box that is displayed, click Change Password. Step 5 In the dialog box that is displayed, enter the old password and the new password, and confirm the new password.

Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > SQL Server Management Studio. The Connect to Server window is displayed. Enter the server name, and then click Connect.

Step 8 Right-click the database server node for the local server from the navigation tree and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, click the Security tab, and then change the administrator password in the Enable server proxy account area. ----End

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


211


A FAQs

A.1.4 How to Configure the Remote Login to the Windows OS Question How to configure the remote login to the Windows OS?

Answer Step 1 Log in to the OS as the administrator. Step 2 Right-click Computer and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Step 3 In the System dialog box, click the Remote settings tab. Step 4 In the System Properties dialog box, set the remote login right through the option button as required.

Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 To connect a local PC to the Windows server remotely, apply for a digital certificate that uses SHA256 encryption. The applied certificate has to be stored on the local computer. The following describes how to load and query a digital certificate: 1.

2.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

All applied digital certificates must be stored in the certificate management container for further loading. a.

Choose Start > Run. In the Run window, enter mmc.exe.

b.

In the Console1 window, choose File > Add or Remove Snap-ins.

c.

In the Add or Remove Snap-ins dialog box, double-click Certificates in Available snap-ins.

d.

In the Certificates snap-in dialog box, select computer account and click Next.

e.

In the Select Computer dialog box, select Local computer:(the computer this console is running on) and click Finish.

f.

In the Add or Remove Snap-ins,click OK.

g.

In the Console1 window, chooseConsole Root > Certificates(Local computer) > Personal, right-click and choose All Tasks > Import in the Object Type.

h.

In the Certificate Import Wizard, clickNext.

i.

In the File to Import dialog box, click Browse, select All Files ,select a digital certificate, click Open, click Next.

j.

In the Password dialog box, Input the private key password when applied digital certificates Obtained, click Next.

k.

In the Certificate Store dialog box, click Next.

l.

ClickFinish, the The import was successful dialog box is displayed, click OK.

m.

In the Console1 window, chooseConsole Root > Certificates(Local computer) > Personal > Certificates to check whether the certificate has been stored in the certificate management container.

Load a digital certificate. a.

Choose StartAll ProgramsAdministrative ToolsRemote Desktop ServicesRemote Desktop Session Host Configuration.

b.

In the Remote Desktop Session Host Configuration window, select RDP-Tcp in the Connections list, right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212


A FAQs

c.

In the RDP-Tcp Propertiesdialog box, click the General tab and then Select to load a certificate.

d.

In the Windows Security dialog box, click OK.

e.

In the RDP-Tcp Propertiesdialog box, click OK.

----End

A.1.5 How to Set the Virtual Memory to the System Managed Size Question How to set the virtual memory to the system managed size?

Answer Step 1 Click Start. Right-click Computer on the desktop and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 In the System dialog box, click the Advanced system settings tab. Step 3 In the System Properties dialog box, click the Advanced tab. Step 4 In the Performance area, click Settings. Step 5 In the Performance Options dialog box, click the Advanced tab. Step 6 In the Virtual memory area, click Change. Step 7 In the Virtual Memory dialog box, deselect Automatically manage paging file size for all drives and click the System managed size option button.

Step 8 Click Set. Step 9 Click OK. ----End

A.1.6 How to Check Whether an NIC Is Assigned Multiple IP Addresses (Windows) Question How to check whether an NIC is assigned multiple IP addresses?

Answer Step 1 Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter cmd to open the command line interface (CLI) window.

Step 2 Run the ipconfig /all command and check whether multiple pieces of IP Address information are displayed. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

If only one piece of IP Address is displayed, the NIC is assigned only one IP address. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213


A FAQs

If multiple pieces of IP Address information are displayed, the NIC is assigned multiple IP addresses.

----End

A.1.7 How to Delete Unnecessary IP Addresses of an NIC (Windows) Question

How to delete unnecessary IP addresses of an NIC?

Answer Step 1 For details about how to check whether unnecessary IP addresses have been set, see A.1.6 How to Check Whether an NIC Is Assigned Multiple IP Addresses (Windows) .

Step 2 If the NIC is assigned multiple IP addresses, perform the following steps to delete unnecessary IP address: Windows 2008: 1.

Click Start, Right-click Network and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

2.

Click Change adapter settings.

3.

Right-click Local Area Connection and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

4. 5.

Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties. On the General tab page, click Advanced.

6.

In IP addresses, select the IP addresses to be deleted and click Remove.

7.

Click OK.

----End

A.1.8 How to Query the Type of a Windows OS Question Two types of Windows OSs is available for Windows 2008: 64-bit OS. How to query the type of a Windows OS?

Answer Step 1 Perform the following steps for Windows 2008: 1.

Log in to the OS as the ossuser.

2.

Right-click Computer and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

3.

In the System dialog box, view the value of System type, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


214


A FAQs

----End

A.1.9 How to Log In to the CLI on Windows Question Some system commands, such as ipconfig, can be run in the CLI on Windows. How do I log in to the CLI on Windows?

Answer Step 1 Choose Start > Run on Windows. The Run window will be displayed.

Step 2 Enter cmd and click OK. NOTE

To query the IP address and gateway information about the PC, enteripconfigand press Enter.

----End

A.1.10 How to Shut Down Automatic Update of the Windows OS Question How do I shut down automatic update of the Windows OS?

Answer Step 1 Log in to the OS as the administrator. Step 2 Choose Start > All Programs > Administrative Tools > Services. Step 3 Right-click Windows Update service and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Step 4 On the General tab, change the value of Startup type to Disabled. Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Choose File > Exit. ----End Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


215


A FAQs

A.1.11 How to Identify the Network Connection Name Associated with the NMS Application IP Address on Windows Question How do I identify the network connection name associated with the NMS application IP address on Windows?

Answer Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with ossuser rights. Step 2 Choose Start > Run. The Run window will be displayed. Step 3 Enter cmd and click OK. Step 4 Run the ipconfig -all command in the CLI. Information similar to the following is displayed: Windows IP Configuration Host Name . . . . . . . . . . . . : WIN08TG5699PK5UK Primary Dns Suffix . . . . . . . : Node Type . . . . . . . . . . . . : Hybrid IP Routing Enabled. . . . . . . . : No WINS Proxy Enabled. . . . . . . . : No Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection :3 Connection-specific DNS Suffix . : Description . . . . . . . . . . . : Intel(R) PRO/1000 PB Dual Port Server Connection Physical Address. . . . . . . . . : 00-25-9E-81-29-5B Dhcp Enabled. . . . . . . . . . . : Yes Autoconfiguration Enabled . . . . : Yes IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.187.220.199 Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 10.187.220.1 DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.187.220.1 DNS Servers . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.187.17.24 10.172.255.100 10.198.248.39 Lease Obtained. . . . . . . . . . : 2012.6.8 15:49:04 Lease Expires . . . . . . . . . . : 2012.6.8 19:49:04

The network connection name associated with 10.187.220.199 is Local Area Connection 3. ----End

A.1.12 How Do I Manually Enable and Disable the FTP Service on a Server? Question How do I manually enable and disable the FTP service on a server?

Answer l

Enable the FTP service. a.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Log in to the operating system with the ossuser rights. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216


A FAQs

b.

Access the D:\oss\server\3rdTools\ftp path and rename the Start_Apache_ftp.bat script under the ftp folder. For example, change the script name to Start_Apache_ftp_win.bat.

c.

Execute the Start_Apache_ftp_win.bat script. NOTE l

The D:\oss\server\3rdTools\ftp path needs to be accessed if the U2000 is installed in D: \oss. If the U2000 is not installed in D:\oss, change drive letter D in the command line based on the actual situations.

l

Enabling the uflight_dispatcher script causes the FTP service to be automatically enabled. To prevent the the FTP service to be automatically enabled, you must rename the Start_Apache_ftp.bat script.

l

l

If the FTP service is enabled for the first time, you must rename the Start_Apache_ftp.bat script, as described in Step 2. Renaming the Start_Apache_ftp.bat script is not required later.

Disable the FTP service. a.

Log in to the operating system with the ossuser rights.

b.

Access the D:\oss\server\3rdTools\ftp path and rename the Uninstall_ftp_win.bat script under the ftp folder. For example, change the script name to Uninstall_Apache_ftp_win.bat.

c.

Execute the Uninstall_Apache_ftp_win.bat script. NOTE l


l

Enabling the uflight_dispatcher script causes the FTP service to be automatically enabled. To prevent the the FTP service to be automatically enabled, you must rename the Uninstall_ftp_win.bat script.

l

If the FTP service is disabled for the first time, you must rename the Uninstall_ftp_win.bat script, as described in Step 2. Renaming the script is not required later. Uninstall_ftp_win.bat

----End

A.1.13 How to Configure the minasshd Encryption Algorithm Question How do I configure the minasshd encryption algorithm?

Answer Step 1 Log in to the Windows OS as the ossuser. Step 2 Run the following command in the command line window to enter the directory of the script: C:\Users>cd /d D:\oss\server\3rdTools\ftp\minasshd\modifyAlgorithm\

Step 3 Configure the minasshd encryption algorithm. 1.

Run the following command to modify the script: D:\oss\server\3rdTools\ftp\minasshd\modifyAlgorithm>python

modifyminasshd.py

Information similar to the following is displayed: Start modify the mimasshd algorithms ...... System is win32

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


217


A FAQs

All mac_algorithms: HMACSHA256;HMACSHA512;HMACSHA1;HMACMD5;HMACSHA196;HMACMD596 All cipher_algorithms:

AES128CTR;TripleDESCBC;AES128CBC

Current configured mac_algorithms: Mac = HMACSHA256;HMACSHA512;HMACSHA1;HMACMD5 ;HMACSHA196;HMACMD596 Current configured mac_algorithms: Cipher = AES128CTR;AES128CBC;TripleDESCBC Input Y or y to modify mac_algorithms, otherwise,exit the modification of mac_al gorithms. : NOTE

If the system prompts that the python command is not available, use the python of the U2000. To access the python of the U2000, run D:\oss\server\3rdTools\ftp\minasshd\modifyAlgorithm and in the command line D:\oss\server\3rdTools\python\bin\python.exe modifyminasshd.py window.

2.

The system prompts you whether to modify macs algorithms. Type y or Y and press Enter. If you do not want to modify it, press Enter to skip. After you type y and press Enter, the following information is displayed: Please input mac_algorithms for minasshd separated by a ';'. For example: HMACSHA256;HMACSHA512;HMACSHA1 :

After you type y and press Enter, the following information is displayed: please input your modify MACs Algorithm with ';' separate :

Enter the target mac_algorithms, It is recommended that HMACSHA256;HMACSHA512;HMACSHA1 be entered and press Enter. NOTE

Before selecting a secure algorithm, ensure that the system interconnected to the U2000 supports this algorithm; otherwise, this system cannot connect to the U2000 server over minasshd.

3.

The system prompts you whether to modify cipher_algorithms. Type y or Y and press Enter. If you do not want to modify it, press Enter to skip. Input Y or y to modify cipher_algorithms,otherwise,exit the modification of cipher_algorithms. :

After you type y and press Enter, the following information is displayed: Please input cipher_algorithms for minasshd separated by a ';'. For example: AES128CTR;AES256CTR :

Enter the target cipher_algorithms, It is recommended that AES128CTR;AES128CBC;TripleDESCBC be entered and press Enter. NOTE

Before selecting a secure algorithm, ensure that the system interconnected to the U2000 supports this algorithm; otherwise, this system cannot connect to the U2000 server over minasshd.

4.

Check the configuration result. The configuration is successful is the following information is displayed: End modify the mimasshd algorithms, please restart minasshd in U2000 System Monitor

Step 4 Open the System Monitor and restart the minasshd process for the new algorithms to take effect. ----End

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


218


A FAQs

A.1.14 How to Change the Password for the Windows OS User ossuser? Question How to change the password for the Windows OS user ossuser?

Answer Step 1 Perform the following operations: l

l

Log in to the Windows OS as ossuser to change the password: a.

Log in the operating system as the ossuser user.

b.

Choose Start > Control Panel > User Accounts > Change your Windows password > Change your password.

c.

In the Change Your Passwordwindow, enter the old and new passwords of ossuser and the new password again for verification, and click Change Password.

Log in to the Windows OS as administrator to change the password: a.

Log in to the OS as administrator.

b.

Choose Start > Control Panel > User Accounts > Add or remove user accounts > ossuser > Change the password.

c.

In the Change Password window, enter the new password ofossuser and the new password again for verification, and click Change password.

Step 2 Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter services.msc and click OK. Step 3 In the Services window, right-clickiMapService and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 Click the Log On tab, enter Password and Confirm password values, and click OK. ----End

A.1.15 How to Change the Password for the Windows OS User dbuser? Question How to change the password for the windows OS user dbuser?

Answer Step 1 Perform the following operations: l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Log in to the Windows OS as dbuser to change the password: a.

Log in the OS as dbuser.

b.


c.

In the Change Your Passwordwindow, enter the old and new passwords of dbuser and the new password again for verification, and click Change Password. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219


A FAQs



b.

Ensure that the SQL server database is started. NOTE n

If the database is not started, manually start it; otherwise, the database cannot be logged in to after the password is changed.

n

If the dbuserpassword is changed in case the database is not started, logging in to the SQL server database will fail. In this case, restore the srcinal password, start the SQL server database, and then change the dbuserpassword. To ensure system security, a new password must meet complexity requirements. For example, a new password must consist of at least eight characters that fall into two of the three types: digits, letters, and special characters. In addition, a password must be periodically updated.

c.

Choose Start > Control Panel > User Accounts > Add or remove user accounts > dbuser > Change the password.

d.

In the Change Password window, enter the new password ofdbuser and the new password again for verification, and click Change password.

Step 2 Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter services.msc and click OK. Step 3 In the Services window, right-clickSQL Server (MSSQlSE RVER) and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 Click the Log On tab, enter Password and Confirm password values, and click OK. ----End

A.1.16 How to Change the Password for the Windows OS User ftpuser? Question How to change the password for the Windows OS user ftpuser?

Answer l

l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Log in to the Windows OS as ftpuser to change the password: a.

Log in the OS as the ftpuser user.

b.


c.

In the Change Your Passwordwindow, enter the old and new passwords of ftpuser and the new password again for verification, and click Change Password.



b.

Choose Start > Control Panel > User Accounts > Add or remove user accounts > ftpuser > Change the password.

c.

In the Change Password window, enter the new password offtpuser and the new password again for verification, and click Change password. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220


A FAQs

A.2 System Settings of the Huawei RH series rack server This topic covers FAQs about Huawei RH series rack server system settings.

A.2.1 How Do I Use iMana IP to Log In to a Remote Huawei RH series rack server Question How do I use iMana IP to log in to a remote Huawei RH series rack server?

Answer Step 1 Open the Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the iMana module in the address bar. The iMana login window is displayed. NOTE l

Choose Tools> Internet optionbefore logging in to the Huawei RH series rack server. Click the Connectiontab to clear settings of the proxy server of the Internet Explorer.

l

The default IP of iMana is 192.168.2.100 . The subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. See A.2.2 How to if the default IP of View the IP Address of the iMana on the Huawei RH series rack server iMana changes.

Step 2 Enter the user name and the password of iMana and click Log In. NOTE l

Default user name: root

l

Default password: Huawei12#$(Enter the new password if the password has been changed. If the password has not been changed, it is recommended to change the password quickly and keep the new password safe for the safety of a system. For details, see A.2.3 How to Change the Password of iMana User Root .)

Step 3 Choose Remote Control from the navigation tree to open the remote control window. The remote control window displays the KVM property and the virtual media property. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


221


A FAQs

Step 4 Click Remote Virtual Console (shared mode) or Remote Virtual Console (private mode) as required to enter the virtual console window. l

Remote Virtual Console (shared mode): Two users can log in to the remote virtual console concurrently. The server responds to commands of each user.

l

Remote Virtual Console (private mode): Only one user can log in to the remote virtual console. NOTE l l

If the Safe warningdialog box is displayed, click Permission. If a message is displayed indicating that the application is prohibited to run, chooseStart > Control Paneland click Java. In the Java Control Panel dialog box, click the Securitytab, Edit Site List, and Add, enter an iMana IP address, such as http://192.168.2.100 , and click OK. Click OK, restart the IE Explorer, and log in to iMana again.

----End

A.2.2 How to View the IP Address of the iMana on the Huawei RH series rack server Question How do I view the IP address of the iMana on the Huawei RH series rack server?

Answer Step 1 Install the KVM on the server. Step 2 Press the power button on the server and restart the server. Step 3 During server restart, press Delete until the BIOS configuration window is displayed. NOTE

If a dialog box is displayed asking you to enter a password, enter the desired password and then press Enter.

Step 4 View the IP Address of the iMana. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


222


l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

A FAQs


Choose Server Mgmt tab.

b.

Choose BMC network configuration, and press Enter to access the BMC network configuration window to view the IP address.


Choose Advanced > IPMI BMC Configuration, and press Enter. The IPMI BMC Configuration page is displayed.

b.

Select BMC Configuration, and press Enter to access the BMC Configuration window to view the IP address.


223


A FAQs

----End

A.2.3 How to Change the Password of iMana User Root Question How to modify the password of iMana user root?

Answer Step 1 Open Internet Explorer. Enter the IP address of the iMana module in the address bar. The window for logging in to iMana is displayed. NOTE

The default IP address of iMana is 192.168.2.100. The subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. See A.2.2 How to View the IP Address of the iMana on the Huawei RH series rack server if the default IP of iMana changes.

Step 2 Enter the user name and the password of iMana and click Log In. NOTE l

Default user name: root

l

Default password: Huawei12#$(Enter the new password if the password has been changed. If the password has not been changed, it is recommended to change the password quickly and keep the new password safe for the safety of a system.)

Step 3 Choose Configuration > User from the left navigation tree, and click the

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


of user root.

224


A FAQs

Step 4 In the Modify User Information dialog box, enter new user information, and click OK. NOTE

Requirements on the user password are different when the function of checking the password complexity is enabled or disabled: l

If the function is disabled, you can leave the password blank or enter a string whose length is shorter than 20 characters.

l

If this function is enabled, the password must meet the following requirements: –

The password contains a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 20 characters.

–

At least one space or one special character: `~!@#$%^&*()-_=+\|[{}];:'",<.>/?

–

At least two of the following combinations: lowercase letters a to z, uppercase letters A to Z, and digits 0 to 9.

–

The password cannot be the same as the user name or the reverse of the user name.

----End

A.2.4 How to Solve iMana Problems Question How do I solve iMana problems?

Answer The following problems may exist on the iMana and you must take measures to these problems:

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


225


No.

Problem

1

l

The Internet Explorer does not respond.

l

After a user clicks the Internet Explorer or Remote Virtual Console icon on the taskbar, the Internet Explorer or Remote Virtual Console window is not displayed.

l

l

The Internet Explorer closes automatically. After a user closes the Internet Explorer and Remote Virtual Console windows, the user cannot open the Remote Virtual Console window.

A FAQs

Solution The procedure is as follows: 1. Right-click the Internet Explorer icon on the taskbar to close the Internet Explorer. If the Internet Explorer is still open, stop the iexplore.exe process on the Processes tab page in the Task Manager. 2. Open the Internet Explorer. 3. Access the iMana page and open the Remote Virtual Console window. The srcinal session is still there.

2

Afterthe Remote Virtual Console window is minimized on the taskbar, the window cannot be restored.

On the taskbar, right-click Remote Virtual Console and choose Close window from the shortcut menu to shut down the Remote Virtual Console window. Re-open theRemote Virtual Console window on the iMana page.

3

The Caps indicator on the keyboard is on, but the entered letter is a lower-case letter.

Press Caps Lock. The indicator on the right of caps above Remote Virtual Console turns green. NOTE

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l

On the Remote Virtual Console window, theCaps indicator in the On state does not mean that the letter entered is an upper-case letter.

l

For the Huawei RH series rack server, if the indicator on the right of caps above Remote Virtual Console is green, entered letters are uppercase. If the indicator on the right of the caps is black, entered letters are lowercase.


226


A FAQs

No.

Problem

Solution

4

The Num indicator on the key board is on, but entering a number fails.

Press Num Lock. The indicator on the right of the num above Remote Virtual Console turns green. NOTE

5

Two pointers are displayed in the Remote Virtual Console window.

l

l

On the Remote Virtual Console window, theNum indicator in the On state does not mean that the number key works.

l

For the Huawei RH series rack server, if the indicator on the right of the num above Remote Virtual Console is green, entered letters are digit. If the indicator on the right of the num is black, the digit cannot be entered.

Method one: You can click on the toolbar above Remote Virtual Console and select the Single Mouse check box to make only one pointer displayed in the window. To exit from the Remote Virtual Console, click Ctrl+Alt+Shift. To exit from the single-pointer mode, click and clear theSingle Mouse check box.

l

Method two: Because the mouse of Controller is delay, you can adjust the mouse speed of your computer to make two mouses move closer together. 1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. The Adjust you computer's settings windows is displayed. 2. Set the value of View by to Small icons or Large icons. 3. Click Mouse. The Mouse Properties windows is displayed. 4. Adjust the Speed in the Buttons tab.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


227


A FAQs

No.

Problem

Solution

6

No operation is performed on the server for more than 5 minutes after a login to the iMana management window. The system then automatically displays an error message indicating session timeout and exits from the login.

Enter the iMana address in the address bar of the Internet Explorer. Then enter the user name and password in the iMana login winidow.

7

After the iMana login window is accessed and login is not yet performed, the system automatically enters the window indicating a connection failure.

Enter the iMana address in the address bar of the Internet Explorer to re-open it.

8

After Remote Virtual Console is maximized, the mouse is displayed disorderly and the it is difficult to perform any operation.

Press Ctrl+Alt+Shift, and then click

The cause of the fault is that the default period for the iMana session is 5 minutes. If no operation is performed on the server after the period elapses, the session is disconnected. You can access the iMana management window according to on-site requirements and choose Configuration > Service > Web Server to set Timeout Period.

on the toolbar above Remote Virtual Console to exit from the maximization window.

A.2.5 Formatting disks (Huawei RH series rack server) This topic describes how to formatting disks.

Prerequisites l

If the disks are to be formatted in local mode, you must ensure that the server is connected to the KVM.

l

If the disks are to be formatted in remote mode, you must ensure that the following preparations are ready: –


–


–

The IP address of the iMana is available. For details about how to set the IP address of the iMana, see 3.3.1 Configuring the iMana IP Address Through iMana Management Interface.

Procedure Step 1 Start the server. l

In local mode, press the power button to restart the PC server.

l

In remote mode, perform the following operations:

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


228


A FAQs

a.

Log in to the server. For details, see A.2.1 How Do I Use iMana IP to Log In to a Remote Huawei RH series rack server.

b.

Click on the toolbar which is right above Remote Virtual Console and select Cold Reset.

c.


Step 2 On Huawei RH5885H V3 server, ignore the following operations; On Huawei RH2288H V2 server, perform the following operations: 1.

When the BIOS start page appears, press Delete until the BIOS Setup Utility program is started. NOTE

If the BIOS password has been modified, a dialog box asking you to enter a password will be displayed during startup. Enter the required password to access the Setup Utilityapplication.

2.

Choose Exit > Load Optimal Defaults, and press Enter.

3.

In the Load Optimal Defaults? dialog box, click Yes and press Enter.

4.

Choose Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and press Enter.

5.

In the Exit Saving Changes? dialog box, click Yes and press Enter.

Step 3 After the basic input/output system (BIOS) check is completed, the BIOS information about the RAID is displayed, as shown in the following figure. NOTE


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


229


A FAQs

Step 4 Press Ctrl+H as prompted to access the Adapter Selection window. l

On Huawei H2288H V2 server, the following window is displayed.

l


Step 5 Click Start to access the WebBIOS window. NOTE

If window MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Foreign Configuration is displayed, click Clear.

Step 6 Click Configuration Wizard to access the RAID configuration wizard window, as shown in the following figure.

Step 7 Select Clear Configuration and click Next.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


230


A FAQs

NOTICE After you select Clear Configuration, all RAID configurations will be deleted; as a result, hard disk data will be damaged or lost. Check whether hard disk data can be deleted before selecting Clear Configuration.

Step 8 Click Yes to clear the configuration, and return to t he WebBIOS window. Step 9 Initialize RAID configurations. 1.

Click Configuration Wizard to access the RAID configuration wizard window

2.

Select New Configuration and click Next.

3.

Click Yes to delete RAID configurations.

4.

Select Automatic Configuration and click Next. The Preview dialog box is displayed. NOTE

Use the default value, Redundancy when possible , for Redundancy .

5.

Click Accept.

6.

Click Yes to save RAID configurations.

7.

Click Yes to initialize RAID configurations.

8.

Click Home to return to the WebBIOS window. After the initialization is complete, the WebBIOS window is displayed. As shown in the following figure, the eight hard disks are used as an example.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–


–



231


A FAQs


Step 12 Restart the server. l

In local mode, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to restart the server.

l

In remote mode, perform the following operations: a.


b.


----End

A.2.6 Viewing Hard Disk Information (Huawei RH series rack server) This topic describes how to view hard disk information.

Prerequisites

l

If the hard disk information is to be viewed in local mode, you must ensure that the server is connected to the KVM.

l

If the hard disk information is to be viewed in remote mode, you must ensure that the following preparations are ready:

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–


–

The version of the Internet Explorer browser must be 7.0, 8.0, or 9.0 and the Internet Explorer cannot be configured with a proxy server. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232


A FAQs

The IP address of the iMana is available. For details about how to set the IP address of the iMana, see 3.3.1 Configuring the iMana IP Address Through iMana Management Interface.

Procedure Step 1 Start the server. l

In local mode, press the power button to restart the PC server.

l


Log in to the server. For details, see A.2.1 How Do I Use iMana IP to Log In to a Remote Huawei RH series rack server.

b.


c.


Step 2 After the basic input/output system (BIOS) check is completed, the BIOS information about the RAID is displayed, as shown in the following figure. NOTE


Step 3 Press Ctrl+H as prompted to access the Adapter Selection window. l


l



If window MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Foreign Configuration is displayed, click Clear.

Step 5 Click Physical View to access the Physical View window, as shown in the following figure. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


233


A FAQs

NOTE l

In the navigation tree, the Physical Viewnode automatically changes to Logical View .

l

In the following example, RAID has not been configured for hard disks. The displayed information displayed in the scenario where RAID has been configured is different from that in the scenario where RAID has not been configured. Pay attention to only slot information inPhysical View and check whether the slot information meets the following conditions: –

IDs of eight slots from Slot: 0to Slot: 7are displayed.

–

The description for every slot ID has three available options: Unconfigured Good , Online, and Global Hot Spare .

If any two of precedinghard threedisk conditions the eight hard disks on the server are available. Otherwise, anthe unavailable ex ists onare themet, server. l


l


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


234


A FAQs


Step 8 Restart the server. l

In local mode, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to restart the server.

l



b.


----End

A.3 System Settings of the IBM Server This topic covers FAQs about IBM Server system settings.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


235


A FAQs

A.3.1 How to Solve the Problem Where the Remote Control Desktop Appears and Then Disappears Immediately Question How do I solve the problem where the remote control desktop appears and then disappears immediately?

Answer Step 1 On the Internet Explorer, choose Tools > Internet Options > Security > Trusted sites > Sites, the Trusted sites dialog is displayed.

Step 2 Clear the selection of the Require server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone check box.

Step 3 Add website address to the Add this website to the zone . NOTE

If the Would you like to move it to the Trusted sites zone? dialog is displayed, click Yes.

Step 4 Click Close. Step 5 Click Custom level.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


236


A FAQs

Step 6 Select Low from the Reset to drop-down list. NOTE

The IE browser has different versions. Select the lowest level from the Reset todrop-down list.

Step 7 Click Reset. Step 8 Click OK. Step 9 Click Apply. Step 10 Click OK. Step 11 Press F5 to refresh the Internet Explorer. ----End

A.3.2 How do I use an IMM IP address to remotely log in to an IBM server (IBM X3650 M4) Question How do I use an IMM IP address to remotely log in to an IBM server (IBM X3650 M4)?

Answer Step 1 Open the Internet Explorer and enter the IMM IP address of the IMM in the address bar to access the page for logging into the IMM. NOTE




l

The default password is PASSW0RD. Note that the sixth character is digit 0 but not letter O. If the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password. For details, see A. . M4) 3.5 How to Change the Password of the IMM User USERID(IBM X3650

Step 3 Click Remote Control, select Use the ActiveX Client > Start remote control in single-user mode to access the remote control desktop. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


237


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


A FAQs

238


A FAQs

NOTE l




l

If the remote control desktop appears and then disappears immediately, see A.3.1 How to Solve the Problem Where the Remote Control Desktop Appears and Then Disappears Immediately to solve the problem.

l


l


l

For the IBM X3650 M4 server, if CAPS is displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewer window, letters are entered in upper case; if CAPS is not displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewer window, letters are entered in lower case. The Caps indicator on the keyboard cannot indicate whether letters are entered in upper or lower case.

l

For the IBM X3650 M4 server, if NUM is displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewer window, digits can be entered; if NUM is not displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewerwindow, digits cannot be entered. The Num indicator on the keyboard cannot indicate whether the number keypad is available.

l


----End

A.3.3 How to Use an IMM IP Address to Remotely Log In to an IBM Server(IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3) Question How do I use an IMM IP address to remotely log in to an IBM server?

Answer Step 1 Open the Internet Explorer and enter the IMM IP address of the IMM in the address bar to access the page for logging into the IMM. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


239


A FAQs

NOTE




l

The default password is PASSW0RD. Note that the sixth character is digit 0 but not letter O. If the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been forA. system security, modify the default password and remember the new password. Forchanged, details, see 3.6 How to Change the Password of the IMM User USERID(IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3).



Step 4 Enable remote control. Choose Tasks > Remote Control from the navigation tree. In the right-hand pane, click Use the ActiveX Client with Microsoft Internet Explorer > Start Remote Control in Single User Mode to access the remote control desktop. The remote control desktop consists of two parts: virtual media window and desktop display window.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


240


A FAQs

NOTE l



If the remote control desktop appears and then disappears immediately, see A.3.1 How to Solve the Problem Where the Remote Control Desktop Appears and Then Disappears Immediately to solve the problem.

l


l


l


----End

A.3.4 How to View the IMM IP Address on the IBM Server Question How do I view the IMM IP address on the IBM server?

Answer Step 1 Install the KVM on the PC server. NOTE

A common monitor is enough.

Step 2 Press the power button of the PC server to restart it. Step 3 Wait about 1 minute after the IBM System X window is displayed. The Setup option is displayed.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


241


A FAQs

Step 4 Press F1 to select Setup, and press Enter.

Step 5 Use arrow keys to select System Settings, and press Enter. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)



242


l

A FAQs

For IBM X3650 M4, show as follows:

Step 6 Use arrow keys to select Integrated Management Module, and press Enter. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)



243


A FAQs

Step 7 Use arrow keys to select Network Configuration press Enter and access the page for modifying the IMM IP address. l

For IBM X3850 X5, show as follows:

l


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


244


A FAQs

Step 8 View the IP address inIP Address. ----End

A.3.5 How to Change the Password of the IMM User USERID(IBM X3650 M4) Question How to change the password of the IMM user USERID(IBM X3650 M4)?

Answer Step 1 Enter the default IMM IP address on the Internet Explorer of the PC to access the IMM Web login window. NOTE

The default IP address of the IMM is 192.168.70.125and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 . If the default IP address of the IMM is changed, see A.3.4 How to View the IMM IP Address on the . IBM Server



l

The default password is PASSW0RD. Note that the sixth character is digit 0 but not letter O. If the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password.

Step 3 Click IMM Management > Users.

Step 4 In the displayed User Accounts page, click Global Login Settings. Select Custom security settings from Account security level, and set the Password expiration period (days)to 0 and other parameters to the maximum value. Then click OK.

Step 5 In the User Accounts page, click USERID.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


245


A FAQs

Step 6 Enter a new password, such as Changeme_123, in Password. Enter the password again in Confirm password. To ensure the security of the U2000, passwords must be complex enough. For example, a password must contain eight or more characters of two types. The allowed characters are digits, letters, and special characters. Remember to change passwords regularly.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


246


A FAQs

Step 7 Click OK. ----End

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


247


A FAQs

A.3.6 How to Change the Password of the IMM User USERID(IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3) Question How do I change the password of the IMM user USERID?





l

The default password is PASSW0RD. Note that the sixth character is digit 0 but not letter O. If the password has been changed, enter the new password.



Choose Login Profiles from the navigation tree and click Global Login Settings. Select

Step 4 Custom security settings from Account security level, and set the Maximum Password Age to 0 and other parameters to the maximum value. Then click Save.

Step 5 Choose Login Profiles from the navigation tree and click USERID.

Step 6 Enter a new password, such as Changeme_123, in Password. To ensure the security of the U2000, passwords must be complex enough. For example, a password must contain eight or more characters of two types. The allowed characters are digits, letters, and special characters. Remember to change passwords regularly.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


248


A FAQs

Step 7 Enter the password again in Confirm password. Step 8 Click Save. A message indicating that the password will take effect is displayed. Click OK. ----End

A.3.7 How to Solve IMM Problems Question How do I solve IMM problems?

Answer The following problems may exist on the IMM and you must take measures to these problems:

N Problem o .

Solution

1

The procedure is as follows:

l

The Internet Explorer does not respond.

l

After a user clicks the Internet Explorer or Video Viewer icon on the taskbar, the Internet Explorer or Video Viewer window is not displayed.

1. Right-click the Internet Explorer icon on the taskbar to close the Internet Explorer. If the Internet Explorer is still open, stop the iexplore.exe process on the Processes tab page in the Task Manager.

The Internet Explorer closes automatically.

2. Open the Internet Explorer.

After a user closes the Internet Explorer and Video Viewer windows, the user cannot open the Video Viewer window.

3. Access the IMM page and open the Video Viewer window. The srcinal session is still there.

l

l

2 After the Video Viewer window is minimized on the taskbar, the window cannot be restored.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

On the taskbar, right-click Video Viewer and choose Close window from the shortcut menu to shut down the Video Viewer window. Re-open theVideo Viewer window on the IMM page.


249


A FAQs

N Problem o .

Solution

3 The Caps indicator on the keyboard is on, but the entered letter is a lower-case letter.

Two methods are available: l

Press Caps Lock. NOTE

l

4 The Num indicator on the key board is on, but entering a number fails.

l

On the Video Viewerwindow, the Caps indicator in the On state does not mean that the letter entered is an upper-case letter.

l

For the IBM X3650 M4 server, if CAPS is displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewerwindow, letters are entered in upper case; if CAPS is not displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewer window, letters are entered in lower case. The Caps indicator on the keyboard cannot indicate whether letters are entered in upper or lower case.

Shut down the Video Viewer window, press Caps Lock, and open it again.

Two methods are available: l

Press Num Lock. NOTE

l

5 Failure to open multiple Video Viewer windows on a PC or laptop or the failure that the Video Viewer window does not respond.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l

On the Video Viewerwindow, the Num indicator in the On state does not mean that the number key works.

l

For the IBM X3650 M4 server, if NUM is displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewerwindow, digits can be entered; if NUM is not displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewer window, digits cannot be entered. The Num indicator on the keyboard cannot indicate whether the number keypad is available.

Shut down the Video Viewer window, press Num Lock. Open it again after the Running ActiveX KVM Client window is automatically closed.

Open one Video Viewer window on a PC or laptop. Open the Video Viewer window on a PC or laptop for each server when you operate multiple servers.


250


A FAQs

A.3.8 Viewing Hard Disk Information in Local Mode (IBM Server) This topic describes how to view hard disk information in local mode.

Prerequisites You must ensure that the server is connected to the KVM.

Context NOTE l


l


Procedure Step 1 Start the IBM server. After the basic input/output system (BIOS) check is completed, the BIOS information about the RAID is displayed, as shown in the following figure. NOTE


Step 2 Press Ctrl+H as prompted to access the Adapter Selection window.


If MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Foreign Configuration window is displayed, click Clear.

Step 4 Click Physical View to access the Physical View window, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


251


A FAQs

NOTE l


l


If configuring eight hard disks for the IBM server with standard delivery configurations, IDs of eight slots from Slot: 0to Slot: 7are displayed. If configuring two hard disks for the IBM server (X3850 X5) with standard delivery configurations, IDs of two slots from Slot: 0to Slot: 1are displayed.

–


If any two of the preceding three conditions are met, all hard disks on the server are available. Otherwise, an unavailable hard disk ex ists on the server. As shown in the following figure, the eight ha rd disks are used as an example.

Step 5 Click Exit to exit the WebBIOS window. Step 6 Click Yes. A dialog box is displayed.


A.3.9 Viewing Hard Disk Informationin Remote Mode (IBM X3650 M4) This topic describes how to view hard disk information in remote mode.

Prerequisites l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

A PC or laptop on which the Internet Explorer browser is installed is ready. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

252


A FAQs

l


l

The IMM IP address has been set.

Context NOTE l


l


Procedure Step 1 Perform the following operations to access the RAID configuration window. 1.

Open the Internet Explorer and enter the IMM IP address of the IMM in the address bar to access the page for logging into the IMM.

2.

Enter an IMM user name and a password, and click Login. NOTE

3.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–


–

The default password is PASSW0RD. Note that the sixth character is digit 0 but not letter O. If the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password. For details, see A.3.5 How to Change the Password of the IMM User USERID(IBM X3650 M4).

Click Remote Control and select Use the ActiveX Client > Start remote control in single-user mode to access the remote control desktop.


253


A FAQs

NOTE

–


2. During the installation, click Run in the Warning-Security dialog box asking you whether to trust this site.

4. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–


–

If the remote control desktop appears and then disappears immediately, seeA.3.1 How to Solve the Problem Where the Remote Control Desktop Appears and Then Disappears Immediatelyto solve the problem.

–


–


–

For the IBM X3650 M4 server, if CAPS is displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewerwindow, letters are entered in upper case; if CAPS is not displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewerwindow, letters are entered in lower case. The Caps indicator on the keyboard cannot indicate whether letters are entered in upper or lower case.

–


Choose Tools > Power > Reboot from the main menu to reboot the system. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254


A FAQs

NOTE

5.

–


–

If Rebootis unavailable, choose Tools> Power > On and then choose Tools> Power> Rebootto restart the system.

Start the IBM server. After the basic input/output system (BIOS) check is completed, the BIOS information about the RAID is displayed, as shown in the following figure. NOTE


6.



7.

Click Start to access the WebBIOS window. NOTE


Step 2 Click Physical View to access the Physical View window, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


255


A FAQs

NOTE l


l


IDs of eight slots from Slot: 0to Slot: 7are displayed.

–


If any two of the preceding three conditions are met, the eight hard disks on the server are available. Otherwise, an unavailable hard disk ex ists on the server.

Step 3 Click Exit to exit the WebBIOS window. The Exit Application dialog box is displayed, asking you whether to exit.

Step 4 Click Yes and choose Tools > Power > Reboot to restart the server. It takes approximately 5 to 8 minutes to restart the system.

NOTE


----End

A.3.10 Viewing Hard Disk Informationin Remote Mode (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3) This topic describes how to view hard disk information in remote mode.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


256


A FAQs

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context NOTE l


l



Open the Internet Explorer and enter the IMM IP address of the IMM in the address bar to access the page for logging into the IMM.

2.


3.

–


–

The default password is PASSW0RD. Note that the sixth character is digit 0 but not letter O. If the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password. For details, see A.3.6 How to Change the Passw ord of the IMM User USERID(IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 3) M.

Click Continue to access the Integrated Management Module web page. NOTE


4.

Enable remote control. Choose Tasks > Remote Control from the navigation tree. In the right-hand pane, click Use the ActiveX Client with Microsoft Internet Explorer > Start Remote Control in Single User Mode to access the remote control desktop. The remote control desktop consists of two parts: virtual media window and desktop display window.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


257


A FAQs

NOTE

5.

–

If a dialog box is displayed asking you to install plug-in, click Install.

–


–


Choose Tools > Power > Reboot from the main menu to reboot the system.

NOTE

6.

–


–


Start the IBM server. After the basic input/output system (BIOS) check is completed, the BIOS information about the RAID is displayed, as shown in the following figure. NOTE


7.



Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


258


8.

A FAQs

Click Start to access the WebBIOS window. NOTE


Step 2 Click Physical View to access the Physical View window, as shown in the following figure. NOTE l


l


If configuring eight hard disks for the IBM server with standard delivery configurations, IDs of eight slots from Slot: 0to Slot: 7are displayed. If configuring two hard disks for the IBM server (X3850 X5) with standard delivery configurations, IDs of two slots from Slot: 0to Slot: 1are displayed.

–


If any two of the preceding three conditions are met, all hard disks on the server are available. Otherwise, an unavailable hard disk ex ists on the server. As shown in the following figure, the eight ha rd disks are used as an example.


Step 4 Click Yes and choose Tools > Power > Reboot to restart the server. It takes approximately 5 to 8 minutes to restart the system.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


259


A FAQs

NOTE


----End

A.3.11 Formatting disks in Local Mode (IBM Server) This topic describes how to format disks in local mode.

Prerequisites You must ensure that the server is connected to the KVM.

Context NOTE l

The operation snapshots in this topic vary according to the IBM WebBIOS versions and do not

l

affect the RAID configuration. During the RAID configuration, use actual snapshots. If no window is displayed after you click a button during the configuration, move the mouse and try again.

Procedure Step 1 After the server is restarted, press F1 to access the BIOS window as prompted.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


260


A FAQs

Step 2 Select Load Default Settings to restore default settings. Press Enter. The following dialog box is played.

Step 3 Select Boot Manager, press Enter, and then choose Add Boot Option. Step 4 Optional: For IBM X3650 M3 or IBM X3850 X5, select Legacy Only. Press Enter. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


261


A FAQs

Step 5 Optional: For IBM X3650 M4, select Generic Boot Option and then Legacy Only by arrow keys. Press Enter.

Step 6 Press Esc to return to Boot Manager.

Step 7 Select Change Boot Order. Press Enter. The following dialog box is played.

Step 8 Press Enter, and select Legacy Only using the arrow key ↓. Step 9 Press Shift and + to set the startup precedence to Legacy Only.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


262


A FAQs

Step 10 Press Enter. Select Commit Changes using the arrow keys and press Enter to save the settings.

Step 11 Restart the server manually. Step 12 After the basic input/output system (BIOS) check is completed, the BIOS information about the RAID is displayed, as shown in the following figure. NOTE


Step 13 Press Ctrl+H as prompted to access the Adapter Selection window.


If a window shown in the following figure is displayed, click Clear.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


263


A FAQs






2.


3.


4.



5.

Click Accept.

6.


7.

Click Yes to initialize RAID configurations.

8.


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


264


A FAQs

Step 19 Click Exit to exit the WebBIOS window. Step 20 Click Yes. A dialog box is displayed.


A.3.12 Formatting the disks in Remote Mode (IBM X3650 M4) This topic describes how to format the disks in remote mode.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context NOTE l

The operation snapshots in this topic vary according to the IBM WebBIOS versions and do not

l

affect the RAID configuration. During the RAID configuration, use actual snapshots. If no window is displayed after you click a button during the configuration, move the mouse and try again.


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Open the Internet Explorer and enter the IMM IP address of the IMM in the address bar to access the page for logging into the IMM. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

265


2.

A FAQs


3.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–


–

The default password is PASSW0RD. Note that the sixth character is digit 0 but not letter O. If the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password. For details, see A.3.5 How to Change the Password of the IMM User USERID(IBM X3650 M4).

Click Remote Control, select Use the ActiveX Client, and click Start remote control in single-user mode to access the remote control desktop.


266


A FAQs

NOTE

–


2. During the installation, click Run in the Warning-Security dialog box asking you whether to trust this site. –


–


–


–


–

For the IBM X3650 M4 server, if CAPS is displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewerwindow, letters are entered in upper case; if CAPS is not displayed in the lower right corner of the Video Viewerwindow, letters are entered in lower case. The Caps indicator on the keyboard cannot indicate whether letters are entered in upper or lower case.

–

4.


Choose Tools > Power > Reboot from the main menu to reboot the system.

NOTE

5.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–


–


After the IBM System X window is displayed, wait for about 2 minutes until Setup is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267


A FAQs

6.

Press F1 to access the BIOS window.

7.

Select Load Default Settings to restore default settings. Press Enter. The following dialog box is played.

8.

Select Boot Manager and press Enter. Then select Add Boot Option and press Enter.

9.

Select Generic Boot Option and then select Legacy Only by arrow key ↓. Press Enter.

10. Press Esc to return to Boot Manager. 11. Press Esc twice to return to Boot Manager. 12. Select Change Boot Order. Press Enter. The following dialog box is played. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


268


A FAQs

13. Press Enter, and select Legacy Only using the arrow key ↓. 14. Press Shift and + to set the startup precedence to Legacy Only.

15. Press Enter. Select Commit Changes using the arrow keys and press Enter to save the settings. 16. Choose Tools > Power > Reboot from the main menu to reboot the system.

NOTE

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–


–



269


A FAQs

17. After the basic input/output system (BIOS) check is completed, the BIOS information about the RAID is displayed, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

–


–


18. Press Ctrl+H as prompted to access the Adapter Selection window. NOTE


19. Click Start to access the WebBIOS window. NOTE



Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


270


A FAQs





2.


3.


4.

Select Automatic Configuration and click Next.

NOTE


5.

Click Yes in the dialog box showing the message Are you sure you want to disable data protection?.

6.

Click Accept.

7.


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


271


A FAQs

8.

Click Yes in the dialog box showing the message All data on the new Virtual Drivers will be lost. Want to Initialize? to initialize RAID configurations.

9.

Click Home to return to the WebBIOS window. The following figure shows the WebBIOS window after the initialization is complete.


Step 7 Click Yes, and the following window is displayed.

Step 8 Choose Tools > Power > Reboot to restart the server. It takes approximately 5 to 8 minutes to restart the system. NOTE


----End

A.3.13 Formatting the disks in Remote Mode (IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3) This topic describes how to format the disks in remote mode.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


272


A FAQs

Context NOTE l


l



Open the Internet Explorer and enter the IMM IP address of the IMM in the address b ar to access the page for logging into the IMM.

2.


3.

–


–

The default password is PASSW0RD. Note that the sixth character is digit 0 but not letter O. If the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password. For details, see A.3.6 How to Change the Password of the IMM User USERID(IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3) .

Click Continue to access the Integrated Management Module web page. NOTE


4.

Enable remote control. Choose Tasks > Remote Control from the navigation tree. In the right-hand pane, select Use the ActiveX Client with Microsoft Internet Explorer and click Start Remote Control in Single User Mode to access the remote control desktop. The remote control desktop consists of two parts: virtual media window and desktop display window.

NOTE

5. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–

If a dialog box is displayed asking you to install plug-in, click Install.

–


–

If Use the ActiveX Client with Microsoft Internet Explorer is unavailable, just click Start to access the remote control desktop. Remote Control in Single User Mode

Choose Tools > Power > Reboot from the main menu to reboot the system. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

273


A FAQs

NOTE

–


–


6.

After the IBM System X window is displayed, wait for about 2 minutes until Setup is displayed.

7.

Press F1 to access the BIOS window.

8.

Select Load Default Settings to restore default settings. Press Enter. The following dialog box is played.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


274


9.

A FAQs

Select Boot Manager and press Enter. Then select Add Boot Option and press Enter.

10. Select Legacy Only. Press Enter. 11. Press Esc to return to Boot Manager. 12. Select Change Boot Order. Press Enter. The following dialog box is played.

13. Press Enter, and select Legacy Only using the arrow key ↓. 14. Press Shift and + to set the startup precedence to Legacy Only.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


275


A FAQs

15. Press Enter. Select Commit Changes using the arrow keys and press Enter to save the settings. 16. Choose Tools > Power > Reboot from the main menu to reboot the system.

NOTE

–


–


17. After the basic input/output system (BIOS) check is completed, the BIOS information about the RAID is displayed, as shown in the following figure. NOTE


18. Press Ctrl+H as prompted to access the Adapter Selection window.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


276


A FAQs

NOTE


19. Click Start to access the WebBIOS window. NOTE





Step 4 Click Yes to clear the configuration, and return to t he WebBIOS window. Step 5 Initialize RAID configurations. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


277


A FAQs

1.


2.


3.


4.



5.

Click Accept.

6. 7.

Click Yes to save RAID configurations. Click Yes to initialize RAID configurations.

8.


Step 6 Click Exit to exit the WebBIOS window. The Exit Confirmation dialog box is displayed, asking you whether to exit.

Step 7 Click Yes, and the following window is displayed.

Step 8 Choose Tools > Power > Reboot to restart the server. It takes approximately 5 to 8 minutes to restart the system. NOTE


----End Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


278


A FAQs

A.3.14 How to Configure the HTTPS on the IMM(IBM X3650 M4) Question The HTTPS is recommended for remotely accessing the server to ensure system security. How do I configure the HTTPS on the IMM?


The default IP address of the IMM is 192.168.70.125 . If the default IP address of the IMM has been changed, see A.3.4 How to View the IMM IP Address on the IBM Server .



l


Step 3 Click IMM Management > Security. Ensure that the value of HTTPS Server certificate status is A signed certificate is installed. As shown in the following figure.

If the value of HTTPS Server certificate status is not A signed certificate is installed , perform the following operations to install SSL authentication: 1.

Click Generate a New Key and a Self-signed Certificate .

2.

Set the related parameters in Generate New Key and Self-signed Certificate dialog box.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


279


A FAQs

NOTE

3.

–

Set parameters in the Required SSL Certificate Data area as prompted. The following figure shows examples of the parameter settings.

–

The Optional SSL Certificate Data parameter does not need to be set.

Click OK. After automatic authentication is complete, the value of HTTPS Server certificate status changes to A signed certificate is installed.

Step 4 Ensure that Enabled HTTPS server is selected. As shown in the following figure.

If Enabled HTTPS server is not selected, perform the following operations: 1.

Select Enabled HTTPS server.

2.

Click Apply. The Confirm Restart dialog is played.

3.

Click OK. The IMM restarts automatically.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


280


A FAQs

NOTE l


l

If HTTPS needs to be disabled and HTTP needs to be used, clear the selection of the select Enabled . Then execute Step 4.2through Step 4.3. HTTPS server


If HTTPS is used and a message indicating a security certificate error is displayed, ignore the message and continue to browse the Web installation page.

----End

A.3.15 How to Configure the HTTPS on the IMM(IBM X3850 X5 and IBM X3650 M3) Question The HTTPS is recommended for remotely accessing the server to ensure system security. How do I configure the HTTPS on the IMM?


The default IP address of the IMM is 192.168.70.125 . If the default IP address of the IMM has been changed, see A.3.4 How to View the IMM IP Address on the IBM Server .



l




Step 4 Choose Security from the navigation tree. Ensure that the value of HTTPS Server certificate status is A self-signed Certificate is installed.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


281


A FAQs

If the value of HTTPS Server certificate status is not A self-signed Certificate is installed, perform the following operations to install SSL authentication: 1.

Click Generate a New Key and a Self-signed Certificate .

2.

Set the related parameters. NOTE

3.

–

Set parameters in the Certificate Dataarea as prompted. The following figure shows examples of the parameter settings.

–

The Optional Certificate Data parameter does not need to be set.

Click Generate Certificate in the lower-right corner. After automatic authentication is complete, the value of HTTPS Server certificate status changes to A self-signed Certificate is installed.

Step 5 Ensure that the value of HTTPS Server is Enabled.

If the value of HTTPS Server is not Enabled, perform the following operations: 1.

Select Enabled from the HTTPS Server drop-down list.

2.

Click Save. A message asking you to restart the IMM is displayed.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


282


A FAQs

3.

Click OK.

4.

Choose Restart IMM from the navigation tree.

5.

On the Restart IMM page, click Restart. A message indicating that the IMM will be restarted is displayed.

6.

Click OK. A message asking you to shut down the Internet Explorer or tabs is displayed.

7.

Click Yes. NOTE l

During restart of the IMM, run the ping IMM IP address-t command on the CLI of the PC or laptop. If the IMM IP address ca n be pinged through, the IMM is successfully restarted. Restarting IMM takes about 3 minutes.

l

If HTTPS needs to be disabled and HTTP needs to be used, select Disabledfrom the HTTPS Serverdrop-down list. Then execute Step 5.2through Step 5.7.


If HTTPS is used and a message indicating a security certificate error is displayed, ignore the message and continue to browse the Web installation page.

----End

A.4 SQL Server Database This topic describes the FAQs about the SQL server database.

A.4.1 How to Check Whether the SQL Server Database Has Been Installed Question How do I check whether the SQL Server database has been installed?

Answer NOTE

If the SQL Server database has not been installed, when you install the U2000, the SQL Server database is automatically installed with the U2000. l

Consult the computer's administrator to learn whether the SQL Server database has been installed.

l

Check whether the installation directory and file of the SQL Server database exist. A sample directory is C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server.

l

Manually start the SQL Server database. For details, see A.4.3 How to Start the SQL Server Database.

l

Check whether the database is installed in binary mode. For details, see A.4.5 How to Check Whether the SQL Server Database Can Be Sorted in Binary Mode.

----End Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


283


A FAQs

A.4.2 How to Shut Down the SQL Server Database Question How do I shut down the SQL server database?

Answer Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools> SQL

Step 1 Server Configuration Manager > SQL Server Services. Step 2 Perform the following operations to ensure that the SQL Server database has been stopped. Right-click SQL Server (MSSQLS ERVER) and check whether the shortcut menu option Stop is grayed out. l

If Stop is grayed out, the SQL Server database is stopped.

l

If Stop is not grayed out, the SQL Server database is not stopped. Right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) and choose Stop from the shortcut menu.

----End

A.4.3 How to Start the SQL Server Database Question How do I start the SQL server database?

Answer Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools> SQL Server Configuration Manager > SQL Server Services.

Step 2 Perform the following operations to ensure that the SQL Server database has been started. Right-click SQL Server (MSSQLS ERVER) and check whether the shortcut menu option Start is grayed out. l

If Start is grayed out, the SQL Server database is started.

l

If Start is not grayed out, the SQL Server database is stopped. Right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) and choose Start from the shortcut menu.

----End

A.4.4 How to Change the sa User Password If the U2000 Is Not Installed Question How to change the sa user password if the U2000 is not installed? Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


284


A FAQs

NOTE

The following method applies to the scenario where the U2000 is not installed. If the operating system has the U2000 installed and a user forgets the sa user password, contact Huawei technical support engineers.

Answer Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > SQL Server Management Studio. The Connect to Server window is displayed. Set parameters according to the following information and then click Connect. l

Server type: Database Engine

l

Server name: DBSVR

l

Authentication: Windows Authentication

Step 2 Choose Security > Logins of the local server in the navigation tree. Then, select sa, rightclick it, and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

Step 3 Change the password of user sa and click OK.

NOTICE l

Be sure to remember the password of user sa. If this password is missed, database-related operations may fail to be performed.

l

The database sa user password must meet the following requirements, please set the new password as required: – The password contains a minimum of eight characters and a maximum of 30 characters. –

The password must contain at least four of the following combinations: n


n


n

At least one digit

n

At least one special character ~@#^*-_+[{}]:./? Other special characters are not supported. Do not include other special characters, such as ()|<>&`!$\"%'=;,space in passwords.

–


----End

A.4.5 How to Check Whether the SQL Server Database Can Be Sorted in Binary Mode Question When you install the SQL Server database, you need to select the binary mode as the sorting mode. How do I check whether the SQL Server database can be sorted in binary mode? Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


285


A FAQs

Answer Step 1 Perform the following operations to ensure that the SQL Server database has been started. Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools> SQL Server Configuration Manager, choose SQL Server Services from the navigation tree, right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) in the right pane, check whether the shortcut menu option Start is grayed out. l l

If Start is grayed out, the SQL Server database is started. If Start is not grayed out, the SQL Server database is stopped. Right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) and choose Start from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 Run the following commands at the command prompt: C:\> isql -Usa -S DBSVR NOTE

In order to enhance the security of the database after the U2000 is installed, thesa user may be manually disabled and replaced with a customized administrator name, such asdbadmin. Password: 1> sp_helpsort 2> go NOTE l


l


l

The prompt C:\> varies according to on-site conditions. If the system is logged in to as the dbuser user, the default prompt is C:\Users\dbuaer>. You can run the cd command to switch the directory. A commandcd example c:\ is C:\Users\dbuser> . The command prompt switches to c:\>.

Step 3 If the displayed information includes binary sort, the database is sorted in binary mode. If the displayed information does not include binary sort, the database is not sorted in binary mode. Then, run the quit command. ----End

A.4.6 How to Manually Uninstall the SQL Server Database Question How do I manually uninstall the SQL server database?

Answer Step 1 Optional: If database patches have been installed, uninstall the patches. 1.

Choose Click Start > Control Panel > Uninstall a program > View installed updates. The Uninstall an update window is displayed. NOTE

The buttons displayed in Control Panelvary according to the check mode on the upper right corner. Click the button similar to program.

2. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Right-click the patch to be uninstalled and choose Uninstall. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

286


A FAQs

NOTE

If there are multiple patches, sort them by Name (with the arrow facing upwards), and uninstall the patches one by one from top to bottom. For example, if you are using Windows 2008, uninstall patches in the following sequence: Service Pack 3 for Microsoft SQL Server VSS Writer (64, Service Pack 3 for Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Policies (KB2546951) , bit) (KB2546951) Service Pack 3 for Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Browser(KB2546951) , and SQL Server 2008 Service Pack 3(KB2546951)(64-bit) .

Step 2 Ensure that the database is uninstalled correctly by performing the following steps: 1.

Choose Start > Control Panel > Uninstall a program. The Uninstall or change a program window is displayed. NOTE

The buttons displayed in Control Panelvary according to the check mode on the upper right corner. Click the button similar to program.

2.

Right-click Microsoft SQL Server 2008 (64-bit) and choose Uninstall/Change.

3.

The SQL Server 2008 dialog box will be displayed. Click Remove.

4.

The SQL Server 2008 Setup dialog box will be displayed. After operation completed, click OK.

5.

The Select Instance dialog box will be displayed. Select default values, click Next.

6.

The Select Features dialog box will be displayed. Select default values, Select the uninstalled SQL Server features, click Next.

7.

The Removal Rules dialog box will be displayed. After operation completed, click Next.

8.

The Ready to Remove dialog box will be displayed. Click Remove.

9.

Progress The Removal Next. dialog box will be displayed. Wait for 3 minutes, after operation completed, click

10. The Complete dialog box will be displayed. Click Close. The SQL Server 2008 removal completed successfully. 11. Uninstall all database components except Microsoft SQL Server 2008 (64-bit). Sort the components by Name (with the arrow facing upwards), and uninstall the components one by one from top to bottom. To uninstall a component, right-click it and choose Uninstall/Change. . NOTE

During uninstallation, a message may be displayed indicating that the computer fails to be restarted. See Step 4to delete PendingFileRenameOperations .

12. Delete the database-related directories and registry information.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–

If the database is installed using a software package, navigate to the directory where the U2000 installation package is stored and double-click the manual_clean_sqlserver.bat script in the engr\engineering\script directory.

–

If thedouble-click database is the installed using a DVD-ROM, enter the U2000 installation DVD manual_clean_sqlserver.bat and script in the engr\engineering \script directory.


287


A FAQs

NOTE

–

If the information indicating successful deletion is displayed, the database-related directories and registry information are deleted successfully. Press any key to close the window.

–

If the engr\engineering\script directory does not contain the manual_clean_sqlserver.bat script, perform the following operations to delete the directories and registry information about the database: 1. Delete the MSSQL2008, MSSQLXand MSDATAfolders in the installation directory of the database. 2. Delete the Microsoft SQL Server folder in the Program filesfolder that is in the installation directory of the OS. 3. Delete the Microsoft SQL Server and Microsoft SQL Server Compact Edition folders in the Program files (x86) folder that is in the installation directory of the OS. 4. Choose Start > All Programs. Check whether Microsoft SQL Server 2008 programs have been deleted. If not, right-click Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and choose Deletefrom the shortcut menu. 5. Click Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter regeditto open the registration table, delete the following registry information: 1. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\MSSQLServer 2. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server 3. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Redist 4. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Redist 5. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server Native Client 10.0 6. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\services\MSSQLSERVER 7. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\services \SQLSERVERAGENT 8. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\services \MSSQLServerADHelper 9. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\services \MSSQLServerADHelper100 10. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\services\MSDTC 11. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session Manager \PendingFileRenameOperations 12. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Setup \ExceptionComponents 13. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\App Paths\setup.exe\RunAsOnNonAdminInstall 14. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\App Paths\setup.exe\BlockOnTSNonInstallMode 15. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\ODBC\ODBC.INI\DBSVR

Step 3 After the preceding operations are performed, restart the OS. Step 4 Ensure that the registries do not contain the PendingFileRenameOperations key value. 1.

Click Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter regedit to open the registration table.

2.

Ensure that the registries do not contain the PendingFileRenameOperations key value in the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session Manager. If PendingFileRenameOperations is included, right-click it and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

----End Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


288


A FAQs

A.4.7 How to Check the Name of the SQL Server Database Server Question How to check the name of the SQL Server database server?

Answer Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools> SQL Server Configuration Manager > SQL Native Client 10.0 Configuration.

Step 2 Click the Aliases tab page to check the name of the SQL Server database server. ----End

A.4.8 How to Check the Version of the SQL Server Database Server Question How to Check the Version of the SQL Server Database Server?

Answer Step 1 Choose Start > Run. The Run window will be displayed. Step 2 Enter cmd and click OK. Step 3 In the CLI, run the following commands to check the database version information: DBSVR C:\> isql -Usa -S NOTE l


l


l

The prompt C:\> varies according to on-site conditions. If the system is logged in to as the dbuser user, the default prompt is C:\Users\dbuaer>. You can run the cd command to switch the directory. A command example is C:\Users\dbuser> cd c:\ . The command prompt switches to c:\>.

1> select @@version 2> go l

In Windows Server 2008, if the database version is correct, information similar to the following is displayed: ----------------------------------------------------------------Microsoft Server 2008 (SP4) - 10.0.6241.0 (X64) Apr SQL 17 2015 10:56:08 Co pyright (c) 1988-2008 Microsoft Corporation Enterprise Edition (64-bit) on Windows NT 6.1 (Build 7601: Service Pack 1) (1 row affected)

If the database version is not 10.0.6241.0, you must reinstall the database patch or contact Huawei technical support engineers. ----End Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


289


A FAQs

A.4.9 How to Create a Replacement User for the SQL Server 2008 Database Administrator sa User This topic describes how to disable the SQL Server 2008 database administrator (sa user by default) and create a replacement user for the database administrator. Disabling the default database administrator reduces potential security risks.

Prerequisites l l

sa The database administrator has exited from the connection. The U2000 is stopped. For details about how to check whether the U2000 is stopped, see E.1 Stopping the U2000 Server Processes .

l

The database is started. For details about how to check whether the database is started, see D.2 Starting the Database .

l

The MSuite is stopped.For details about how to end processes on the MSuite server,seeA.5.2 How to End Processes on the MSuite Server

l

To reduce the probability of security threats, you can disable the database administrator, create a new database user to replace the database administrator, and assign the new user with the same permissions as the database administrator.

l

You can only manually disable thesa user and create a replacement user for the sa user only after the U2000 is installed or upgraded.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights. Step 2 Choose Start > Run. The Run window will be displayed. Step 3 Enter cmd and click OK. Step 4 Perform the following operations to disable the sa user and create a new user to replace the sa user. 1.

Run the following commands to disable the sa user and create a new administrator: > cd /d D:\oss\server\platform\bin > sec_adm -cmd modifyDBAUserName -oldname sa -newname dbadmin NOTE

–

D:\oss: U2000 installation directory.

–

sa: the current database administrator

–

dbadmin: the database administrator to be created. The dbadminuser is used as an example of the new administrator of the database. The administrator name can be customized as required. The customized user name must start with a letter and can contain lower-case letters, digits, and special character _. The customized user name contains a maximum of 16 characters.

–

If the created user dbadminalready exists, this command assigns permissions to the new database administrator.

The following is displayed: Warning: After this operation is successfully performed, the current database administrator account fails. To continue, enter "yes". To exit, enter other characters:

2. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Input yes. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

290


A FAQs

Information similar to the following is displayed: Enter the password of the sa user:

3.

Enter the password of the sa user as prompted. NOTE

The default password of the sa user is Changeme_123 .

If the following information is displayed, the replacement user for the sa user is created successfully. The command is executed successfully. NOTE

The new database administrator dbadminuses the same password as the sa user. In fact, the sa user is renamed without resetting the password.

----End

Result Check whether the replacement user for the sa user is successful. 1.


2.


3.


4.

Run the following commands to check whether the sa user is disabled. > isql -Usa -SDBSVR

Information similar to the following is displayed: Password:

Enter the password of the sa user. If information similar to the following is displayed, the sa user is disabled. Login failed for user 'sa'.

5.

In the CLI, run the following commands to check whether the dbadmin user is created successfully: > isql -Udbadmin -SDBSVR

If information similar to the following is displayed, enter the password of the dbadmin user. Password:

If the database can be connected properly, the dbadmin user is created successfully.

Follow-up Procedure If the database administrator sa needs to be restored, refer to the preceding operations to disable the existing database administrator and use the sa user as the new database administrator.

NOTICE If the password of the new database administrator has been changed after the sa user is disabled, restore the password to the one used when the sa user is still enabled. Otherwise, the database may be unavailable after the database administrator sa is restored.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


291


A FAQs

A.4.10 How Do I Change the IP Address Bound to an SQL Server Database Port to 127.0.0.1? Question How do I change the IP address bound to an SQL server database port to 127.0.0.1?

Answer Step 1 Log in to the OS as an administrator. Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools > SQL Server Configuration Manager > SQL Server Network Configuration > Protocols for MSSQLSERVER.

Step 2 Double-click TCP/IP. The TCP/IP Properties dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click the Protocol tab. Select No for Listen All under General. Step 4 Click the IP Address tab. Select Yes for Enabled under the IP address of 127.0.0.1. Step 5 Click OK. In the Warning dialog box displayed indicating that the settings take effect only after the database is restarted, click OK.

Step 6 Ensure that the U2000 is not running. 1.


2.


3.

In the CLI, run the daem_ps command to check whether the U2000 process is stopped. – –

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

If no command output is displayed, the U2000 process has stopped. If information similar to the following is displayed, the U2000 process is not stopped. In the CLI, run the D:\oss\server\platform\bin\stopnms.bat command to stop the U2000 process. imapmrb.exe 19,252 K imapeventmgr.exe 19,812 K imapsysd.exe 39,720 K imapwatchdog.exe 14,216 K ResourceMonitor.exe 25,024 K imap_sysmonitor.exe 36,628 K python.exe 21,216 K httpd.exe 11,140 K java.exe

30616 RDP-Tcp#1

3

36812 RDP-Tcp#1

3

29472 RDP-Tcp#1

3

21572 RDP-Tcp#1

3

92,424 K httpd.exe 16,476 K

15980 RDP-Tcp#1

3

4392 RDP-Tcp#1

3

27224 RDP-Tcp#1

3

8368 RDP-Tcp#1

3

33732 RDP-Tcp#1

3

14920 RDP-Tcp#1

3


292


A FAQs

NOTE n



n


n


Step 7 Restart the database. 1.

Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools> SQL Server Configuration Manager > SQL Server Services.

2.

Right-click SQL Server (MSSQLS ERVER) and choose Restart(T) from the shortcut menu.

----End

A.5 U2000 System

This topic covers FAQs about the U2000 system.

A.5.1 How to Start the MSuite Client Question How do I start the NMS maintenance suite client?

Answer It must meet the following requirements for starting the NMS maintenance suite client: l

The MSuite server must be started.

l

Port 12212 on the MSuite server is enabled.

l

The MSuite client and the server communicate with each other properly. Ensure that the MSuite server has been started.

1.

Log in to the Windows OS as the administrator user, check whether the msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe processes are started in the Task Manager window. If you can find the two processes in the process list, the MSuite server is running.If the two processes do not exist in the process list, the MSuite server is not running. In this case, perform the following operations to start the MSuite server: Go to the D:\oss\engr\engineering path, and double-click the startserver.bat file. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


293


2.

A FAQs

On a computer where the MSuite client is installed, double-click the U2000 NMS Maintenance Suite shortcut icon on the desktop and then wait about one minute. The Login dialog box is displayed. NOTE l

If a dialog box showing The client and server versions are different. Upgrade the client using the CAU.is displayed, the method of upgrading the U2000 client by using the CAU is as follow: 1. Install the U2000 client software in network mode: Enter https://server_IP_address /cau/ (more secure, recommended) or http://server_IP_address /cau/ in the address box of the Enterto access the Web installation page. For details, see Internet Explorer, and press . U2000 Client Software Installation Guidein the U2000 Client Software Installation Guide

2. If you upgrade the U2000 client software using the CAU, the MSuite client is also upgraded.

3.

Set the login parameters. –

IP Address: To log in to the local MSuite server, use the default IP address 127.0.0.1.

n

To log in to the remote MSuite server, enter the IP address of the computer where the MSuite server is installed. If multiple IP addresses are configured for the computer, use the NMS application IP address.

n

NOTE

The Login dialog box of the MSuite client has the function to keep the login list. Selecting an IP address from the IP Addressdrop-down list is recommended. If the desired IP address is not displayed in the drop-down list, enter an IP address.

–

Port: The default port ID is 12212. There is no need to change the default value

–

during login but ensure that the port is not occupied. User Name: The default user name is admin.

–

4.

Password: The initial password of the admin user is Changeme_123. The password must be changed during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it regularly.

Click Login. NOTE l

When you log in to the MSuite client, a progress bar is displayed showing the progress of Refresh Deployment Information . Wait until the operation is complete.

l

The MSuite works in single-user mode. Specifically, only one MSuite client can log in to the MSuite at one time.

A.5.2 How to End Processes on the MSuite Server Question How do I end processes on the NMS maintenance suite server?

Answer Go to the D:\oss\engr\engineering path, double-click the stopserver.bat file, and end the MSuite server process.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


294


A FAQs

A.5.3 Changing the Password of the MSuite This topic describes how to change the password of the MSuite. To ensure the security of the U2000, change the password of the MSuite immediately and record the password after installing the U2000 server.

Prerequisites MSuite processes are running. If they are not running, start them by following the steps provided in A.5.4 Starting the Process of the MSuite Server .

Context In the high availability system, you only need to log in to the MSuite server on the primary site and change the password of the MSuite. The password of the MSuite on the secondary site is then automatically changed.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the MSuite client. Step 2 On the MSuite client, choose System > Change Password from the main menu. The Change Password dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click OK. The Change Password dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Enter the old password and new password. NOTE

The initial password is Changeme_123 . The rules for modifying a password are as follows: l


l

The password must contain four of the following combinations:

l

–


–


–

At least one digit

–

At least one special character ~!@#$%^&*()-_=+\|[{}];:"',<.>/?

The password cannot be the same as the user name written in either the forward or backward format.

If the password does not meet requirements, an error message will be displayed.

Step 5 Click OK. The password is changed. ----End

A.5.4 Starting the Process of the MSuite Server This topic describes how to start the process of the MSuite server.

Context Generally, the process of the MSuite server is not started with the OS startup. If the process is not started, perform the following operations to start it.In the high availability system, the MSuite server process must be started on both the primary and secondary sites. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


295


A FAQs

Procedure l

Log in to the Windows OS as the administrator user, check whether the msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe processes are started in the Task Manager window. If you can find the two processes in the process list, the MSuite server is running. If the two processes do not exist in the process list, the MSuite server is not running. In this case, perform the following operations to start the MSuite server: Go to the D:\oss\engr\engineering path, and double-click the startserver.bat file.

----End

A.5.5 How to Verify That the Processes of the U2000 Single-Server System Are Running on Windows Question How do I verify that the processes of the U2000 single-server system are running on Windows?

Answer Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with ossuser rights. Step 2 View the startup information about the U2000 server processes. 1.


2.


3.



Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

30616 RDP-Tcp#1

3

4392 RDP-Tcp#1

3

27224 RDP-Tcp#1

3

36812 RDP-Tcp#1

3

29472 RDP-Tcp#1

3

8368 RDP-Tcp#1

3

33732 RDP-Tcp#1

3

14920 RDP-Tcp#1

3

21572 RDP-Tcp#1

3

15980 RDP-Tcp#1

3


296


A FAQs

NOTE


–

11116 Services

0

11164 Services

0

10236 Services

0

8584 Services

0

26056 Services

0

13168 Services

0

If no command output is displayed, the U2000 process is not started. You can run the D:\oss\server\platform\bin\startnms.bat command in the CLI to start the U2000 process. NOTE n


n


----End

A.5.6 How to Start the Processes of the U2000 Single-Server System on Windows Question How do I start the processes of the U2000 single-server system (Windows)?

Answer Step 1 Log in to the OS as administrator. Step 2 If the database does not automatically start along with the OS, run the following command to manually start it. Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools> SQL Server Configuration Manager > SQL Server Services, right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) and choose Start to start the database. If the database has started, skip this step.

Step 3 Perform the following operations to ensure that the U2000 server processes have been started. 1.


2.


3.


If information similar to the following is displayed, the U2000 process has started. imapmrb.exe 19,252 K imapeventmgr.exe 19,812 K imapsysd.exe 39,720 K imapwatchdog.exe 14,216 K

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

30616 RDP-Tcp#1

3

4392 RDP-Tcp#1

3

27224 RDP-Tcp#1

3

36812 RDP-Tcp#1

3


297

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Single-Server System Software Installation and Commissioning Guide (Windows) ResourceMonitor.exe 25,024 K imap_sysmonitor.exe 36,628 K python.exe 21,216 K httpd.exe 11,140 K java.exe 92,424 K httpd.exe 16,476 K

A FAQs 29472 RDP-Tcp#1

3

8368 RDP-Tcp#1

3

33732 RDP-Tcp#1

3

14920 RDP-Tcp#1

3

21572 RDP-Tcp#1

3

15980 RDP-Tcp#1

3

NOTE


–

11116 Services

0

11164 Services

0

10236 Services

0

8584 Services

0

26056 Services

0

13168 Services

0

If no command output is displayed, the U2000 process is not started. You can run the D:\oss\server\platform\bin\startnms.bat command in the CLI to start the U2000 process. NOTE n n

D:\ossspecifies the installation path of the U2000. Starting the U2000 process takes about 3 minutes.

----End

A.5.7 How to End the Processes of the U2000 Single-Server System on Windows Question How do I end the processes of the U2000 single-server system on Windows?

NOTICE You can stop all the services of the NMS, including the system monitoring process. If you use the Stop All NMS Services function of the System Monitor, the system monitoring process is not ended. Do not use this method if perform operations for shutting down the NMS that are associated with the database.

Answer Step 1 Exit all the U2000 clients. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


298


A FAQs

Step 2 Log in to the OS as a user with ossuser rights. Step 3 Ensure that the U2000 is not running. 1.


2.


3.



–

If information similar to the following is displayed, the U2000 process is not stopped. In the CLI, run the D:\oss\server\platform\bin\stopnms.bat command to stop the U2000 process. imapmrb.exe 19,252 K imapeventmgr.exe 19,812 K imapsysd.exe 39,720 K imapwatchdog.exe 14,216 K ResourceMonitor.exe 25,024 K imap_sysmonitor.exe 36,628 K python.exe 21,216 K httpd.exe 11,140 K java.exe 92,424 K httpd.exe 16,476 K

30616 RDP-Tcp#1

3

4392 RDP-Tcp#1

3

27224 RDP-Tcp#1

3

36812 RDP-Tcp#1

3

29472 RDP-Tcp#1

3

8368 RDP-Tcp#1

3

33732 RDP-Tcp#1

3

14920 RDP-Tcp#1

3

21572 RDP-Tcp#1

3

15980 RDP-Tcp#1

3

NOTE n



n


n


----End

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


299


A FAQs

A.5.8 How to Determine Which Types of Software Are Preinstalled Question Servers come preinstalled with software from Huawei. The U2000 servers come preinstalled to different extents according to the scheme and software purchased. How do I determine which types of software are preinstalled?

Answer In the single-server system: The U2000 is installed based on the bill of material (BOM). l

If the U2000 license BOM is available, the U2000 needs to be installed according to the license BOM. Technical support engineers should change the IP address, install the license on the U2000, and then use the U2000.

l

If the U2000 license BOM is unavailable, only the OS needs to be installed.

A.5.9 Which Installation Packages Are Required for U2000 Installation Question Which installation packages are required for U2000 installation?

Answer Prepare installation packages according to the U2000 installation scheme.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


300


A FAQs

Table A-1 DVD list

Software

MediumName

OS DVDROM+OS patch package

Standard deliver: Windows 2008 OS Prepare the following items before installing the Windows 2008 OS is installed: 1. OS DVD-ROM: Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard (64-bit version) 2. OS patch DVD-ROM: U2000version_server_ospatch_w in64_x86_dvd1


NOTE It contains the Windows OS patch and SQL Server database patch.

3. ServerGuide DVD-ROM of IBM Server: ServerGuide_for_HW_Windows 2008 (selected when the IBM X3650 M4 server is used) 4. ServiceCD DVD-ROM of Huawei RH series rack server: The ServiceCD DVD-ROM is delivered with Huawei RH series rack server. You can also obtain the FusionServer ToolsServiceCD2.0-V109.iso file and burn it into the DVDROM(selected when the Huawei RH series rack server is used).

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

ISO image file of the quick RAID configurati on DVD

l

It must be available. It is used to For Huawei RH series rack configure RAID. server, the Win_server_raid_x64_for_Hua wei_dvd.iso file is must be ready.

l

For IBM server, the Win_server_raid_x64_for_IBM _dvd.iso file is must be ready.

Database software DVD

SQL Server standard edition (installing the database in the Windows Server 2008 OS): U2000version_server_dbstd_win64_ x86_dvd2



301


A FAQs

Software

MediumName

Description

U2000 server software DVD

U2000version_server_nms_win32_x 86_dvd3

SetWin

U2000version_VPPSetwinV300R00

Optional It is used to enhance the

software AntiVirus Software

3C22SPC200.zip U2000version_Trend_OfficeScan10. 5_win.zip

security of Windows system. Optional In order to prevent virus attacks.

ESN tool software

U2000version_ESN_win32_x86.zip

The ESN tool is required only when you apply for the U2000 License before installing the U2000.


NOTE U2000 server software include SetWin software package, it is used to enhance the security of Windows system.

NOTE The tool is a software package. It will not be delivered as a DVD-ROM. After the U2000 is installed, the ESN tool is available in the U2000 installation path. Therefore, to apply for the U2000 license after the U2000 is installed, use the ESN tool in this path directly.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


302


A FAQs

Table A-2 Software package list

Softwar e Type

Softwar e

MediumName

Thirdparty software package

OS DVDROM +OS patch package

Standard deliver: Windows 2008 OS Prepare the following items before installing the Windows 2008 OS is installed: 1. OS DVD-ROM: Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard (64-bit version) 2. OS patch software: U2000version_server_Wind ows2008_ospatch_en_win64 _x86.zip


3. ServerGuide DVD-ROM of IBM Server: Download the ServerGuide_for_HW_Wi ndows2008.iso file and burn it to the DVD (selected when the IBM X3650 M4 server is used). 4. ISO files in the ServiceCD DVD-ROM of Huawei RH series rack server:FusionServer ToolsServiceCD2.0-V109.iso (selected when the Huawei RH series rack server is used).

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

ISO image file of the quick RAID configura tion DVD

l

For Huawei RH series rack server, the Win_server_raid_x64_for_ Huawei_dvd.iso file is must be ready.

l

For IBM server, the Win_server_raid_x64_for_ IBM_dvd.iso file is must be ready.

SetWin software

U2000version_VPPSetwinV300 R003C22SPC200.zip

Optional It is used to enhance the security of Windows system.

AntiVirus Software

U2000version_Trend_OfficeSca n10.5_win.zip

Optional In order to prevent virus attacks.


It must be available. It is used to configure RAID.

303


Softwar e Type

A FAQs

Softwar e

MediumName

Description

Database software

SQL Server standard edition (installing the database in the Windows Server 2008 OS): U2000version_server_sqlserver 2008_dbstd_en_win64_x86.zip


U2000

U2000

Basic components:

It must be available. It is used

software package

server software

U2000version_server_nmsbase _win32_x86.7z

to install the U2000.

Core components: U2000version_server_nmscore_ win32_x86.7z


Transport domain component: U2000version_server_nmstrans _win32_x86.7z

It is required only if the U2000 needs to manage Huawei transport equipment. Huawei transport equipment includes: l

MSTP equipment

l

WDM equipment

l

NA WDM equipment

l

Submarine equipment

l l

RTN equipment PTN equipment NOTE Software packages for the transport and IP components must be available so as to manage PTN 6900 series NEs.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


304


Softwar e Type

Softwar e

MediumName IP domain components: U2000version_server_nmsip_w in32_x86.7z

A FAQs

Description It is required only if the U2000 needs to manage Huawei IP equipment. Huawei IP equipment includes: l

ATN Series Equipment

l

Routers

l

Switches Metro service equipment

l

Access domain components: U2000version_server_nmsacces s_win32_x86.7z

ESN tool software

U2000version_ESN_win32_x8 6.zip

l

Broadband access equipment

l

VoIP gateways

l

Firewalls

l

Service inspection gateway

l

SVN equipment

l

Internet Cache System

It is required only if the U2000 needs to manage Huawei access equipment. Huawei access equipment includes: l

FTTx equipment

l

MSAN equipment

l

DSLAM equipment

l

BITS equipment

The ESN tool is required only when you apply for the U2000 License before installing the U2000. NOTE The tool is a software package. It will not be delivered as a DVDROM. After the U2000 is installed, the ESN tool is available in the U2000 installation path. Therefore, to apply for the U2000 license after the U2000 is installed, use the ESN tool in this path directly.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


305


A FAQs

A.5.10 How to Handle the Problem Wherein the System Displays a Message Indicating That the Client Installation Packages and Basic Packages Cannot Exist at the Same Time During Decompression Question In a scenario where the U2000 server software is installed by using software packages, software packages are decompressed, the system displays a message indicating that the client installation packages and basic packages cannot exist at the same time. How do I handle this problem?

Answer This problem arises because both the server software packages and client software packages are copied and then decompressed at the same time. To resolve this problem, delete client software packages and then decompress them again.

A.5.11 How to Check Downloaded Software Packages Using HashMyFiles Software Question How do I check downloaded software packages using HashMyFiles software?

Answer Step 1 Obtain the MD5 code or SHA information that is used to check the downloaded software package integrity. l

Download the iManager U2000 version MD5 CODE(English) file from http:// support.huawei.com/carrier. The iManager U2000 version MD5 CODE(English) file contains MD5 code information after all software and document packages are decompressed. Please contact a Huawei engineer to download the file. –

For carrier, log in to http://support.huawei.com/carrier. Search for U2000 and select iManager U2000 in the search box on the Software tab. Then select a desired version. Download the file in the Version Documentation column.

–

For enterprise, log in to http://support.huawei.com/enterprise. Search for U2000 and select iManager U2000 in the search box on the Support tab. Then click Documentation tab. Select a desired version and download the file. NOTE

Take the following method to obtain the iManager U2000versionMD5 CODE(English)file. Only Huawei engineers can download the file. If the customer requires using the file, please contact Huawei engineers for help. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

The files in the ServiceCD of the Huawei RH series rack server are archived in Support website. Perform the following operations to obtain the ISO files: a.

Log in to http://enterprise.huawei.com.

b.

Choose SUPPORT > Servers. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

306


l

A FAQs

c.

Choose Solution and Software > FusionServer Tools > Downloads > V100R002C00 > V100R002C00SPC300.

d.

Download the FusionServer Tools-ServiceCD2.0-V109.zip software packages.

e.

Use the PGPverify to verify correctness of the software packages. For details, see A.5.12 How Do I Verify Downloaded Software Packages Using the PGPVerify Software?.

For other third-party software, obtain the MD5 code or SHA information from the corresponding official websites.

to http://www.nirsoft.net/utils/hash_my_files.html download theHelp or go to Step 2 Navigate HashMyFiles. For more information about software operation, and see the software the official website of the software http://www.nirsoft.net/utils/hash_my_files.html for technical support.

Step 3 Run the HashMyFiles. Step 4 Choose Files > Add Folder from the main menu to access the Select Folder dialog box. NOTE

You can also drag each local downloaded software package to the running window of the HashMyFiles.

Step 5 Select the folder in which the compression packages are stored and click OK. Step 6 After uploading is complete, the MD5 code information of the local downloaded packages is automatically generated. Choose View > HTML Report All Items to export the MD5 code information and compare it with that in the MD5 code file obtained from Step 1.

Option

Description

If the exported MD5 code information is the same as that in the MD5 code file obtained from Step 1,

packages are correctly downloaded.

If the exported MD5 code information is the different from that in the MD5 code file obtained from Step 1,

download software packets again.

----End

A.5.12 How Do I Verify Downloaded Software Packages Using the PGPVerify Software? Question How do I verify downloaded software packages using the PGPVerify software?

Answer l

Software packages and signature files correspond to each other and are stored in the same directory. A software package corresponds to a signature file. Signature files are released with products and their software packages.

l

The extension of signature files is .asc. Generally, the names of signature files are the same as the names of software packages. That is, when the software package name is V200R015C60.zip, the corresponding signature file name is V200R015C60.zip.asc.

l

Obtain the PGPVerify tool that is used to verify the completeness of downloaded software packages and its public key file KEYS.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


307


a.

Download and decompress the PGPVerify tool. n

n

b.

For carrier: visit http://support.huawei.com/carrier/digitalSignatureAction to download the OpenPGP Signature Verification Guide package and decompress it. Continue to decompress the VerificationTools.zip package in the current folder. For enterprise: visit http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/ toolNewInfoAction!showDetail? pid=8221819&show=showServiceDetail&versionid=TV1000000016 to download and decompress the VerificationTools.zippackage.

Go to the VerificationToolsfolder that is generated after decompression and obtain different versions of PGPVerify software for different OSs. n

Windows: PGPVerify.exe (in theWindows directory)

n

Solaris: PGPVerify-sparc.tar.bz2 (in thesolaris\PGPVerify TOOL directory)

n

l

A FAQs

Linux: PGPVerify-x86_64.tar.gz (in thelinux\X86\bit64\PGPVerify TOOL directory)

c.

On Solaris/Linux OSs, use SFTP as the root user to upload the obtained PGPverify software and public key file KEYS to the server. For details about the SFTP transfer method, see How to Use the FileZilla to Transfer Files by SFTP.

d.

Windows OS supports GUI-based verification and CLI-based verification. Solaris and Linux OSs support CLI-based verification only.

e.

KEYS is the public key file.

PGPVerify is a digital signature verification tool released by Huawei. Users can select third-party openPGP verification tools based on actual needs.

Tool

OS

TooDl escription

PGPVerify

Windows/Solaris/Linux

ItisasimplePGP verification tool released by Huawei.

GNU Privacy Guard for Windows (Gpg4Win)

Windows

Itisanofficialversionof GnuPG for Windows. Official website: http:// www.gpg4win.org/ Recommended version: 2.2.1

The GNU Privacy Guard (GnuPG)

Linux

Itisafreeandsource-open GNU tool that implements the OpenPGP standard defined by the RFC4880 protocol. This tool is preinstalled on most Linux OSs. Official website: http:// www.gnupg.org Recommended version: 2.0.9

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


308


A FAQs

GUI-based verification on Windows OS: Files to be prepared before verification: –

PGPVerify software:PGPVerify.exe

–

Public key file corresponding to the PGPVerify software: KEYS

–

U2000 software package

–

Signature file corresponding to the U2000 software package

a.

Double-click PGPVerify.exe to start the PGPVerify tool.

b. c.

Click Select Public Key, select the obtained public key file KEYS, and load it. Click Multiple Verify and select the D:\oss\ directory to verify all files in it. NOTE

n n

n

l

D:\oss\indicates the directory that stores the signature file. Change it based on site requirements. The signature file and software package must be stored in the same directory.

l

To verify a single file, click Single Verify and select the file to be verified.

The green item indicates passed verification, that is, [PASS]. The yellow item indicates unsupported verification, that is, [WARN]. For example, the signature file or software version does not exist. The red item indicates failed verification, that is, [FAIL].

If no "WARN" or "FAIL" character is displayed, the signature file is valid. All items are displayed in green.

NOTICE If a version has multiple signature files to be verified, the version is secure only when the verification results of all files are "PASS". If the verification results contain "WARN" or "FAIL", the verification is not passed and security risks exist. In that event, re-download the software package. l

CLI-based verification on Windows OS: a.

Open the CLI and run the following command to verify the signature file: > "C:\PGPVerify.exe" -k "C:\KEYS" -d "D:\oss" NOTE l

Assume that the signature file and software package are stored in theD:\oss\directory, and the PGPVerify tool and public key file are stored in the C:\ directory.

l

To verify a single file, run the C:\PGPVerify.exe" -k "C:\KEYS" -f "D:\oss command. \V200R015C60.zip.asc

Information similar to the following is displayed: [INFO]:Filter file in directory, please wait... [WARN]:Can't find signature file, signed file position: D:\oss \V200R015C60.zip. [WARN]:Can't find signed file, signature file position: D:\oss \V200R015C51.zip.asc. [FAIL]:Invalid Signature. File path: D:\oss\V200R015C52.zip. [PASS]:Good Signature. File path: D:\oss\V200R015C53.zip, Public key fingerprint: B1000AC3 8C41525A 19BDC08799AD81DF 27A74824 INFO]: Verify Complete.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


309


A FAQs

NOTE

In the preceding characters in bold, the RSA key ID is consistent with the public key ID. For a certain file, if no "WARN" or "FAIL" character is contained in other information, the signature file is valid.

NOTICE If a version has multiple signature files to be verified, the version is secure only when the"WARN" verification results ofthe all verification files are "PASS". the verification results contain or "FAIL", is not Ifpassed and security risks exist. In that event, re-download the software package. l

CLI-based verification on Solaris and Linux OSs: Files to be prepared before verification: –

PGPVerify software: n

Solaris: PGPVerify-sparc.tar.bz2

n

Linux: PGPVerify-x86_64.tar.gz

–

Public key file corresponding to the PGPVerify software: KEYS

–

U2000 software package

–

Signature file corresponding to the U2000 software package

a.

Log in to the OS as the root user.

b.

Run the following command to decompress the PGPVerify software. NOTE

Assume that the PGPVerify tool and public key file are stored in the /opt directory and the signature file and software package are stored in the /opt/install .

Solaris: # cd /opt # bzip2 -d PGPVer ify-sparc.tar.bz 2 # tar xvf PGPVerify-sparc.tar

Linux: # cd /opt # tar xvfz PGPVerify-x86_64.tar.gz

c.

Run the following commands to verify the signature file: # ./PGPVerify -k KEYS -d install NOTE

To verify a single file, run the following commands: # cd /opt install/plugins-cloudtask-C01.zip.asc # ./PGPVerify -k KEYS -f

Information similar to the following is displayed: [INFO]:Filter file in directory, please wait... [PASS]:Good Signature. File path: install/plugins-cloudtask-C01.zip.asc, Public key fingerprint: B1000AC3 8C41525A 19BDC087 99AD81DF 27A74824. [PASS]:Good Signature. File path: install/twain.dll.asc, Public key fingerprint: B1000AC3 8C41525A 19BDC087 99AD81DF 27A74824. [PASS]:Good Signature. File path: install/buildcloud-proxy.zip.asc, Public key fingerprint: B1000AC3 8C41525A 19BDC087 99AD81DF 27A74824. [PASS]:Good Signature. File path: install/buildcloud_pvmtrans.zip.asc, Public key fingerprint: B1000AC3 8C41525A 19BDC087 99AD81DF 27A74824. [PASS]:Good Signature. File path: install/plugins-cicloud-C01.zip.asc,

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


310


A FAQs

Public key fingerprint: B1000AC3 8C41525A 19BDC087 99AD81DF 27A74824. [PASS]:Good Signature. File path: install/ConfigCenter.war.asc, Public key fingerprint: B1000AC3 8C41525A 19BDC087 99AD81DF 27A74824. [PASS]:Good Signature. File path: install/watcher-wrapper.zip.asc, Public key fingerprint: B1000AC3 8C41525A 19BDC087 99AD81DF 27A74824. [PASS]:Good Signature. File path: install/watcher.zip.asc, Public key fingerprint: B1000AC3 8C41525A 19BDC087 99AD81DF 27A74824. [PASS]:Good Signature. File path: install/rpm.war.asc, Public key fingerprint: B1000AC3 8C41525A 19BDC087 99AD81DF 27A74824. [PASS]:Good Signature. File path: install/buildcloud-rpm.zip.asc, Public key fingerprint: B1000AC3 8C41525A 19BDC08799AD81DF 27A74824 . [INFO]: Verify Complete. NOTE

In the preceding characters in bold, the RSA key ID is consistent with the public key ID. For a certain file, if no "WARN" or "FAIL" character is contained in other information, the signature file is valid.

NOTICE If a version has multiple signature files to be verified, the version is secure only when the verification results of all files are "PASS". If the verification results contain "WARN" or "FAIL", the verification is not passed and security risks exist. In that event, re-download the software package. ----End

A.5.13 How to Set the Communication Mode on the U2000 server for the Single-Server System (Windows) Question The U2000 server and client can communicate with each other in common or Security Socket Layer (SSL) mode. How to set the common or SSL mode?

Answer Step 1 Log in to the OS on the U2000 server as an administrator and do as follows to query the communication mode in use: Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter cmd to open the command line interface (CLI). Enter ssl_adm -cmd query to query the communication mode that the U2000 server is using.

Step 2 Stop U2000 processes.

In the U2000 software installation path, for example, D:\oss\server\platform\bin, run the stopnms.bat file to stop U2000 processes.

Step 3 Set the communication mode for the U2000 server and client. Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter cmd to open the CLI. Enter ssl_adm -cmd setmode mode parameter and set the communication mode for the U2000 server and client.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


311


A FAQs

NOTE

The available options for mode parameter are common, ssl, and both. l

common: common mode. If mode parameter is set to common, the U2000 server and client can communicate only in common mode, and http protocol must be used to download the U2000 client in CAU mode.

l

ssl: security mode. If mode parameter is set to ssl, the U2000 server and client can communicate only in security mode, and https protocol must be used to download the U2000 client in CAU mode. The security mode is recommended to ensure security for communication between the U2000 server and client.

l

both: indicates that the U2000 server and client can communicate with each other in either common or SSL mode.

If the following information is displayed, the communication mode of the server has been set successfully. Operation succeeded. Please restart all services for the settings to take effect.

Step 4 If you need to install the client in CAU mode after the server communication mode is set, you must perform the following operations as the administrator user: In the U2000 software installation path, for example, D:\oss\cau\bin, run the cau.bat file to update the CAU. If the following information is displayed, the operation has been set successfully. CAU is now updating resource, please wait... Script is executed successfully.

Step 5 Start U2000 processes. In the U2000 software installation path, for example, D:\oss\server\platform\bin, run the startnms.bat file to start U2000 processes. ----End

A.5.14 Failure to Log In to the Database Symptom On Windows 2008, when the U2000 database is being initialized, the message login database failure is displayed.

Possible Causes The possible causes are as follows: l

The alias of the database server is set incorrectly or is not set.

l

The ODBC data source is configured incorrectly or is not configured.

l

The database is not started.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether the database has been started. If not, start it manually. 1.

Double-click the database icon on the taskbar. The SQL Server Service Manager window is displayed.

2.

Check whether the database server has been started. If Start/Continue is grayed out, the database has already been started. Otherwise, click Start/Continue to start the database server.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


312


A FAQs

Step 2 Check and restore the configurations of the ODBC data source. 1.

Choose Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Data Sources (ODBC).

2.

On the System DSN tab page, view the configuration of DBSVR. –

If DBSVR already exists, select DBSVR and then click Configure, then perform the Step 2.5.

–

If DBSVR does not exist, click Add, then perform the Step 2.3 and Step 2.4 to add DBSVR. NOTE

Adding DBSVRis considered as an example.

3.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

On the System DSN tab page, click Add. In the Create New Data Source dialog box, select SQL Server.


313


A FAQs

4.

Click Finish. In the Create a New Data Source to SQL Server dialog box, enter the following information:

5.

Click Next. In the Create a New Data Source to SQL Server dialog box, set parameters as follows: –

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Select the With Windows NT authentication using the network login ID. and Connect to SQL Server to obtain default setting for the additional configuration options. check boxes. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

314


A FAQs

In the Login ID text box, enter the database user name sa and the Password of the sa. If a password has been set, enter the password.

6.

Click Next. In the dialog box that is displayed, select Change the default database to: and then select master from the drop-down list.

7.

Click Next. In the dialog box that is displayed, keep the default settings.

8.

Click Finish. Then, the ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup dialog box is displayed.

9.

Click Test Data Source.... If the echo information contains TEST COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY!, the U2000 applications have been connected to the database server.

10. Initialize the database again. ----End

A.5.15 How to Burn the ISO File to DVD Question How do I burn the ISO file to DVD?

Prerequisites l

The desired ISO file is obtained.

l

The DVD recorder has been installed on a Windows PC.

l

The burning software has been obtained and installed. NOTE

The commonly used burning software is Nero, which is a paid software. Purchase Nero from its official website and then use it. Nero 8 is used as an example in this topic. For more information about the software, see the software Help or log in to the official website http:// www.nero.com/enu/support/ of the software for technical support.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


315


A FAQs

An empty DVD is available.

Answer Step 1 See A.5.12 How Do I Verify Downloaded Software Packages Using the PGPVerify Software? to verify correctness of the obtained ISO file.

Step 2 Execute the Nero software. Step 3 Click the Image, Project, Copy button. The Copy Entire CD, Copy Entire DVD, and Disc Image or Saved Project dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click Disc Image or Saved Project. The Open dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Select the ISO file to be burnt to DVD and click Open. The Final Burn Settings dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Insert the empty DVD to the DVD-ROM. Step 7 Choose the desired recorder from the Current Recorder drop-down list and select the Verify data on disc after burning check box.

NOTICE This step aims at ensuring that the contents burnt to DVD are the same as those in the ISO file.

Step 8 Click Burn to start burning the ISO file to DVD. The Burning Process dialog box is displayed, showing the burning progress. After the ISO file is burnt to DVD, the Nero Express dialog box is displayed, and a message about the printing result is displayed.

Step 9 Click OK. Step 10 Click Next. Step 11 Click

to close the program.

----End

A.5.16 How to Check the U2000 Version Question How to check the U2000 version?

Answer l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

In Windows, check the U2000 version. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

316


a.

Log in to the OS as a user with ossuser rights.

b.

Choose Start > Run.

A FAQs

The Run window will be displayed. c.


d.

In the CLI, run the following command: type D:\oss\engr\install\etc\conf\MacroFileNW.properties

Information similar to the following is displayed: ... @{U2000Product_Server_VersionName}=V200R015C60SPCxxx ...

The preceding displayed information shows the the U2000 version. NOTE

Only the U2000 SPC version number can be viewed on this way. If the version has been installed with a CP patch, perform View the CP version of the U2000 to view more version information about the U2000 software. l

If the version has been installed with a CP patch, you can use the following method to view the CP version of the U2000. The version information is stored on the U2000 server as a configuration file named the version number. Access the following directory to view all version information: In Windows: %IMAP_ROOT%\patch, such as D:\oss\server\patch. NOTE

The CP version number can be obtained only by accessing the directory. One version can have either 0 patch or multiple CP patches.

For example, if the directory contains the V100R009C00CP3011.cfg, V100R009C00CP3013.cfg, and V100R009C00SPC301.cfg files, the version has been installed with two CP patches and one SPC patch. ----End

A.5.17 How to Configure the FTP or SFTP Service on Windows OS This topic describes how do I configure the FTP or SFTP service on Windows OS.

Prerequisites l

To use the service of a third-party tool for file transfer, make sure that the third-party tool configured as the FTP or SFTP service is started, and stop the FTP/SFTP service of the U2000 server. NOTE

The way of stop the FTP/SFTP service of the U2000 server is Stop the XftpDmprocess in the task manager, configure the third-party FTP service, and then restart the ftpdaemonprocess. l

The file transfer parameters set on the U2000 must be the same as the parameters set on the FTP or SFTP service.

l

If FTP is used, peform operations as required. SFTP is recommended because it provides better security.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


317


A FAQs

–

If the U2000 is not installed on the server, log in to http://mina.apache.org/ ftpserver-project/downloads.html to download the latest apache-ftpserver compression package and refer to the documents on the website to configure the FTP service. For more information about software operation, see the software Help or go to the official website of the software http://mina.apache.org/ftpserverproject/documentation.html for technical support. In addition to the apacheftpserver, the wftpd32.exe is another third-party tool used to configured the FTP service. The wftpd32.exe cannot be used to configure the FTP service. Otherwise, an abnormality occurs during remote database backup.

–

If the U2000 has been installed on the server, apache-ftpserver will be automatically installed along with U2000 installation. Therefore, you do not need to manually configure the FTP service after the U2000 is installed.

Context l

The SFTP service is recommend because it provides better security.

l

See operations in this topic on the windows server before U2000 data is backed up or restored.

l

User created for minasshd SFTP services is ftpuser by default and the default password is Changeme_123. To ensure the security of the NMS, change the password for the ftpuser user periodically. NOTE

The password must meet the following rules:

l

l

The password consists of 8 to 32 characters.

l

The password must be a combination of three types of characters: digit, letter, and special character.

Configuring the SFTP service key method is as follows, assuming the SFTP root directory is D: . a.

Log in to the NMS server as a NMS administrator account.

b.

Copy the key file authorized_keys to the SFTP root directory.

c.

Copy and paste the public key information to the .ssh file in the SFTP root directory. If the .ssh file does not exist, run the following commands to create the file and copy key information: > cd d: > mkdir .ssh > copy authorized_keys .ssh

Procedure l

Optional: Configure the SFTP service. The SFTP service needs to be configured only when SFTP is used on a server where the U2000 is not installed.

The minasshd is automatically alongftpuser with U2000 installation.created The SFTP servicessoftware is automatically installed,installed and the user is automatically for the services. l

l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Starting the SFTP service

a.

Log in to the System Monitor client as a system administrator account.

b.

Click the Service Monitor tab, right-click minasshd and choose Start the Service from the shortcut menu to start the minasshd SFTP service.

Stopping the SFTP service Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

318


A FAQs

a.

Log in to the System Monitor client as a system administrator account.

b.

Click the Service Monitor tab, right-click minasshd and choose Stop the Service from the shortcut menu to stop the minasshd SFTP service.

----End

A.5.18 How to Resolve the U2000 SyslogCollectorDM Service Startup Failure Due to a Port Conflict Question The UDP port 514 is used by /the syslog service in the SUSE Linux OS to receive remote logs. After you install the U2000 on the operating system, the SyslogCollectorDM service of the U2000 also uses port 514 to receive remote logs. If /the syslog service is enabled in the SUSE Linux OS before an upgrade, a port conflict occurs after the upgrade. As a result, the SyslogCollectorDM service is disabled and the attempt to start the SyslogCollectorDM service fails.

Answer To ensure that the NE logs are properly displayed on the U2000 client, disable the remote log receiving function for /the syslog service in the SUSE Linux OS, and allow the U2000 SyslogCollectorDM service instead of the OS receives the remote logs. Perform the following operations on the nodes where the SyslogCollectorDM service has been deployed to ensure that UDP port 514 is not used by the OS. 1.

Use theserver PuTTY logossuser in to the. U2000 server as user ossuser in SSH mode.Log in to the U2000 asto user

2.

Run the following command to set environment variables.

$ . /opt/oss/server/svc_profile.sh 3.

Run the following command to enable the U2000 SyslogCollectorDM service:

$ svc_adm -cmd enable -svcname SyslogCollectorDM

4.

–

If the SyslogCollectorDM service is started, the problem is not caused by the port conflict. The procedure ends.

–

If the SyslogCollectorDM service is not started, perform .4.

Run the following command to switch to user root.

$ su - root Password: Password of root

5.


# . /opt/oss/server/svc_profile.sh 6.

Run the following command to view the usage of port UDP 514: In the SUSE Linux OS:

# lsof -i:514 If the following information is displayed, port UDP 514 has been occupied by the syslog service of the OS: COMMAND PID USER syslog-ng 8786 root

7. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

FD 5u

TYPE DEVICE SIZE NODE NAME IPv4 8511952 UDP *:syslog

Disable the remote log receiving function for /the syslog service in the SUSE Linux OS. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

319


A FAQs

In the SUSE Linux OS: a.

Run the following command to stop the syslog service on the OS:

# service syslog stop b.

Run vi to modify the /etc/syslog-ng/syslog-ng.conf file. Comment on the udp port<514>> line. Run :wq! to save the file and exit. unix-dgram("/dev/log"); # # uncomment to process log messages from network: # # udp port<514>>;

c.

Run the following command to restart the syslog service:

# service syslog start 8.

Run the following command to switch to user ossuser.

# su - ossuser 9.


$ . /opt/oss/server/svc_profile.sh 10. Take this step if you use the SUS E Linux OS. Run the following command to check whether the U2000 SyslogCollectorDM service is running.

$ svc_adm -cmd status If the service is not running, run the following command to start the SyslogCollectorDM service:

$ svc_adm -cmd startsvc SyslogCollectorDM 11. Take this step if you use the SUS E Linux OS. Run the following command to switch to user root.

$ su - root Password: Password of root

12. Take this step if you use the SUSE Linux OS. Run the following command to set environment variables.

# . /opt/oss/server/svc_profile.sh 13. Take this step if you use the SUSE Linux OS. Run the following command to view the usage of port UDP 514 again:

# lsof -i:514 If the following information is displayed, the U2000 SyslogCollectorDM service has occupied this port. COMMAND

PID USER

SyslogCol 11101 root

FD

TYPE

31u

IPv4 8519207

DEVICE SIZE NODE NAME UDP *:syslog

A.5.19 How Do I Obtain Third-Party Software and Hardware Materials? Question How do I obtain third-party software and hardware materials? Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


320


A FAQs

Answer The U2000 running depends on third-party software and hardware. To help you better maintain third-party software and hardware, handle related faults, and acquire knowledge, you can obtain corresponding materials from third-party websites. Table A-3 lists the URLs of commonly seen third-party software and hardware. NOTE

Websites of third-party materials may vary with different reasons. The correct URLsare subject to the official release.

Table A-3 Websites for obtaining software and hardware materials

Type

Category

Model

WebsiteURL

Operating system

Operating system

Solaris 10

http://www.oracle.com/ technetwork/ documentation/ solaris-10-192992.html

SUSE Linux 10

https://www.suse.com/ documentation/sles10/

SUSE Linux 11

https://www.suse.com/ documentation/sles11/

Windows 7

http:// windows.microsoft.com/en -us/windows/windowshelp#windows=windows-7

Database

Sybase15

http://help.sap.com/ase155/

SQL Server 2008

http:// msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/ library/bb545450.aspx

Two-node cluster software

Veritas

http://www.symantec.com/ business/support/index? page=products

Antivirus

OfficeScan 10.5

http:// docs.trendmicro.com/enus/enterprise/ officescan.aspx

Virtual machine

VMware

http://pubs.vmware.com/ vsphere-55/index.jsp? lang=en

software Third-party hardware

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

PCserver

X3650M4


http://www-947.ibm.com/ support/entry/portal/ product/system_x/ system_x3650_m4? productContext=11285983 53

321


Type

Category

A FAQs

Model

WebsiteURL

X3850 X5

http://www-947.ibm.com/ support/entry/portal/ documentation_expanded_ list/hardware/systems/ system_x/system_x3850_x5

RH2288H V2

http://support.huawei.com/ enterprise/ productsupport? lang=en&pid=9581539&id AbsPath=7919749| 9856522|9856792|9581539

Midrange computer/ Workstation

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

RH2288H V3

http://support.huawei.com/ enterprise/ productsupport? lang=zh&pid=9901881&id AbsPath=7919749| 9856522|9856792|9901881

RH5885H V3

http://support.huawei.com/ enterprise/ productsupport? lang=en&pid=9768163&id AbsPath=7919749| 9856522|9856792|9768163

M4000

http://www.oracle.com/ technetwork/ documentation/sparcmseriesservers-252709.html

M5000

http://www.oracle.com/ technetwork/ documentation/sparcmseriesservers-252709.html

Netra T4-1

http://docs.oracle.com/cd/ E23203_01/index.html

Netra T4-2


T4-1


T4-2



322


Type

Smallsoftware

A FAQs

Category

Model

WebsiteURL

Blade server

E9000

http://support.huawei.com/ enterprise/ productsupport? lang=en&pid=19961380&i dAbsPath=7919749| 9856522|9856786| 19955022|19961380

Tapedrive

SUNLTO4

http://www.oracle.com/ technetwork/ documentation/tapestorage-curr-187744.html

FTPtool

Filezilla

https://wiki.filezillaproject.org/Documentation

SSH/Telnet tool

PuTTY

http:// www.chiark.greenend.org. uk/~sgtatham/putty/ download.html

PGPverify tool

PGPverify

For carrier: http:// support.huawei.com/ carrier/digitalSignatureAction For enterprise: http:// support.huawei.com/ enterprise/ toolNewInfoAction! showDetail? pid=8221819&show=show ServiceDetail&versionid= TV1000000016

Desktop virtualization tool

Citrix

http://support.citrix.com/ proddocs/topic/ infocenter/ic-how-touse.html

FTP server

Apache FTP Server

http://mina.apache.org/ ftpserver-project/ documentation.html

SFTP server

minasshd

http://mina.apache.org/ sshd-project/ documentation.html

Decompression tool IEplug-in

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

7-Zip JRE


http://www.7-zip.org/ support.html http://www.java.com/en/ download/help/

323


Type

A FAQs

Category

Model

WebsiteURL

Disk burning software

Nero

http://www.nero.com/enu/ support/

A.5.20 How to Query In formation About the Software and Hardware Installation and ESNs of a Huawei Rack Server Question How do users query the software and hardware installation and equipment serial numbers (ESNs) after they obtain the contract number?

Answer Step 1 Log in to http://texpert.huawei.com/TExpert/Pages/PageContainer.htm. NOTE l

The following assumes that an engineer queries and installs a server on which the SUSE Linux OS is installed.

l

Only Huawei engineers have permission to log in to the system. Customers can contact Huawei engineers to obtain information as needed.

Step 2 In the HUMEP iTestCommanderpage that is displayed, set Domain to FT and FT Data Browse to By SN.

Step 3 Enter the obtained bar code number next to the Serial Number text box and click Search. NOTE

You can obtain the bar code number from the server shelf.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


324


A FAQs

Step 4 On the tab that is displayed, select the row whose SubSequence is 5 and has the latest TransactionTime. Click SerialNumber.

Step 5 The query result page is displayed. View information about the software and hardware installation and ESNs on the Result Two tab.

Step 6 Close the page. ----End

A.5.21 How Do I Change an H2 Database User's Password? Question How do I change an H2 database user's password?

Answer Step 1 Log in to the operating system as the administrator user. Step 2 Navigate to \server\tools\h2UserManager of the U2000 installation path and double-click the H2ManagerTool.bat file to manage the H2 database.

Step 3 In the H2 Manager dialog box, set relevant parameters, as shown in Table A-4. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


325


A FAQs

Figure A-1 H2 Manager dialog box

Table A-4 Parameters in the H2 Manager dialog box

Parameter

Description

DB user

Name of an H2 database user, which is defaulted to

DB password

Password of an H2 database user, which is defaulted to Changeme_123

File password

Password of an H2 database file, which is defaulted to Changeme_123

Change current user password

new password

ossuser

New password of an H2 database user l

Ensure that the H2 database has been started. If the database has not been started, navigate to \server \platform\sacscript\standalone\start_isdb of the U2000 installation path and double-click the stop_isdb.bat file to start the database.

l

The password of an H2 database user must contain: – At least one lowercase letter – At least one uppercase letter – At least one digit – At least one special character: :~@#^*-_+[{}]:./?

Other special characters, such as ()|<>&`!$\"%'=;, and spaces, are not supported.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


326


Parameter

A FAQs

Description confirm new password

Confirm password of an H2 database user

Step 4 Click Change user password. If the Info dialog box showing the following message is displayed, the password has been successfully changed.

----End

A.5.22 How Do I Change an H2 Database User's Password for the U2000 Guard? Question How do I change an H2 database user's password for the U2000 Guard? NOTE

Stop the Sysguard process on the U2000 before changing the password of the U2000 Guard's H2 database.

Answer l

Perform the following operations to change the password of an H2 database user on the Solaris/SUSE Linux-based U2000: NOTE

In a HA system, the H2 database user's password must be changed in both primary and secondary sites to ensure consistency.

a.

Log in to the OS as the ossuser user over SSH using the PuTTY.

b.

Run the following command to start the tool used to manage passwords of H2 database users: $ cd /opt/oss/server/base_service/sysguard/H2Manager $ ./H2Manager.sh

Information similar to the following is displayed: please input dbuser's password:

c.

Enter the password of the database user dbuser and press Enter. The default password is Changeme_123. The password must be changed during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it regularly. Information similar to the following is displayed: if you want to change the password,please input the old password:

--------------------------------password requirements----------------------------------------1: Length between 8 to 30. ---2: At least one lowercase letter. ---3: At least one uppercase letter. --

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


327


A FAQs

--4: At least one digit. ---5: At least one special character: ~@#^-_+[{}]:./? ---6: Other special characters, such as ()|<>&\`!$"%'=;, and space, are not supported. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Information similar to the following is displayed: please input the new password:

d.

Enter a planned database user password and press Enter. Information similar to the following is displayed: please input the new password again:

e.

Enter the planned database user password again and press Enter. If the last line of the command output is as follows, the password has been successfully changed: Changing the dbuser's password succeeded.

l

Perform the following operations to change the password of a H2 database user on the Windows-based U2000: a.

Log in to the Windows OS as a user with the administrator rights.

b.

Assess the D:\oss\server\base_service\sysguard\H2Manager directory where the tool used to manage H2 database user passwords resides. NOTE

The tool resides in the U2000 installation directory, which may be different from the preceding directory. You can modify the U2000 installation directory based on actual situations.

c.

Double-click H2Manager.bat to start the tool. Information similar to the following is displayed: please input dbuser's password:

d.

Enter the password of the database user dbuser and press Enter. The default password is Changeme_123. Information similar to the following is displayed: if you want to change the password,please input the old password:

--------------------------------password requirements----------------------------------------1: Length between 8 to 30. ---2: At least one lowercase letter. ---3: At least one uppercase letter. ---4: At least one digit. ---5: At least one special character: ~@#^-_+[{}]:./? ---6: Other special characters, such as ()|<>&\`!$"%'=;, and space, are not supported. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Information similar to the following is displayed: Please confirm your new password:

e.

Enter press Enter. Information similar to the following is displayed: Please input your new password:

f. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Enter a planned database user password and press Enter. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

328


A FAQs

Information similar to the following is displayed: please input the new password again:

g.

Enter the planned database user password again and press Enter. If the following information is displayed, the password has been successfully changed. Changing the dbuser's password succeeded.

A.6 Install the U2000 Software Exception Processing This topic describes how to uninstall the U2000 software. Before reinstalling the U2000 software, you must uninstall U2000.

A.6.1 How do I solve the problem where a failure message is displayed during the installation or the installation is abnormally interrupted Symptom How do I solve the problem where a failure message is displayed during the installation or the installation is abnormally interrupted? NOTE

This operation will uninstall the U2000. Specifically, this operation will cause NEs fail to be managed and monitored and cause the U2000 database information to be deleted.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to Windows OS as an OS user with administrator rights. Step 2 In the Windows Task Manager window, click the Processes tab and stop the httpd and tomcat processes.

Step 3 Navigate to the D:/oss/engr/engineering/tool/OSSEnvCleaner path and run the OSSEnvCleaner.bat script to clean up the installation environment.

Information similar to the following is displayed: ....... Are you sure you want to clean this environment using this tool?[yes/no]:

Step 4 Enter yes. Information similar to the following is displayed: ....... Clean database will delete all the databases EXCEPT system databases! Are you sure you want to execute this clwan database action[yes/no]:

Step 5 Enter yes to delete U2000 database. Information similar to the following is displayed: Input administrator user name: sa Input administrator user password: The default password for the database administrator user sa is Changeme_123. To ensure system security, change the default password timely after the U2000 is installed. Input database server name: DBSVR

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


329


A FAQs

If you have forgotten the password of the sa user or the database fails to be connected, manually uninstall the SQL Server database. For details, see A.4.6 How to Manually Uninstall the SQL Server Database .

Step 6 After the database is cleaned, see 3.7.1 Preparing Software Packages to upload and decompress the installation package. For details about how to reinstall the U2000, see 3.7.3 Starting the U2000 Installation Program . ----End

A.6.2 Failure to Log In to the U2000 Server from a U2000 Client Symptom A user fails to log in to a U2000 client after a user name and a password have been entered in the login window.

Possible Causes The possible causes are as follows: l

The U2000 server does not work properly, the U2000 server fails to start properly, the disk on the U2000 server is full, or the memory usage of the U2000 server is high because many processes are started.

l

An incorrect user name or password has been entered for logging in to the U2000 client.

l

If the U2000 server runs on Windows, the ODBC data source is configured incorrectly or is not configured.

l

If the U2000 server runs on Windows, the dynamic port of the SQL Server is not 1433; therefore, the U2000 server fails to connect to the database and login to the U2000 server from a U2000 client fails.

l

The network between the client and server does not function properly.

l

The license file is a temporary one or is damaged.

l

The number of clients allowed in the license is restricted.

l

The port between the client and server is shielded by firewall or viruses. In common mode, port 31037 is used by default. In SSL mode, port 31039 is used by default.

l

The version of the client is inconsistent with that of the server.

l

The communication protocol used by the client is inconsistent with that used by the server.

l

The user that logs in to the client is locked. This may be caused by too many times of login failures.

l

The IP address of the computer where the client is installed is not listed in the ACL.

l

The OS time on the client is set incorrectly and the ILOG JTGO license is expired.

l

The DCN is faulty.

l

The 360 antivirus software has been installed on the server.

l

The dfwModule fails to be loaded.

l

The maximum client login limit has been reached.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


330


A FAQs

Procedure Step 1 If an error message is displayed, locate and rectify the fault as prompted. Step 2 Check whether the server has been started properly. Ensure that the server runs properly, the disk space of the server is not used up, and not many processes are started on the server. If many processes are started on the server, the memory usage is high. 1.

Ensure that the disk space of the server is not used up. –

To troubleshoot the full disk space on the server on Windows, perform the following operations: Check that disk C is fully used, delete log files, and restart the U2000.

–

To troubleshoot the full disk space on the server on Solaris or SUSE Linux, perform the following operations: i.

Check that the space usage of the /opt directory reaches 100%.

ii.

Run the following command to check the distribution of files larger than 100 MB. # find /opt -size +200000 -print

Software runs abnormally because temporary files on the server are improperly large. Delete temporary files from the /opt directory if they occupy large space. 2.

Ensure that not many processes are started on the server. After the U2000 server is started, do not access the JDE desktop (switch to the CED environment for the U2000 on the live network). Start the U2000 in CLI mode.

Step 3 Verify that the entered user name and password are correct. Step 4 If a message indicating that the license file is invalid when you log in to the U2000 client, rectify the license fault according to A.6.3 How to Resolve the Problem that the License Does Not Take Effectand log in to the U2000 client.

Step 5 Choose Help > License Management > License Information from the main menu (traditional style); alternatively, double-click System Management in Application Center and choose License Management > Licenes Information from the main menu (application style). If the number of clients to log in exceeds the maximum number of clients allowed in the license, apply for a new license and update the U2000 license file.

Step 6 If the U2000 server is installed on Windows, check and restore the ODBC data source settings on the U2000. For details, see Step 3 in A.5.14 Failure to Log In to the Database.

Step 7 Check whether the versions of the client and server are consistent. If the versions are inconsistent, a message will be displayed asking you to upgrade the client. In this case, try to upgrade or reinstall the client.

Step 8 Check whether the communication protocols used by the client and the server are consistent. If the protocols are inconsistent, modify the protocols so that the protocols are consistent. NOTE

Run the ssl_adm -cmd query command on the U2000 server to view the communication mode of the U2000 server. For details, see A.5.13 How to Set the Communication Mode on the U2000 server for the Single-Server System (Windows) .

Step 9 Check the network between the client and server. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


331


A FAQs

Generally, the communication bandwidth between the client and server is at least 2 Mbit/s and the packet loss ratio is smaller than 0.1%. l

To check the network between the client and server, run the following command on Windows: > ping -t IP_address_of_the_NMS

l

To check the network between the client and server, run the following command on SUSE Linux: # ping -s IP_address_of_the_NMS

Step 10 Check whether the port between the client and server is shielded by firewall or viruses. Install a virus scanner, scan the entire disk, and remove viruses. If the client installed on the computer where the server belongs can log in to the server, but other clients cannot log in, check whether the port has been added to the Windows firewall. If not, perform the following operations to add the port to the Windows firewall: NOTE

Windows Server 2008 is used as an example to describe the procedures for adding a port to a firewall. The procedures vary according to OSs. For specific procedures, see the Windows help.

1.

Choose Start > Control Panel.

2.

In the Control Panel window, click windows Firewall.

3.

In the windows Firewall window, click Advanced Setting.

4.

In the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog box, choose Inbound Rules from the left navigation tree and from New Rule the right navigation tree.

5.

In the New Inbound Pule Wizard dialog box, select Port and click Next.

6.

In Specific local ports, set Ports and click Next.

7.

Select Allow the connection and click Next.

8.

Click Next, set Name, and click Finish.

Step 11 Log in to the U2000 client as the admin user and choose Administration > NMS Security > ACL.

On the U2000, you can set the client IP addresses that can be accessed. If the IP address of a client is not in the permitted range, the client cannot access the server. For details, see "Setting the Access Control List" in Chapter "Security Management" in the U2000 Administrator Guide. If NAT is used for IP address translation for communication between the client and server, ensure that the translated IP address is permitted in the ACL.

Step 12 If the number of failed login attempts by using the same user exceeds 3, the login authority of the user is locked. You can log in to the client again in 30 minutes (default) or unlock the user as another user that has the authority, such as user admin. Check whether the system time is the current time. If not, modify the system time.

Step 13 Step 14 Check whether the 360 antivirus software has deleted some U2000 files. If yes, uninstall the 360 antivirus software and re-install the U2000.

Step 15 Create a user and use it to log in. For details, see "Setting the Maximum Number of Sessions" in U2000 Administrator Guide. ----End

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


332


A FAQs

A.6.3 How to Resolve the Problem that the License Does Not Take Effect Question A message is displayed indicating that the license of the U2000 is invalid. As a result, the U2000 cannot be started or certain functions cannot be used. How do I resolve this problem?

Answer The possible causes are as follows: l

The license item is incorrect.

l

The time setting of the OS is incorrect.

l

Check for and rectify the fault on Windows according to the following precautions: NOTE

Suppose that the U2000 is installed in the D:\oss directory.

a.

Ensure that the date of the OS is the current date.

b.

Check whether the ESN is correct. You can obtain the ESN tool according to the U2000 License Instructions to check the ESN.

c.

A unique license file exists in the D:\oss\server\etc\conf\license path. If more than one license files exist in the path, you must delete redundant license files manually.

d.

The NIC used during license application must be the NIC actually used on the server. If the NICs are different, you must apply for a new license.

e.

The license file must comply with the U2000 version.

f.

Check whether an error has occurred during the license file transfer. If an error has occurred, transfer the license file again or download the license file to the D:\oss\server\etc\conf\license directory. Restart the U2000 and check whether the license takes effect.

----End

A.6.4 How to Solve Common Problems About Using the Network Mode to Installing a U2000 Client Question How to solve common problems about using the network mode to install a U2000 client?

Answer The following table shows the problems that may occur while using the network mode to install a U2000 client and the associated solutions. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


333


A FAQs

Serial Number

Problem

Solution

1

After the U2000 patch is installed and a U2000 client is installed using the network mode, the U2000 client version is different from the server version.

Delete the %OSS_ROOT%/cau/ history directory on the server. Execute the %OSS_ROOT%/cau/bin/cau.bat file. Use the CAU mode to install a U2000 client.

2

During installation of a U2000

Choose Start > Run. In the dialog box

client in CAU mode, a message is displayed indicating a failure to start the CAU.

that is displayed, enter cd %USERPROFILE%\Application Data\Sun\Java\Deployment\. In the CLI, run the del deployment.properties and delete the deployment.properties.

3

During installation of a U2000 client in CAU mode, a message is displayed indicating that the JRE server settings are incorrect and the installation fails.

Choose Tools > Internet Options > Connections > LAN Settings from the Internet Explorer. Clear the Proxy server check box. Select the Automatically detect settings check box. Use the CAU mode to install the U2000 client again.

4

After Install is clicked, a message is displayed indicating a failure to start the application. The failure

Perform the following operations to delete the following directory: l

Choose Start > Run. In the CLI, enter rd %userprofile%/ Application Data\Sun\Java \Deployment\cache and delete the %userprofile%/Application Data \Sun\Java\Deployment\cache directory.

l

Enter rd %allusersprofile%/cache and delete the %allusersprofile%/ cache directory. If the directory does not exist, no action is required.

information shows that the JAR signature certificate in the JNLP file is different from the actual signature certificate.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

5

When CAU is used to install a client, the displayed Initializing the Client dialog box is automatically closed.

Uninstall JRE and reinstall the client. For details, see Installing the U2000 Client in CAU Mode of U2000 Client Software Installation Guide.

6

When CAU is used to install a

Choose Start > Run, enter

U2000 client, the installation progress stays at the check page.

%allusersprofile%, and delete cache and .cau file folders.


334


A FAQs

Serial Number

Problem

Solution

7

The client fails to be installed using CAU.

l

Solution 1: Restart the Tomcat process and reinstall the client.

l

Solution 2: Copy the installation file from the PC on which a client has been installed to a local disk and run the file for installation.

8

The client fails to be installed using CAU because the remaining memory on the PC is insufficient.

Expand the memory as required. For details, see Configuration Requirements of U2000 Client Software Installation Guide.

9

The client fails to be installed on a Windows 8 OS.

Uninstall JRE, install JRE 1.6, and reinstall the client. For details, see Installing the U2000 Client in CAU Mode of U2000 Client Software Installation Guide.

10

During the client installation in CAU mode, an error message is displayed indicating that Web pages cannot be opened.

On the client computer, open Control Panel, click Windows Firewall and Customize Settings, and disable all Windows firewalls.

11

l

l

12

During the client installation in CAU mode, the verification

Empty the installation directory, restart the tomcat process, and install the client

code cannot be generated. During the client installation in CAU mode, the error message "Service Temporarily Unavailable" is displayed.

again. The process restart method is provided in How Do I Resolve the Problem Where the U2000 Client Fails to Be Installed Using CAU After the U2000 Has Been Upgraded? of U2000 Troubleshooting.

U2000The client fails to be installed in CAU mode after a patch is installed.

1. Log in to the server OS and delete all *.jar *.jardiff files from the ../oss/ server/common/tomcat/ webapps/cau/resource directory and all *.jnlp files from ../oss/server/ common/tomcat/webapps/cau. 2. Run the cau.sh script in the oss/cau/bin directory. 3. Restart the tomcat process. 4. Install the client again.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


335


A FAQs

A.6.5 How to Rectify the Failure to Open the CAU Download Web Page Because the Port Is Used Question How do I rectify the failure to open the CAU download web page because the port is used?

Answer Step 1 Run the netstat -aon|findstr port number command in the CLI. NOTE

The port number: 80 (used for http) or 443 (used for https, which is more secure).

If no information is displayed, the port is not used. If any information is displayed, the port is in use and the information in the rightmost column is the PID of the process that uses the port. End Step 2 On the Processes tab page in Windows Task Manager, right-click the PID and choose Process from the shortcut menu.

NOTICE l

Stop the process only after you confirm that it can be stopped. Otherwise, the U2000 may fail to run properly.

l

If the PID list is not displayed on the Processes tab page, choose View > Select Columns from the menu bar and select PID.

Step 3 Log in to the server OS. Step 4 Start the tomcat process. 1.

Run the start_daem command in the CLI.

2.

After the daem has been started successfully, run the daem_ps command in the CLI. The tomcat process is running if the displayed information contains javaw.exe.

----End

A.6.6 How to Process the Message Displayed During Installation of the U2000, Indicating That a Suspended File Has Been Created Question How do I process the message displayed during installation of the U2000, indicating that a suspended file has been generated?

Answer Step 1 On Windows OS, the system displays a message indicating that a suspended file is already created during the reinstallation of the U2000. This is because the suspended file is generated during the previous installation. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


336


A FAQs

Enter the following command in the address bar and then press Enter:

%tmp%

Step 2 Query the ClearInstallDiskDir.bat file and delete it. ----End

A.6.7 How to Process the Message Displayed During Installation of the U2000, Indicating That ISQL Connection Check Fails Question How do I process the message displayed during installation of the U2000, indicating that ISQL connection check fails?

Answer Step 1 Check whether the environment variable path contains the following path and ensure that the environment variables of other databases are not configured: C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\80\Tools\BINN.

Step 2 Choose Start > Program > Microsoft SQL Server > Query Analyzer. On the Connect to SQL Server page that is displayed, set the IP address of the local host as the service name, select the Start SQL Server if it is stopped check box, enter the password of the sa user, and

then click OK. Check whether the SQL Server can be normally connected. ----End

A.6.8 How to Resolve the Problem that the Database Installation File Is Not Found During Installation Question During NMS installation, a dialog box for selecting the database path is displayed on the database service configuration page, indicating that the database installation file is not found. How do I resolve the problem?

Answer Step 1 Confirm that this problem occurs because the database installation package is not found. Step 2 Select the directory where the database installation DVD-ROM is installed or the directory where the database installation package is decompressed.

Step 3 Check whether the database installation package matches the OS. ----End

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


337


A FAQs

A.6.9 How to Resolve the Problem Wherein the Message "PATH environment's length is too long" Is Displayed During Installation Question When the U2000 is installed on Windows OS, the following message is displayed and the installation is paused. In this case, how do I resolve the problem? PATH environment's length is too long. Please delete some useless fields and then perform the installation.

Answer Step 1 Right-click Computer and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Step 2 Click Advanced system setting and click the Advanced tab. Step 3 Click Environment Variables to check whether the environment variable exceeds the maximum length. When you check the length of the PATH environment variable, you may find that %PATH% is added to the environment variable. As a result, environment variable exceeds the maximum length. ... C:\WINDOWS\system32;%PATH%; ...

In this case, delete %PATH% from the environment variable. ----End

A.6.10 How Do I Rectify the Fault Where the Environment Variable Information About the SQL Server Database Is Abnormal During U2000 Pre-Installation Check Question During U2000 pre-installation check on Windows, the following message is displayed indicating that the environment variable information about the SQL Server database is abnormal. How do I rectify the fault? The PATH environment variable does not have database path information.

Answer Step 1 Log in to the OS of the U2000 server as a user with administrator rights. Step 2 Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter the cmd command to access the CLI. Step 3 Run the following command to check environment variable information: > %systemroot%\system32\reg.exe query "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM

\ControlSet001\Control\Session Manager\Environment" /v Path l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

If an error is reported after you run the command, access the registry to update PATH information.


338


A FAQs

NOTE

1. Enter the regeditcommand in the CLI. 2. In the Regedit Editordialog box, choose HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SYSTEM> ControlSet001> Control> Session Manager> Environment . In the right-hand Name list, select Path and back up its data. Then right-click Path and choose Deletefrom the shortcut menu to delete it. 3. Choose HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SYSTEM> ControlSet001> Control> Session Manager> Environment , right-click, and choose New > String Valuefrom the shortcut menu. In the Name column, enter Path. In the Data column, enter the backup data. l

If no error is reported after you run the command, check whether Path data contains the Microsoft SQL Server\80\Tools\BINN variable. NOTE

1. If the Microsoft SQL Server\80\Tools\BINN variable is not found, add this variable to Path data. 2. The full name of the Microsoft SQL Server\80\Tools\BINN variable is *\**\Microsoft SQL Server\80\Tools\BINN. For example, C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\80\Tools\BINN .

Step 4 Restart the PC and reinstall the U2000. ----End

A.6.11 How to Address the U2000 Installation or Uninstallation Failure Symptom How do I address the U2000 installation or uninstallation failure? l The verification result for the installation of the U2000 shows that the following abnormalities occur during the installation:

l

–

The database process cannot be started.

–

The U2000 process cannot be started.

–

The U2000 cannot be logged in to locate the cause of the failure.

A message indicating the uninstallation failure is displayed during the uninstallation of the U2000.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to Windows OS as an OS user with administrator rights. Step 2 Restart the database server. Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools> SQL Server Configuration Manager Server Services SQL Serverserver. > SQL , right-click (MSSQLSERVER) and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop the database Then, choose Start to start the database server to ensure that the database to be uninstalled is connected properly.

Step 3 Choose Start > All Programs > Administrative Tools > Services. Check whether the iMapService has been started. If it has been started, stop it and then manually delete all the files and folders in the decompressed directory of the installation package except for the installation package. An example of the decompressed directory of the installation package is D:\oss. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


339


A FAQs

Step 4 Delete U2000 database files. 1.

Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > SQL Server Management Studio. The Connect to Server window is displayed. Enter the server name, and then click Connect.

2.

Choose Databases for the local server from the navigation tree. Then, select all the databases, except master, model, msdb, pubs, tempdb, and Northwind. Right-click the selected databases and choose Delete from the shortcut menu, as shown in the following figure. NOTE

Backing up important databases in advance. For details about how to back up the databases, see the U2000 Administrator Guide.

3.

Choose Security > Logins for the local server from the navigation tree. Then, select dbuser, right-click, and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Restart the OS. Log in to the OS as the administrator user. In the d:\oss path, decompress the installation package and double-click the install.bat file to reinstall the U2000 server software. NOTE

When the install.batfile is run for installation, the installation may fail because of the port is in use. In this case, wait about 2 to 3 minutes. The system automatically releases the port. Then, run theinstall.bat file again.

----End

A.6.12 How to Solve the Problem Where the Error 1935 Alarm Is Generated During the Installation of the vcredist_x86.EXE or vcredist_x64.EXE Patch Question How to Solve the Problem Where the Error 1935 Alarm Is Generated During the Installation of the vcredist_x86.EXE or vcredist_x64.EXE Patch

Answer Step 1 In the Error 1935 dialog box, click OK. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


340


A FAQs

Step 2 Choose Start > Run as the administrator user. In the dialog box that is displayed, enter regedit to open the Registry Editor dialog box.

Step 3 Choose HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SYSTEM > CurrentControlSet > Control. Perform the following operations as required: l

If RegistrySizeLimit exists, change the base settings of RegistrySizeLimit to Hexadecimal and change the value to ffffffff.

l

If RegistrySizeLimit does not exist, create DWORD and set base configuration to Hexadecimal and the value to ffffffff.

Step 4 Close Registry Editor. Step 5 Restart the server. Step 6 After the server is restarted, enter SFC /SCANNOW in the Command Prompt dialog box to start system scanning. This process takes several minutes.

Step 7 When the progress bar reaches 100%, close the Command Prompt dialog box. Step 8 Reinstall the vcredist_x86.EXE or vcredist_x64.EXE patch. ----End

A.6.13 How Do I Resolve the Problem Where the Installation File Fails to Be Executed After the U2000 Installation Package Is Decompressed? Symptom The install.bat file fails to be executed after the U2000 installation package is decompressed.

Possible Causes The environment variables is not correct.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the Windows OS where the U2000 is to be installed. Step 2 Choose Computer > Properties > Advanced system settings > Advanced > Environment Variables. On the System variable tab, add the environment variable Path with the value of %SystemRoot%\system32;%SystemRoot%.

Step 3 Optional: Use the antivirus software to kill viruses on the computer. Step 4 Restart the OS and install the U2000 again. ----End

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


341


B

B Uninstalling the U2000 Server

Uninstalling the U2000 Server

This topic describes how to uninstall the U2000 server. B.1 Uninstallation Preparations This topic describes the preparations for uninstalling the U2000 server. B.2 Uninstallation Procedure This topic describes how to uninstall the U2000 server on a Windows OS. B.3 Verifying the U2000 Server Uninstallation This topic describes how to verify the U2000 server uninstallation.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


342



B.1 Uninstallation Preparations This topic describes the preparations for uninstalling the U2000 server.

Procedure Step 1 Log out of all running U2000 clients. Step 2 Optional: Perform the following operations to cancel the security hardening policy: 1.

Choose Start > All Programs > Huawei > Setwin > Setwin. NOTE

In the Windows Server 2008 OS, right-click and choose Setwinfrom the shortcut menu. Perform operations as the administrator. Alternatively, right-click the shortcut icon and chooseRun As Administratorfrom the shortcut menu to open the program.

2.

Choose Policy > Rollback.

3.

Select the backup file and click Open.

4.

Click OK.

5.

Restart the OS. Shut down the U2000 server before restarting the OS.

Step 3 Stop U2000 services and processes. 1.


2.

Double-click the stopserver.bat file in the U2000 path, that is, D:\oss\engr\engineering, to end the U2000 MSuite processes. NOTE

On Windows 2008, the extension name of the .bat file is hidden by d efault. You can view the file type to determine the extension name. When you run a .bat file on Windows 2008, a user account control dialog box may be displayed. In this case, click Yes to allow the program to make changes to the computer.

3.

Stop U2000 processes. a.


b.


c.

In the CLI, run the daem_ps command to check whether the U2000 process is stopped. n n

If no command output is displayed, the U2000 process has stopped. If information similar to the following is displayed, the U2000 process is not stopped. In the CLI, run the D:\oss\server\platform\bin\stopnms.bat command to stop the U2000 process. imapmrb.exe 19,252 K imapeventmgr.exe 19,812 K imapsysd.exe 39,720 K imapwatchdog.exe 14,216 K ResourceMonitor.exe 25,024 K imap_sysmonitor.exe 36,628 K python.exe

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

30616 RDP-Tcp#1

3

4392 RDP-Tcp#1

3

27224 RDP-Tcp#1

3

36812 RDP-Tcp#1

3

29472 RDP-Tcp#1

3

8368 RDP-Tcp#1

3

33732 RDP-Tcp#1

3


343

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Single-Server System Software Installation and Commissioning Guide (Windows) 21,216 K httpd.exe 11,140 K java.exe 92,424 K httpd.exe 16,476 K


14920 RDP-Tcp#1

3

21572 RDP-Tcp#1

3

15980 RDP-Tcp#1

3

NOTE ○

If information similar to the following is displayed, the U2000 process is not stopped. Switch to the administrator and run the D:\oss\server\platform\bin \stopnms.bat command to stop the U2000 process. imapmrb.exe 0 30,392 K imapeventmgr.exe 0 21,404 K imapsysd.exe 0 42,116 K imapwatchdog.exe 0 11,676 K ResourceMonitor.exe 0 28,184 K imap_sysmonitor.exe 0 39,632 K


○


○


Step 4 Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools> SQL Server Configuration Manager, choose SQL Server Services from the navigation tree, right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) in the right pane, and then choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop the database server. Then, choose Start to start the database server to ensure that no external user accesses the SQL Server database. NOTE

When uninstalling the U2000 server, ensure that the database works properly. If the database has been stopped, the uninstall may fail.

----End

B.2 Uninstallation Procedure This topic describes how to uninstall the U2000 server on a Windows OS.

Prerequisites l

Preparations for uninstalling the U2000 server software have been completed.

l

Ensure that the NMS installation path has been stopped.

l

Do not uninstall databases when uninstalling the U2000. If the database needs to be uninstalled, uninstall the U2000 and then the database. Otherwise, some data files cannot be deleted.

l

If the database and backup files need to be saved, manually back up the D:\backup \dbbackup directory to a non-installation directory of the U2000 before uninstalling the U2000.

l

This operation will uninstall the U2000. Specifically, this operation will cause NEs fail to be managed and monitored and cause the U2000 database information to be deleted.

Context

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


344



Procedure Step 1 Log in to a Windows OS as an OS user with administrator rights. Choose Start > Programs > Network Management System > Uninstall U2000. NOTE

If a message is displayed indicating that a process is not stopped and therefore the U2000 cannot be uninstalled, right-click the taskbar and choose Start Task Manager from the shortcut menu. In the task manager, click the Processestab and select the Show processes from all users check box. Check whether the ftpdaemon.exeprocess exists. If the process exists, select the process and click End Process.

Step 2 Click Next. The Information dialog box will be displayed. Step 3 Click OK. The Uninstalling dialog box will be displayed. Step 4 After the uninstallation is complete, the Uninstallation Completed dialog box will be displayed. NOTE

If a failure message is displayed during uninstallation, refer to A.6.11 How to Address the U2000 to solve the problem. Installation or Uninstallation Failure

Step 5 Click Finish. The Confirm dialog box will be displayed. Step 6 Click Yes to restart the OS. ----End

B.3 Verifying the U2000 Server Uninstallation This topic describes how to verify the U2000 server uninstallation.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to a Windows OS as an OS user with administrator rights. Step 2 Ensure that the shortcut icons are deleted from the Windows desktop. In addition, ensure that the U2000 menu item has been deleted from the Start > Programs menu.

Step 3 Ensure that the installation path of the U2000 server, such as the D:\oss path, is deleted. Step 4 Ensure that the environment variables of the U2000 have been deleted. 1.

Right-click Computer and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

2.

Click Advanced system setting and click the Advanced tab.

3.

Click Environment Variables. In the Environment Variables dialog box, verify that all U2000 environment variables have been deleted For details, see 3.9 Checking the Installation of the Single-Server System (Windows). NOTE

The path environment variable is carried by the system. During U2000 uninstallation, only parameters newly added for the path environment variable will be deleted.

Step 5 Ensure that U2000 database files have been deleted. 1.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Choose start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > SQL Server Management Studio. The Connect to Server window is displayed. Enter the server name, and click Connect. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

345


2.


Choose Databases for the local server from the navigation tree. Ensure that all databases have been deleted, except System Databases and Database Snapshots.

----End

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


346


C

C Manual Commissioning Task

Manual Commissioning Task

Some commissioning tasks need to be manually executed during U2000 system parameter commissioning. This topic describes how to execute a manual commissioning task. C.1 How to Change the System Time and Time Zone of the Single-Server System on Windows C.2 How to Change the Host Name of the Single-Server System (Windows 2008) C.3 How to Change the IP Address of the Single-Server System (Windows 2008) C.4 Configuring a Digital Certificate The U2000 supports security encryption to ensure the communication security for the DCN and the confidentiality and integrity for the transmitted data. A digital certificate is also used to distribute public keys. C.5 Configuring and Testing the FTP Service During data synchronization, upgrade, backup, and patch installation of NEs, you need to configure and test the FTP and SFTP service to ensure that the FTP services work properly between NE software, the U2000, and NEs. This topic describes how to configure and test the FTP and SFTP services on the U2000.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


347



C.1 How to Change the System Time and Time Zone of the Single-Server System on Windows Question How do I change the system time and time zone of the single-server system on Windows?

NOTICE When the U2000 services are running, do not change the system time.

Answer Step 1 Stop the U2000 processes and the SQL Server database. Please see A.5.7 How to End the Processes of the U2000 Single-Server System on Windows and A.4.2 How to Shut Down the SQL Server Database.

Step 2 Open the Control Panel window. Click the Clock, Language, and Region . Then, click the Date and Time.

Step 3 In the dialog box that is displayed, click the Date and Time tab. Click the Change date and time to set the current system date and time. Click OK. Click the Change time zone tab and select the required time zone from the related drop-down list. Click OK.

Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Restart the OS. NOTE

The OS does not need to be restarted if only the time is changed. It needs to be restarted if the time zone is changed.

----End

C.2 How to Change the Host Name of the Single-Server System (Windows 2008) Question How to change the host name of the single-server system (Windows 2008)?

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


348



Answer NOTE

Changing the host name includes the following major steps: 1. Shut down the U2000 server and client, and ensure that the database is running. 2. Change the host n ame of t he U2000 server. 3. Restart the OS. 4. Log in to the U200 0 MSuite client and synchronize the netw ork configuration files. If the network configuration files are not synchronized, the U2000 fails to start properly.

NOTICE l

Do not change an IP address and a host name at the same time. Otherwise, the U2000 fails to be started.

l

Using virtual network interfaces is prohibited.

l

Modifying IP addres information may result in network interruption. Perform this operation only if you fully understand network conditions.

Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights. Step 2 Shut down the NMS server and client. In the directory of the NMS software after the installation, for example, the D:\oss\server \platform\bin directory, run the stopnms.bat file to end the NMS processes. NOTE

Ensure that the database is started, do as follows: 1. Choose Start > All Programs> Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools > SQL > SQL Server Services . Server Configuration Manager 2. Right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) and choose Start to start the database. If the database has started, skip this step.

Step 3 Perform the following operations to change the host name of the server: 1.

Click Start. Right-click Computer on the desktop and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

2.

In the Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings area, click Change settings.

3.

In the Computer Name tab, click Change.

4.

In the dialog box that is displayed, change the computer name, and then click OK. NOTE

–

Ensure that you change the host name in the work group.

–

The host name must be a string consisting of no more than 30 characters that can only be letters (A to Z, a to z), digits (0 to 9) and hyphen (-).

–

The host name must be case-sensitive.

–

The host name cannot be empty or contain spaces.

5.

The You must restart your computer to apply these changes dialog box will be displayed, click OK.

6.

Click Close.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


349


7.


The You must restart your computer to apply these changes dialog box will be displayed, click Restart Now to restart the OS.

Step 4 Refer to Step 2 to shut down t he NMS server and client. Step 5 Start the server process of the MSuite. In the D:\oss\engr\engineering directory, double-click thestartserver.bat file to start the server process of the MSuite.

Step 6 Log in to the MSuite client. 1.

On the computer where the MSuite client is installed, double-click the U2000 NMS Maintenance Suite shortcut icon on the desktop. Wait about one minute. The Login dialog box is displayed.

NOTICE The Login dialog box that is displayed after the Network Management System Maintenance Suite is logged out of cannot be used for login. Otherwise, network configuration synchronization fails. 2.

Set the related login parameters and click OK. The Management System Maintenance Suite window is displayed. –

IP Address: Indicates the system IP address of the computer where the MSuite server is installed.

–

Port No.: The default port number is 12212. You do not need to change the default value during login.

–

User Name and Password: The default user name of the MSuite is admin and the default password is Changeme_123. If the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password. For details, see the MSuite help.

NOTE

A dialog box may be displayed during the process of logging in to the MSuite client. Click OK according to the prompt.

Step 7 On the Server tab page, right-click the server to be configured and choose Synchronize Network Configuration from the shortcut menu. Click OK. ----End

C.3 How to Change the IP Address of the Single-Server System (Windows 2008) Question How do I change the IP address of the single-server system (Windows 2008)?

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


350



Answer NOTE

Changing an IP address includes the following major steps: 1. Shut down the NMS server and all NMS clie nts, and ensure that the dat abase is running. 2. Shut down the U2000 MSuite server. 3. Change the IP address of the U2000 server. 4. Start the U2000 MSuite server. 5. Log in to the U200 0 MSuite client and synchronize the netw ork configuration files. If the network configuration files are not synchronized, the U2000 fails to start properly. 6. Restart the OS. Only the IP address instead of the networking solution can be modified.

NOTICE l

Do not change an IP address and a host name at the same time. Otherwise, the U2000 fails to be started.

l

Using virtual network interfaces is prohibited.

l

Modifying IP addres information may result in network interruption. Perform this operation only if you fully understand network conditions.

Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights. Step 2 Shut down the NMS server and all NMS clients. In the directory of the NMS software after the installation, for example, the D:\oss\server \platform\bin directory, run the stopnms.bat file to end the NMS processes. NOTE

Ensure that the database is started, do as follows: 1. Choose Start > All Programs> Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools > SQL > SQL Server Services . Server Configuration Manager 2. Right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) and choose Start to start the database. If the database has started, skip this step.

Step 3 End the server process of the MSuite. In the D:\oss\engr\engineering directory, double-click thestopserver.bat file to end the server process of the MSuite.

Step 4 Disable one or more unwanted NIC. 1.

Choose Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center > Change adapter settings to access the Network Connections window.

2.

Select one ore more unwanted old NICs, right-click, and choose Disable from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Perform the following operations to change the IP address of the server: 1.

Click Start. Right-click Network and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

2.

In the Network and Sharing Center dialog box, click Change adapter settings.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


351



3.

In the Network Connections dialog box that is displayed, right-click the network connection to be configured and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

4.

In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then Properties.

5.

In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog box that is displayed, enter the new IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address, and perform the related modification. Click OK.

Step 6 Change the IP address information in the nic.cfg configuration file as required. NOTE

1.

l

The prerequisite to perform this step is that the server communication NIC needs to be replaced or the NIC name needs to be modified. If you do not need to replace the communication NIC or modify the NIC name, do not perform this step.

l

During U2000 installation, the server IP address must be set to the IP address for external communication. A loopback IP address, such as 127.0.0.1, is not allowed.

Navigate to D:\oss\engr\engineering\conf, copy nic.cfg, and save it as nic_bak.cfg. NOTE

If the U2000 is not installed in disk D, change D to the actual drive letter.

2.

Double-click nic.cfg.

3.

Change the IP address information in nic.cfg as required, Ensure that all NIC names in the file are the same as names of actual NICs on the host, Change physical addresses of all network interface cards (NIC) to thoses of actual hosts in nic.cfg as follows:

NOTICE In the CLI, run the ipconfig command to view the associated IP addresses. – Choose Start > Run. The Run window will be displayed. – Enter cmd and click OK. – In the CLI, run the ipconfig -all command to view the associated IP addresses. HOST01_PublicNIC_NAME=localhost HOST01_PublicNIC_MAC=00-0C-29-8F-DD-3F HOST01_PrivateNIC_NAME=localhost HOST01_PrivateNIC_MAC=00-0C-29-8F-DD-3F

4.

Save and close nic.cfg.

Step 7 Start the server process of the MSuite. In the D:\oss\engr\engineering directory, double-click the startserver.bat file to start the server process of the MSuite.

Step 8 Log in to the MSuite client. 1.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

On the computer where the MSuite client is installed, double-click the U2000 NMS Maintenance Suite shortcut icon on the desktop. Wait about one minute. The Login dialog box is displayed.


352



NOTICE The Login dialog box that is displayed after the Network Management System Maintenance Suite is logged out of cannot be used for login. Otherwise, network configuration synchronization fails. 2.

Set the related login parameters and click OK. The Management System Maintenance Suite window is displayed. –

IP Address: Indicates the system IP address of the computer where the MSuite server is installed.

–

Port No.: The default port number is 12212. You do not need to change the default value during login.

–

User Name and Password: The default user name of the MSuite is admin and the default password is Changeme_123. If the password has been changed, enter the new password. If the password has not been changed, for system security, modify the default password and remember the new password. For details, see the MSuite help.

NOTE

A dialog box may be displayed during the process of logging in to the MSuite client. Click OK according to the prompt.

Step 9 On the Server tab page, right-click the server to be configured and choose Synchronize Network Configuration from the shortcut menu. Click OK.

Step 10 Manually shut down the MSuite server and the database. Then, restart the OS. 1. 2.

Shut down the MSuite server. For details, see Step 3. Shut down the database. For details, see A.4.2 How to Shut Down the SQL Server Database.

3.

Restart the OS. NOTE

–

If NBIs instances are deployed before the host name and IP address are changed, you must reconfigure NBIs on the MSuite client after changing the IP address and host name.

–

The changed IP address will be used for re-configure an NBI. For details, see the related NBI user guide.

----End

C.4 Configuring a Digital Certificate The U2000 supports security encryption to ensure the communication security for the DCN and the confidentiality and integrity for the transmitted data. A digital certificate is also used to distribute public keys.

C.4.1 Replacing SSL Certificates Used for the U2000 Server When the U2000 is installed, the SSL certificate developed by Huawei is loaded for temporary communication. Do not use this certificate commercially. The U2000 supports certificate replacement. Before enabling SSL communication, apply for a certificate from a CA and use it to replace the temporary certificate in the commissioning phase. This topic Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


353



describes how to replace the Security Socket Layer (SSL) certificates used by the U2000 server.

Prerequisites l

You have obtained the trust certificate rootCA.cer ( , subCA1.cer) and identity certificate (server.p12) used by the server and the encryption password for the identity certificate.

l

The SSL certificates have been backed up.

l

Use the FTP to upload the new SSL certificate files (server.p12, rootCA.cer and subCA1.cer) to the following directory on the U2000 server as the ossuser user before you replace the SSL certificate of server. –

Solaris/SUSE Linux: /opt/oss/server/certs NOTE

If security hardening is performed, ossuserFTP/SFTP rights will be disabled. In this case, you need to upload files to the backup directory in the FTP root directory as the ftpuseruser (the FTP root directory of ftpuseris /opt/backup/ftpboot ) and then copy files to the target directory as the ossuseruser.

–

Windows: D:\oss\server\certs NOTE

Place only the certificate files server.p12 , rootCA.cerand subCA1.cerin this directory. Do not place other files in it. Otherwise, the certificate replacement script will fail to be executed. l

The U2000 processes have been shutdown.

l

By default, the U2000 client authenticates the U2000 server, but the U2000 server does not authenticate the U2000 client.

l

The Huawei-predefined SSL certificates used to safeguard communication between the U2000 server and client are located in the following directory:

Context

–

On Solaris or SUSE Linux OS: /opt/oss/server/etc/ssl

–

On Windows OS: D:\oss\server\etc\ssl

l

The MSuite and the U2000 use the same SSL certificates.

l

In a high availability system (Veritas hot standby) scheme, replace certificates on the servers of the primary and secondary sites.

l

The following script-based replacement procedure assumes that your OS is Solaris or SUSE Linux OS. If your OS is Windows, replace the certificates for the U2000 server in a similar way.

NOTICE After SSL Certificates for the U2000 server have been replaced, you may fail to log in to the MSuite.

Procedure l

Replace SSL certificates for the U2000 server through the GUI. a.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Ensure that the MSuite server has been started. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

354



Run the following command as the root user to check whether the MSuite servers are started: NOTE

If security hardening is enabled, log in to the OS as the ossuseruser. Then run the su - root command and enter the root user password to switch to the root user. # ps -ef | grep j ava NOTE

If the displayed information contains , the MSuite servers have been started.

If the MSuite servers have not been started, run the following commands as the root user to start the MSuite servers: # cd /opt/oss/engr/engineering # ./startserver.sh

b.

Log in to the MSuite client from the U2000 server.

c.

Choose Certificate File Management > Internal NMS Certificate.

d.

In the Certificate Configuration dialog box, select the SSL certificates to be replaced and click ReplaceAll.

e.

In the Information Confirmation dialog box, enter the PFX password. NOTE

The new encryption password for the identity certificate must meet the following requirements:

l

l


l

At least one space or on e special character: `~!@#$%^&*()-_=+\|[{}];:'",<.>/?

l


l


f.

Click OK.

g.

Because the MSuite reuses the U2000 digital certificates, restart the MSuite server for the certificates to take effect.

Replace SSL certificates for the U2000 server using a script. a.

Use the PuTTY to log in to the U2000 server in SSH mode as the ossuser user.

b.

Run the following command to end the U2000 processes: Single-Server System: $ cd /opt/oss/server/platform/bin $ ./stopnms.sh

High Availability System: $ su - root Password: root user password # hares -offline NMSServer -sys hostname

c.

Use the FileZilla to upload certificates to /opt/oss/server/certs on the U2000 server.

d.

Run the following command to back up the c ertificates (as the root user): $ ssl_adm -cmd backup -backpath /opt/backup/dbbackup/ssl NOTE

The certificates can be backed up to an absolute or relative directory. The following steps assume that the certificates are backed up to /opt/backup/dbbackup/ssl .

e.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Run the following command to replace the certificates used by the U2000 server (as the root user): Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

355



$ ssl_adm -cmd replace_certs -dir /opt/oss/server/certs

Enter the encryption password for the identity certificate based on the prompt. NOTE l

is the path for saving certificates. /opt/oss/server/certs

l

Two formats are available for the identity certificate. l

If the identity certificate is server.p12of the PKCS#12 type (single file in PFX format), ensure that the certificate password obtained together with the certificate is correct, because the password is verified during command execution.

l

If the identity certificate file is server.cer , password is user-defined. If the .pem private key file matching the certificate is not encrypted, the password must be greater than 6 and less than or equal to 64 bytes and contain at least three of the following types of characters: lowercase letters, uppercase letters, digits, and special characters (excluding spaces and ` $ & ( ) \ | ; ' " < >). The command is run to convert the server.cerfile into the server.p12file of the PKCS#12 type.

f.

Enter the encryption password for the identity certificate and press Enter. The certificates are successfully replaced if the following information is displayed: SSL certificates are deployed successfully NOTE

The new encryption password for the identity certificate must meet the following requirements: l


l

At least one space or on e special character: `~!@#$%^&*()-_=+\|[{}];:'",<.>/?

l


l


If the certificates fail to be replaced, resolve the problem based on the prompt and run the following command to restore the certificates before replacing them again: $ ssl_adm -cmd restore -backpath /opt/backup/dbbackup/ssl

g.

After the certificates are successfully replaced, run the following commands to import environment variables and update the CAU configuration data (as the root user). # cd /opt/oss/cau/bin/ # ./cau.sh

h.

Run the following commands to start U2000 processes for the replacement to take effect: Single-Server System (as the ossuser user): $ cd /opt/oss/server/platform/bin $ ./startnms.sh

High Availability System (as the root user): # hagrp -online AppService -sys hostname

----End


After the trust and identity certificates used by the U2000 server are successfully replaced, delete certificate files from /opt/oss/server/certs on the U2000 server.

l

After the trust and identity certificates used by the U2000 server are successfully replaced, replace the trust and identity certificates used by the U2000 client as well.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


356



C.4.2 Replacing SSL Certificates Used for the Communication Between the U2000 and uTraffic When the U2000 is installed, the SSL certificate developed by Huawei is loaded for temporary communication. Do not use this certificate commercially. The U2000 supports certificate replacement. Before enabling SSL communication, apply for a certificate from a CA and use it to replace the temporary certificate in the commissioning phase. Perform the following operations to replace Security Socket Layer (SSL) certificates used for the communication between the U2000 and uTraffic.

Prerequisites l

l

You have obtained the SSL certificates and encryption passwords from a trusted institute. –

The client.p12 contains the client certificate file and key file. The password for encrypting the file needs to be obtained.

–

The server.p12 contains the server certificate file and key file. The password for encrypting the file needs to be obtained.

–

The rootCA.cer and subCA1.cer contains the files issued by the client, server, and upper-layer system.

Use the FTP to upload the new SSL certificate to the following directory on the U2000 server as the ossuser user before you replace the SSL certificate. –

Solaris/SUSE Linux: /opt/oss/server/certs NOTE

If security hardening is performed, ossuserFTP/SFTP rights will be disabled. In this case, you to upload filesof toftpuser the backup directory in the FTP) and rootthen directory thetoftpuser user (the need FTP root directory is /opt/backup/ftpboot copy as files the target directory as the ossuseruser.

–

Windows: D:\oss\server\certs

l

The SSL certificates have been backed up.

l

The predeployed SSL certificates for the communication between the U2000 and uTraffic are stored in the following paths:

Context

l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

–

Solaris or SUSE Linux: /opt/oss/server/etc/ssl/solution

–

Windows: D:\oss\server\etc\ssl\solution

The certificate replacement script is stored in the /opt/oss/server/common/pms/share/ tools/ssl path (Use Solaris/SUSE Linux as an example. The path on Windows is similar.). Run the ./replace_certs.sh command as the ossuser user in this path. Information similar to the following is displayed:


357



NOTE l

-typeindicates the certificate type, -file indicates the certificate path, and -pfxpassindicates the encrypted password for the identity certificate.

l

certificate type: l

1: client identity certificate

l

2: server identity certificate

l

3: trust certificate

l

4: revocation certificate list

l

certificate file: path in which the certificate is stored.

l

PFX password: encrypted password for the certificate.

l

Example:

l

l

./replace_certs.sh -type 1 -file client.p12 -pfxpass testpass

l

./replace_certs.sh -type 2 -file server.p12 -pfxpass testpass

l

./replace_certs.sh -type 3 -file trust.cer

l

./replace_certs.sh -type 4 -file revoke.crl

To ensure the security of the system, passwords must be complex enough. For example, a password cannot be short. A password is recommended containing eight or more characters and at least two types of the following characters: digits, letters, and special characters. Remember to change passwords regularly.

Procedure l

Replace an SSL certificate for the U2000 and uTraffic through the GUI. a.

Ensure that the MSuite server has been started. Run the following command as the root user to check whether the MSuite servers are started: NOTE

If security hardening is enabled, log in to the OS as the ossuseruser. Then run the su - root command and enter the root user password to switch to the root user. # ps -ef | grep j ava NOTE

If the displayed information contains , the MSuite servers have been started.

If the MSuite servers have not been started, run the following commands as the root user to start the MSuite servers: # cd /opt/oss/engr/engineering

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


358



# ./startserver.sh

b.

Log in to the MSuite client from the U2000 server.

c.

Choose Certificate File Management > Other Certificate.

d.

Click the Identity Certificate tab and configure the SSL Client and SSL Server identity certificates.

e.

Click the Trust Certificate tab and configure the trust certificate. NOTE

After adding the new trust certificate, delete the old trust certificate that won't be used.

f.

Optional: Click the Certificate Revocation List tab and click Add. In the Select Certs dialog box, select the revocation certificate and click OK.

NOTICE If the SSL certificate is revoked, the U2000 cannot communicate with NEs in SSL mode after the U2000 is restarted. Exercise caution. g. l

Restart the PMSDm process.

Replace an SSL certificate for the U2000 and uTraffic using a script. a.

Start the identity certificate replacement script. n

Solaris or SUSE Linux (as the ossuser user): $ cd /opt/oss/server/common/pms/share/tools/ssl $ ./replace_certs.sh -type certificate type -file certificate file -pfxpass PFX

password NOTE l

l

n

The identify certificates on the server and client must be replaced separately. For example: l

replace_certs.bat -type 1 -file client.p12 -pfxpass testpass

l

replace_certs.bat -type 2 -file server.p12 -pfxpass testpass

To ensure the security of the system, passwords must be complex enough . For example, a password cannot be short. A password is recommended containing eight or more characters and at least two types of the following characters: digits, letters, and special characters. Remember to change passwords regularly.

Windows: >cd /d d: > cd \oss\server\common\pms\share\tools\ssl > replace_certs.bat -type certificate type -file certificate file -pfxpass PFX password NOTE l

l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

The identify certificates on the server and client must be replaced separately. For example: l

replace_certs.bat -type 1 -file client.p12 -pfxpass testpass

l

replace_certs.bat -type 2 -file server.p12 -pfxpass testpass

To ensure the security of the system, passwords must be complex enough . For example, a password cannot be short. A password is recommended containing eight or more characters and at least two types of the following characters: digits, letters, and special characters. Remember to change passwords regularly.


359


b.


Start the trust certificate replacement script. n

Solaris or SUSE Linux (as the ossuser user): $ cd /opt/oss/server/common/pms/share/tools/ssl $ ./replace_certs.sh -type certificate type -file certificate file NOTE

For information about variables, see the background information. For example, ./ replace_certs.sh -type 3 -file trust.cer. n

Windows: >cd /d d: > cd \oss\server\common\pms\share\tools\ssl > replace_certs.bat -type certificate type -file certificate file NOTE

For information about variables, see the background information. For example, replace_certs.bat -type 3 -file trust.cer.

c.

Optional: Start the CRL configuration script. n

Solaris or SUSE Linux (as the ossuser user): $ cd /opt/oss/server/common/pms/share/tools/ssl $ ./replace_certs.sh -type certificate type -file certificate file NOTE

For information about variables, see the background information. For example, ./ replace_certs.sh -type 4 -file revoke.crl. n

Windows: >cd /d d: > cd \oss\server\common\pms\share\tools\ssl > replace_certs.bat -type certificate type -file certificate file NOTE

For information about variables, see the background information. For example, replace_certs.bat -type 4 -file revoke.crl.

d.

Restart the PMSDm process.

----End

Result l

If U2000 processes are properly started, the U2000 can be connected to uTraffic by means of Security SSL and SSL certificates have been successfully loaded. You can manually delete the backup SSL digital certificates for U2000 and uTraffic.

l

If the U2000 process fails to start, you mustpath. replace backup certificates and save the target certificates to the default certificates

Follow-up Procedure After SSL certificates used for the communication between the U2000 and uTraffic are successfully replaced, delete certificate files from the following directory on the U2000 server: l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Solaris/SUSE Linux: /opt/oss/server/certs Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

360



NOTE

If security hardening is performed, ossuserFTP/SFTP rights will be disabled. In this case, you need to upload files to the backup directory in the FTP root directory as the ftpuseruser (the FTP root directory of ftpuseris /opt/backup/ftpboot ) and then copy files to the target directory as the ossuseruser. l

Windows: D:\oss\server\certs

C.4.3 Deploying the SSL Trust Certificate on the Internet Explorer When the U2000 uses Hedex Help or uses the Web LCT to manage NE series, such as the NG WDM, NG WDM (NA), RTN, and Marine, some functions of the NE Explorer must be opened through an Internet Explorer. In this case, the SSL trust certificate of the Internet Explorer must be deployed.

Context The trust certificate preconfigured by Huawei consists of the root certificate huaweiossCA.crt and intermediate certificate networkossCA.crt. All of the certificates need to be deployed on the Internet Explorer.

Procedure Step 1 Open the Internet Explorer of the U2000 client and choose Tool > Internet Options from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Internet Options dialog box, select Content tab and click Certificates. Step 3 In the Certificates dialog box, deploy the root certificate huaweiossCA.crt. 1.

Select the Trusted Root Certification Authorities tab and click Import.

2.

In the Certificate Import Wizard dialog box, click Next.

3.

Click Browse..., select the trusted root certificate huaweiossCA.crt, and click Next. NOTE

The trust root certificate preconfigured by Huawei, huaweiossCA.crt, is stored in the oss\client directory. \client\style\defaultstyle\conf\ssl\trust\PEM

4.

Click Next, and then click Finish.

5.

In the Security Warning dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.

6.

In the Certificate Import Wizard dialog box, click OK.

Step 4 Deploy the intermediate certificate networkossCA.crt. 1.

Select the Intermediate Certification Authorities tab and click Import.

2.

In the Certificate Import Wizard dialog box, click Next.

3.

Click Browse..., select the trusted intermediate certificate networkossCA.crt, and click Next. NOTE

The trust intermediate certificate preconfigured by Huawei, networkossCA.crt , is stored in the oss\client\client\style\defaultstyle\conf\ssl\trust\PEM diectory.

4.

Click Next, and then click Finish.

5.

In the Certificate Import Wizard dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


361



Step 5 Click Close. Step 6 In the Internet Options dialog box, select the Advanced tab. Drag the scroll bar to Security and clear the selection of the Warn about certificate address mismatch*.

Step 7 Click OK. Step 8 Restart the Internet Explorer. ----End


If the U2000 GUI is displayed abnormally, the SSL certificate fails to be uploaded. Refer to the preceding operations to redeploy a digital certificate.

l

If the dialog which prompted you need trusted certification is displayed in the U2000 NE management, right-click Continue to this website (not recommended), and then click Open in the New Window . In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK. If the Security Alert dialog box for the installation certificate is displayed, click OK to display the current function GUI. After finish the operation, the U2000 GUI will display normally.

C.5 Configuring and Testing the FTP Service During data synchronization, upgrade, backup, and patch installation of NEs, you need to configure and test the FTP and SFTP service to ensure that the FTP services work properly between NE software, the U2000, and NEs. This topic describes how to configure and test the FTP and SFTP services on the U2000.

C.5.1 Overview of the FTP Service Used by the U2000 This topic describes the protocol mode, operation mode, and usage scenarios of the FTP service used by the U2000.

FTP Service Protocol Mode The U2000 supports two protocol modes for transferring FTP files: FTP and SFTP. In comparison with FTP, SFTP is more secure and therefore is recommended to enhance system security.

FTP Service Operation Mode The U2000 supports two operation modes for using the FTP service: local FTP service mode and third-party FTP service mode.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


362



Figure C-1 FTP Service Operation Mode

l

Local FTP service mode: The U2000 server functions as the FTP server. During the U2000 installation, an FTP/SFTP user is created by default to implement file transfer among the client, NEs, and U2000 server.

l

Third-party FTP service mode: A computer is configured as the FTP server. In this case, the FTP/SFTP service must be installed on the computer and an FTP/SFTP user must be created to implement file transfer among the client, NEs, and U2000 server.

FTP Service Usage Scenario After the U2000 is installed, four FTP accounts and eight FTP applications are provided by default. Figure C-2 shows the default FTP accounts used by default FTP applications. Figure C-2 Default FTP accounts used by default FTP applications

After the U2000 is installed, one default local FTP account and three default third-party FTP accounts are available. Each FTP account is a combination of the FTP service mode, FTP user account, and main directory. FTP applications can directly use the FTP accounts without requiring the input of FTP user names or other information. The default local FTP account has Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


363



a default local FTP user named ftpuser. Information about the default local FTP account has been configured and therefore can be directly used. However, the default third-party FTP accounts can be properly used only after their information is configured on the third-party FTP server. The following table lists information about the default FTP accounts.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


364



Table C-1 Information about the default FTP accounts

Account Name

Accoun t Type

Account Function s

Server Name

Server IP Address

FTP User Name

Main Direct ory

Default local FTP account

Local FTP account

l

By default , this accou nt can be used by multip le FTP applic ations, such as ONT loadin g, NE softwa re manag ement, batch perfor mance statisti cs collect ion, NE license manag ement, and NE fault diagno sis inform ation collect ion.

U2000 Server

Local server

ftpuser

d:\ftp

NOTE

l

l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

This accou nt is used for file


The defaul t passw ord of the ftpuse r user is Chan geme _123. To ensure the syste m securit y, run the User Mana ger.ba t comm and to chang e the passw ord imme diatel y after you log in to the syste m for the first time.

Path

Aft er the U2 000 is inst alle d, the def ault FT P ho me dire ctor y is d:. Yo u can ma nua lly cha nge the def ault FT P ho me dire ctor y to ano ther dire ctor y suc h as

365


Account Name

Accoun t Type

Account Function s


Server Name

Server IP Address

transfe r betwe en the U2000 and NEs. It is autom aticall y create d during U2000 install ation and can be directl y used.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


FTP User Name

Main Direct ory

Path

e: \ftp . l

Do not set the FT P ho me dire ctor y to d: \oss (U2 000 inst alla tion dire ctor y) or c: (sy ste m dire ctor y).

366


Account Name

Accoun t Type

Account Function s

Default access TL1 account

Thirdparty FTP account

l

This accou nt is used to transfe r access domai n servic e provisi oning (xDSL , xPON, broadb and, and narro wband


Server Name

Server IP Address

FTP User Name

Main Direct ory

TL1

FTP/ SFTP server's IP address provided

FTP/ SFTP user name provide d by an

FTP/ SFTP user passwo rd provid

by an upperlayer OSS for managin g the TL1 service

upperlayer OSS for managi ng the TL1 service

ed by an upperlayer OSS for managi ng the TL1 service

Path

servic es), invent ory query, and servic e provisi oning files to an upperlayer OSS. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

This accou nt can be used only after being config ured.


367


Account Name

Accoun t Type

Account Function s

Default OSS PMS Account


l

This accou nt is used to upload an IPMS perfor mance file collect ed by the U2000 to an upperlayer OSS.

l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


Server Name

Server IP Address

FTP User Name

Main Direct ory

OSS_NBI




by an upperlayer OSS for managin g the IPMS performa nce file collected by the U2000

upperlayer OSS for managi ng the IPMS perfor mance file collecte d by the U2000

ed by an upperlayer OSS for managi ng the IPMS perfor mance file collect ed by the U2000



Path

368


Account Name

Accoun t Type

Account Function s

uTrafficPf mFTP


l

This accou nt is used to upload


Server Name

Server IP Address

FTP User Name

Main Direct ory

uTraffic Server




by an upperlayer OSS for managin g the IPMS performa nce file collected by the uTraffic

upperlayer OSS for managi ng the perfor mance file collecte d by the uTraffi c

ed by an upperlayer OSS for managi ng the perfor mance file collect ed by the uTraffi c

a perfor mance file collect ed by the uTraffi c to an upperlayer OSS. l


Path

After the U2000 is installed, eight default FTP applications are available. The following table lists information about the default FTP applications. Table C-2 Information about the default FTP applications

Application N ame

Default FTP A ccount

Description

ONT LOAD


The FTP service is configured and tested to ensure the normal operation of the ONT automatic upgrade tasks or value-added services.

PMS BulkCollector FTP Account

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)



The FTP service is used to collect NE performance data in batches for analysis and statistics collection on the U2000.

369



Application N ame

Default FTP A ccount

Description

NE Software Management


The FTP service is configured and tested to ensure normal NE data transmission among the U2000 client, server, and NEs and implement NE data backup and NE software upgrade/degrade.

NE License Management


The FTP service is configured and tested to ensure normal license file transmission between the U2000 and NEs and implement NE license upload and management.

Information Collection of Device Fault Diagnosis


The FTP service is used to collect NE fault diagnosis data for analysis and statistics collection on the U2000.

TL1

DefaultaccessTL1 account

The FTP service is used to transfer access-domain service provisioning (xDSL, xPON, broadband, and narrowband services), inventory query, and service provisioning files to an upper-layer OSS for analysis and

Perf-FTP/SFTP

Default OSS PMS Account

The FTP service is used to upload a performance file collected by the U2000 to an upper-layer OSS for analysis and statistics collection.

TransNetwork Perf-FTP/ SFTP

uTrafficPfmFTP

The FTP service is used to upload a performance file collected by the uTraffic to an upper-layer OSS for analysis and statistics collection.

statistics collection.

C.5.2 Procedure for Configuring and Testing the FTP Service on the U2000 This topic describes the procedure for configuring and testing the FTP service on the U2000. After the U2000 is installed, each application of the FTP service obtains a default FTP account that is bound to a default FTP user. To enable an application to use the FTP service with its own FTP account, create an FTP user and an FTP account mapped to the user, and then add the FTP account to the application. You are advised to use the default FTP account, without adding any new FTP user. Figure C-3 shows the procedure for configuring and testing the FTP service. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


370



Figure C-3 Procedure for configuring and testing the FTP service on the U2000

C.5.3 Checking the Startup Status of FTP Servers (Windows) This topic describes how to check the startup status of local and third-party FTP servers. If the involved FTP server has not been started, start it manually.

Prerequisites FTP servers are functioning properly, and the FTP/SFTP service has been installed.

Context l

The U2000 supports both local and third-party FTP servers. If over 5,000 NEs are managed, you are advised to use third-party FTP servers to transfer files between the U2000 and NEs.

l

This topic focuses on how to check the startup status of a local FTP server. If a thirdparty FTP server is used, ensure that FTP-related software has been installed and configured on the server. For details about how to install and configure the software, see A.5.17 How to Configure the FTP or SFTP Service on Windows OS .

l

If a local FTP server is used, the FTP service is automatically installed, and the ftpuser user is automatically created during U2000 installation. The ftpuser user is a default user of the FTP service that is enabled by default. If a local FTP server is used, the OpenSSH software is automatically installed during U2000 installation. In addition, the SFTP service is automatically installed, and the ftpuser and sshd users are automatically created. –

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

ftpuser: default user of the SFTP service that is enabled by default. This user is created by the U2000. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

371



sshd: user of the SSH service that is disabled by default. This user is automatically created during OpenSSH installation.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the operating system as a user with ossuser rights. Step 2 Use the FTP software (for example, FileZilla) to connect to the U2000 server. If the connection is successful, the FTP service has started. If the connection fails, the FTP service has not started. ----End


Enable the FTP service. a.


b.

Access the D:\oss\server\3rdTools\ftp path and rename the Start_Apache_ftp.bat script under the ftp folder. For example, change the script name to Start_Apache_ftp_win.bat.

c.

Execute the Start_Apache_ftp_win.bat script. NOTE

l

l


l

Enabling the uflight_dispatcher script causes the FTP service to be automatically enabled. To prevent the the FTP service to be automatically enabled, you must rename the Start_Apache_ftp.bat script.

l

If the FTP service is enabled for the first time, you must rename the script, as described in Step 2. Renaming the Start_Apache_ftp.bat Start_Apache_ftp.bat script is not required later.

Disable the FTP service. a.


b.

Access the D:\oss\server\3rdTools\ftp path and rename the Uninstall_ftp_win.bat script under the ftp folder. For example, change the script name to Uninstall_Apache_ftp_win.bat.

c.

Execute the Uninstall_Apache_ftp_win.bat script. NOTE l


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

l

Enabling the uflight_dispatcher script causes the FTP service to be automatically enabled. To prevent the the FTP service to be automatically enabled, you must rename the Uninstall_ftp_win.bat script.

l

If the FTP service is disabled for the first time, you must rename the script, as described in Step 2. Renaming the Uninstall_ftp_win.bat script is not required later. Uninstall_ftp_win.bat


372



C.5.4 Creating an FTP User After the U2000 is installed, each FTP service application has a default FTP account and the account is bound to a default FTP user. To use an independent FTP account for an application, you must create an FTP user.

Prerequisites l

The OS and database must run properly. Programs >Manager Microsoft If the >database is not started, > All 2008 Configuration Toolschoose > SQL Start Server Configuration > SQL SQL Server Server Services , right-click SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) and choose Start to start the database. If the database has been started, this step is not required.

l

The processes of the U2000 must be properly started. If U2000 services have not been started, double-click the U2000 Server shortcut icon on the desktop or run the startnms.bat file in the %IMAP_ROOT%\platform\bin to start U2000 services manually.

Context l

This topic describes how to create an FTP user on a local FTP server instead of a thirdparty server. To use a third-party FTP user for an application, you must ensure that the FTP user has been successfully created and can be used.

l

When the U2000 is installed, the system installs an FTP user named ftpuser by default. This user supports FTP/SFTP services.

l

Newly created FTP users support only FTP services in a Windows environment.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the U2000 server operating system as a user with ossuser rights. Step 2 Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter the cmd command to access the CLI. Step 3 Perform the following operations to create an FTP account: 1.

In the CLI, enter the following command to create an FTP account: > cd /d D:\oss\server\3rdTools\ftp\apacheftpserver\bin > UserManager.bat cfgname password rootpath NOTE

–

In this command, the U2000 is installed on drive D. If the U2000 is installed on another drive, D in the command must be replaced with this drive letter.

– –

name specifies a name for an FTP user. passwordspecifies a password for an FTP user.

–

rootpathspecifies a root path for an FTP user.

–

Do not set the FTP home directory to d:\oss (U2000 installation directory) or c: (system directory).

–

For example, UserManager.bat cfg ftpusertester Changeme_123 d:\ftp is configured.

If the message "Config user success." is displayed, the creation is successful. 2. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

View the created FTP account. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

373



In D:\oss\server\3rdTools\ftp\apacheftpserver\res\conf, open the users notebook to view the latest created FTP account. ----End

Follow-up Procedure Perform the following step to delete an FTP user: l

Run the following command to delete the FTP account of the FTP user: > cd /d D:\oss\server\3rdTools\ftp\apacheftpserver\bin > UserManager.bat del name NOTE

name specifies the name of an FTP account to be deleted. For example, UserManager.bat del ftpusertesteris configured.

C.5.5 Creating an FTP Account and Adding it to an FTP Application This topic describes how to create an FTP account on a U2000 client and add the account to the associated FTP application. If no new FTP account is required, skip this topic.

Prerequisites l

You are an NMS user withOperator Group authority or higher.

l

On the FTP server, create an FTP user for the associated FTP application.

l

By default, the local FTP account and associated FTP application have been configured after a U2000 client is installed. Do not modify the default settings.

l

Multiple FTP applications can share one FTP account.

l

The procedure for creating new account NE Management FTP Account to be used for the NE Software Management application and binding the neftpuser user is used as an example.

Context

NOTICE If you enter an incorrect password for an FTP account for three consecutive times, the account will be locked for 30 minutes. Within this period, functions that require the FTP service will be unavailable, such as data synchronization and backup.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Administration > Settings > FTP Account Information Management from the main menu (traditional style); alternatively, double-click System Management in Application Center and choose Settings > FTP Account Information Management from the main menu (application style).

Step 2 In the FTP Account Information Management dialog box, click the Configure FTP Account tab. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


374



Step 3 On the Configure FTP Account tab, add account NE Management FTP Account for the NE Software Management application.

1.

Right-click in a blank area and choose Add from the shortcut menu.

2.

In the Add FTP User dialog box, set parameters such as FTP Account, Server Name, and Server IP Address. –

FTP Account: name of the new account, for example, NE Management FTP Account

–

Server Type: running mode of the FTP service, for example, Local FTP Server

–

Server Name: name of the FTP server, for example,U2000 Server

–

User Name: name of the user used for the new account, for example, neftpuser

–

FTP Port: port number of the FTP service, for example, 21

–

SFTP Port: port number of the SFTP service, for example, 22

–

Password: password of the neftpuser user, for example, Changeme_123. To enhance system security, you need to regularly update the password and keep it well.

–

Home Directory: Home directory of the neftpuser user, for example,/opt/backup/ neftpboot

–

Path: relative path such as ftproot/dc where the neftpuser user stores files. The relative path and the home directory form the absolute path, such as /opt/backup/ neftpboot/ftproot/dc, where the neftpuser user stores files by default. NOTE

–

The account is created only for registration. The FTP user used for the account must be created on the FTP server before account creation; otherwise, the FTP account cannot be properly used after being created.

–

FTP user information configured in this step must be the same as that on the FTP server.

–

As SFTP is securer than FTP, SFTP is recommended when Server Typeis set to Third Party.

–

After the U2000 is installed, the default FTP home directory is d:. You can manually change the default FTP home directory to another directory such as e:\ftp.

–

Do not set the FTP home directory to d:\oss (U2000 installation directory) or c: (system directory).

3.

Click OK.

4.

In the Result dialog box, click Close.

Step 4 In the FTP Account Information Management dialog box, click the Configure FTP Application tab.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


375



NOTE

The FTP application Information Collection of Device Fault Diagnosis applies only to the access domain.

Step 5 On the Configure FTP Application tab, add NE Management FTP Account to the NE Software Management application.

1.

Right-click the NE Software Management application and choose Modify from the shortcut menu.

2.

In the Modify FTP Application dialog box, select NE Management FTP Account.

3.

Click OK.

4.

In the Result dialog box, click Close. NOTE l

One FTP application can use only one FTP account, and one FTP account can be bound to only one FTP user.

l

After NE Management FTP Account is added to the NE Software Management application, the default local FTP account is no longer used when NE Management FTP Account is used to transfer files.

----End


l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

If FTP account information on the FTP server changes, perform the following operations to modify FTP accounts on a U2000 client to keep consistency with those on the FTP server. Consistent FTP information ensures normal FTP services. Only the FTP accounts on a client are modified and the modifications do not affect FTP accounts on the FTP server. a.

Right-click a desired FTP account and choose Modify from the shortcut menu.

b.

In the Modify FTP User dialog box, modify parameters except FTP Account based on site requirements.

c.

Click OK.

d.

In the Result dialog box, click Close.

Perform the following operations to delete unused FTP accounts from a client, which does not affect FTP accounts on the FTP server: a.

Right-click a desired FTP account and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

b.

Click OK when the Warning dialog box is displayed indicating that the selected account will be deleted.

c.

In the Result dialog box, click Close. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

376



C.5.6 Testing the FTP Service After configuring FTP accounts used by FTP applications, you need to test the accounts to ensure that the FTP function operates properly on an FTP server. A normal FTP function ensures normal communication and file transfer between the FTP server and FTP client.

Prerequisites l

The FTP service on an FTP server has been enabled.

l

The user used FTP application has been created, and user information has beenFTP configured onfor thean FTP server.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Administration > Settings > FTP Account Information Management from the main menu (traditional style); alternatively, double-click System Management in Application Center and choose Settings > FTP Account Information Management from the main menu (application style).

Step 2 In the FTP Account Information Management dialog box, click the Configure FTP Account tab.

Step 3 On the Configure FTP Account tab, right-click a desired FTP account and choose Test from the shortcut menu to test whether the FTP function is available.

Step 4 In the dialog box that is displayed, click Test FTP or Test SFTP to test the FTP or SFTP function of the FTP server. l

If the test succeeds, click Close in the Result dialog box.

l

If the test fails, verify that the FTP user exists on the server, the FTP user name and password are correct, the FTP service has been started, and the directory rights are correct. Then test the FTP service again. NOTE l

When adding or modifying an FTP account, you can click Testto test the new or modified FTP account.

l

If the test succeeds, the FTP user information on the client is the same as that on the server, and the client can properly communicate with the server.

----End

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


377


D

D Starting the U2000 Server in a Windows Single-Server System

Starting the U2000 Server in a Windows Single-Server System The U2000 server can be started in three steps: power on the server safely, start the database, and start the U2000 server processes. D.1 Powering On the Server Safely This topic describes how to power on the server in a Windows single-server system safely. Power on the IBM X3650 M4, IBM X3650 M3 or IBM X3850 X5 on condition that the power supply is normal. D.2 Starting the Database This topic describes how to start the database in a Windows single-server system. The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. D.3 Starting the U2000 Server Processes This topic describes how to start the U2000 server processes in a Windows single-server system. You can log in to the U2000 to manage a network only after starting the U2000 server processes on the computer on which the U2000 is installed.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


378



D.1 Powering On the Server Safely This topic describes how to power on the server in a Windows single-server system safely. Power on the IBM X3650 M4, IBM X3650 M3 or IBM X3850 X5 on condition that the power supply is normal. 1.


NOTICE l


l


l


2.


3.

Wait 2 to 3 minut es. When the green indicator on the front panel of the server blinks every 1s, press the power button on the shelf of the server. NOTE

If the power button is steady on, the server has been successfully powered on. For details about IBM server indicators, see the manual for IBM servers or log in to the official IBM website. For details about Huawei server indicators, see the manual for Huawei servers or log in to the official Huawei website. For official websites of software and hardware documents, see A.5.19 How Do I Obtain Third-Party Software and Hardware Materials? .

The red boxes in the following figures show the positions of power buttons on Huawei RH2288H V2, Huawei RH5885H V3, IBM X3650 M4, IBM X3650 M3 and, IBM X3850 X5. Figure D-1 Position of the power button on Huawei RH5885H V3 server

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


379



Figure D-2 Position of the power button on Huawei RH2288H V2 server

Figure D-3 Position of the power button on IBM X3650 M4

Figure D-4 Position of the power button on IBM X3650 M3

Figure D-5 Position of the power button on IBM X3850 X5

D.2 Starting the Database This topic describes how to start the database in a Windows single-server system. The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started.

Prerequisites The OS has been started. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


380



Context Generally, the database starts along with the OS.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the OS as administrator. NOTE

The database can be started or stopped only by administrator .

Step 2 Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools> SQL Server Configuration Manager > SQL Server Services.

Step 3 Right-click SQL Server (MSSQLS ERVER) and choose Start from the shortcut menu. ----End

Result In the SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER), if Start is dimmed, Microsoft SQL Server 2008 is running.

Follow-up Procedure Open the task manager of the server and click the Processes tab to check whether the sqlserver.exe process is started by the dbuser user.

D.3 Starting the U2000 Server Processes This topic describes how to start the U2000 server processes in a Windows single-server system. You can log in to the U2000 to manage a network only after starting the U2000 server processes on the computer on which the U2000 is installed.

Prerequisites The OS on the computer on which the U2000 server processes are installed is running properly, and the database has been started.

Context l

Generally, the U2000 server processes start along with the OS.

l

Only one default NMS user, admin, is provided during U2000 software installation. The admin user is a U2000 administrator with the highest rights on the U2000 system.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with ossuser rights. Step 2 View the startup information about the U2000 server processes. 1.


2.


Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


381


3.




30616 RDP-Tcp#1

3

4392 RDP-Tcp#1

3

27224 RDP-Tcp#1

3

36812 RDP-Tcp#1

3

29472 RDP-Tcp#1

3

8368 RDP-Tcp#1

3

33732 RDP-Tcp#1

3

14920 RDP-Tcp#1

3

21572 RDP-Tcp#1

3

15980 RDP-Tcp#1

3

NOTE


–

11116 Services

0

11164 Services

0

10236 Services

0

8584 Services

0

26056 Services

0

13168 Services

0

If no command output is displayed, the U2000 process is not started. You can run the D:\oss\server\platform\bin\startnms.bat command in the CLI to start the U2000 process. NOTE n


n


Step 3 Check the running status of every process on the System Monitor client. 1.

Choose Start > All Programs > Network Management System > U2000 System Monitor or click the shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U2000 System Monitor client.

2.

In the Login dialog box, enter a user name and a password. NOTE

Two data transmission modes are available: Common and Security(SSL)(more secure, recommended). The default data transmission mode is Security(SSL) . For details, see section A. 5.13 How to Set the Communication Mode on the U2000 server for the Single-Server System (Windows)to query or change the communication mode of the server. The initial password of the admin user is Changeme_123(It is Admin_123for a U2000 that comes preinstalled). The password must be changed during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it regularly.

----End Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


382



Result l

If the U2000 services with the startup type of Automatic have started properly, the U2000 runs properly.

l

If some services have not started, select them, right-click, and choose Start the Service from the shortcut menu.

l

If the U2000 does not run properly, contact Huawei engineers.


The network management system maintenance suite is used for U2000 commissioning, maintenance, and redeployment. Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights, in the Windows Task Manager dialog box, check whether msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe are listed. –


–

If the two processes are not listed, the MSuite server has not started. Navigate to the D:\oss\engr\engineering directory of U2000 server and double-click startserver.bat to start the MSuite server.

l

If login to a U2000 client fails, see A.6.2 Failure to Log In to the U2000 Server from a U2000 Client to resolve the problem.

l

The installation is not complete if any of the preceding checks are not passed. For details, see A.6.11 How to Address the U2000 Installation or Uninstallation Failure .

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


383


E

E Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows)

Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows) Three steps are required to shut down the U2000 server: stop the U2000 server processes, shut down the database, and power off the server safely. E.1 Stopping the U2000 Server Processes Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop the U2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system time of the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes how to stop the U2000 server processes on the Windows single-server system. E.2 Shutting Down the Database The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down the database, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the database on the Windows single-server system. E.3 Powering Off the Server Safely Before shutting down the U2000 server, stop the U2000 server processes and the database. This topic describes how to power off the Windows single-server system safely.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


384



E.1 Stopping the U2000 Server Processes Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop the U2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system time of the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes how to stop the U2000 server processes on the Windows single-server system.

Prerequisites Exit all running U2000 clients.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with ossuser rights. NOTE

If the server is started by the administrator, switch to the administrator and log in to the OS to disable the server.

Step 2 Ensure that the U2000 is not running. 1.


2.


3.



–

If information similar to the following is displayed, the U2000 process is not stopped. In the CLI, run the D:\oss\server\platform\bin\stopnms.bat command to stop the U2000 process. imapmrb.exe 19,252 K imapeventmgr.exe 19,812 K imapsysd.exe 39,720 K imapwatchdog.exe 14,216 K ResourceMonitor.exe 25,024 K imap_sysmonitor.exe 36,628 K python.exe 21,216 K httpd.exe 11,140 K java.exe 92,424 K httpd.exe

30616 RDP-Tcp#1

3

4392 RDP-Tcp#1

3

27224 RDP-Tcp#1

3

36812 RDP-Tcp#1

3

29472 RDP-Tcp#1

3

8368 RDP-Tcp#1

3

33732 RDP-Tcp#1

3

14920 RDP-Tcp#1

3

21572 RDP-Tcp#1

3

15980 RDP-Tcp#1

3

16,476 K

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


385



NOTE n



n


n


----End

Result If no command output is displayed after the daem_ps command is executed, the U2000 process has stopped.

E.2 Shutting Down the Database The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down the database, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the database on the Windows single-server system.

Prerequisites The U2000 server processes must have been stopped.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the OS as administrator. NOTE

The database can be started or stopped only by administrator .

Step 2 Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools> SQL Server Configuration Manager > SQL Server Services.

Step 3 Right-click SQL Server (MSSQLS ERVER) and choose Stop to stop the database. ----End

Result Two methods are available for checking whether the SQL Server database can connect normally. l

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

Through the CLI: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

386



a.

Choose Start > Run.

b.

In the Run dialog box, enter cmd. A command line interface (CLI) is displayed.

c.

Run the following commands: > isql -Usa -SDBSVR

In order to enhance the security of the database after the U2000 is installed, the sa user may be manually disabled and replaced with a customized administrator name, such as dbadmin. NOTE l


l


l

The prompt C:\> varies according to on-site conditions. If the system is logged in to as the dbuseruser, the default prompt is C:\Users\dbuaer>. You can run thecd command to switch the directory. A command example is C:\Users\dbuser> cd c:\ . The command prompt switches to c:\>.

If the displayed information includes 1>, you can connect to the database normally, that is, the database is shutted down. Otherwise, the database is started. l

Through the GUI: a.

Click Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > SQL Server Management Studio. The Connect to Server window is displayed.

b.

Set parameters according to the following information and then click Connect. n

Server type: Database Engine

n n

Server name: DBSVR Authentication: Windows Authentication

If the displayed SQL Server Management Studio window prompted, you can connect to the database normally, that is, the database is started. Otherwise, the database is shutted down.

E.3 Powering Off the Server Safely Before shutting down the U2000 server, stop the U2000 server processes and the database. This topic describes how to power off the Windows single-server system safely.

Prerequisites l

The U2000 server processes must have been stopped.

l

The database must have been shut down.

Procedure Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights. NOTE

If the server is started by the administrator, switch to the administrator and log in to the OS to disable the server.

Step 2 Choose Start > Shut down to shut down t he Windows OS. Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


387



Step 3 If a KVM is equipped, power off the KVM switcher. ----End

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


388


A

F

F Glossary and Abbreviations

Glossary and Abbreviations

access control list

A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource.

access control right

The level of right granted to a user for his access to certain items.

ACL

See access control list

advanced telecom application environment

A platform that is used by the hardware of the N2510. To expand the system capacity smoothly, you only need to add certain boards to the shelf and need not replace the server. This helps reduce the investments of the customer.

AIS Alarm

See Alarm Indication Signal A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes to cleared.

alarm acknowledgement

An operation performed on an alarm. Through this operation, the status of an alarm is changed from unacknowledged to acknowledged, which indicates that the user starts handling the alarm. The process during which when an alarm is generated, the operator needs to acknowledge the alarm and take the right step to clear the alarm.

alarm correlation rule analyzing

A process of analyzing the alarms that meet alarm correlation rules. If alarm 2 is generated within 5 seconds after alarm 1 is generated and meets the alarm correlation analysis rules, the EMS masks alarm 2 or improves its severity level according to the alarm correlation rules.

alarm delay time

The alarm delay time consists of the start delay time and the end delay time. When an NE detects an alarm for a period, the period is the start delay time. When an NE detects that the alarm disappears for a period, the period is the end delay time. Unnecessary alarms that are caused by error reports or jitters can be avoided by setting the delay time.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


389



alarm indication

On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board. (Metro)

Alarm Indication Signal

A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. Note: See ITU-T Rec. G.707/Y.1322 for specific AIS signals.

alarm mask

On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions for the system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meeting the conditions.

alarm reporting to the EMS immediately

On a device, an alarm is reported to the EMS at once after the alarm is generated. On the EMS client, the corresponding alarm information is displayed on the alarm panel.

alarm severity

The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-T recommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities:Critical, Major, Minor, Warning.

alarm status

The devices in the network report traps to the NMS, which displays the alarm statuses in the topological view. The status of an alarm can be critical, major, minor and prompt.

alarm synchronization

When alarm synchronization is implemented, the EMS checks the alarm information in its database and on the NEs. If the alarm information on the two locations is inconsistent, the alarm information on the NEs is synchronized to the EMS database to replace the srcinal records.

ALC link

A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (single station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfils optical power control on the line that contains the link.

ARP Proxy

When a host sends an ARP request to another host, the request is processed by the DSLAM connected to the two hosts. The process is called ARP proxy. This protocol helps save the bandwidth in the networking of a low-rate WAN or helps implement the layer 3 communication between access devices in the networking of layer 2 isolation.

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

A data transfer technology based on cell, in which packets allocation relies on channel demand. It supports fast packet switching to achieve efficient utilization of network resources. The size of a cell is 53 bytes, which consist of 48-byte payload and 5-byte header.

ATAE

See advanced telecom application environment

ATM

See Asynchronous Transfer Mode

Authority and Domain The function of the NMS for authority management. With this function, you can: Based Management

auto-negotiation

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

1.

Partition and control the management authority

2.

Manage device nodes and service data by region

3.

Allocate users with different management and operation rights for different regions

An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices to automatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.


390



B bandwidth

A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

BASE

A kind of bus or plane used to load software, transmit alarms and maintain information exchange.

basic input/output system

A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.

BFD

See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection

Bidirectional Forwarding Detection

A simple Hello protocol, similar to the adjacent detection in the route protocol. Two systems periodically send BFD detection messages on the channel between the two systems. If one system does not receive the detection message from the other system for a long time, you can infer that the channel is faulty. Under some conditions, the TX and RX rates between systems need to be negotiated to reduce traffic load.

BIOS

See basic input/output system

board

Board refers to an electronic part that can be plugged in to provide new capability. It comprises chips and electronic components and these components are always on a flat and hard base and connected through conductive paths. A board provides ports for upstream connections or service provisioning.

Bond

Bond: On the SUSE Linux OS, the bond technology is used to form a virtual layer between the physical layer and the data link layer. This technology allows two server NICs connecting to a switch to be bound to one IP address. The MAC addresses of the two NICs are also automatically bound as one MAC address. In this manner, a virtual NIC is formed. The bond technology supports two modes: double-live and primary/ secondary. In double-live mode, after receiving request data from a remote server, the virtual NIC on the server determines data transmission based on an algorithm, improving network throughput and usability of the server. In primary/secondary mode, if an NIC does not function properly, services will be automatically switched to the other NIC, ensuring service protection. The SUSE Linux OS supports the binding of NICs in primary/secondary mode.

C C/S

See client/server software architecture

CAR CAU

See committed access rate See Client Auto Update

CDE

See Common Desktop Environment

CIR

See Committed Information Rate

client

A device that sends requests, receives responses, and obtains services from the server.

Client Auto Update

This function helps you to automatically detect the update of the client version and upgrade the client. This keeps the version of the client is the same as that of the server.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


391



Client/Server

The model of interaction in a distributed system in which a program at one site sends a request to a program at another site and awaits a response. The requesting program is called a client. The program satisfying the request is called the server. It is usually easier to build client software than build the server software.

client/server software architecture

A message-based and modular software architecture that comprises servers and clients. Compared with the centralized, mainframe, and time sharing computing, the client/server software architecture improves the usability, flexibility, interoperability, and scalability. In this architecture, a client is defined as the party that requires services and a server is defined as the party that provides services. The client/server architecture reduces network traffic by providing a query response rather than transferring all files.

cluster

A mechanism adopted to improve the system performance. Several devices of the same type form a cluster. The exterior of a cluster is some like a kind of equipment. In the interior of a cluster, the nodes share the load.

committed access rate

A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined.

Committed Information Rate

The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket.

Common Desktop Environment

The Common Desktop Environment (CDE) is an integrated graphical user interface for open systems desktop computing. It delivers a single, standard graphical interface for the management of data and files (the graphical desktop) and applications. CDE's primary benefits -- and deriving from ease-of-use, consistency, configurability, portability, distributed design, protection of investment in today's applications -- make open systems desktop computers as easy to use as PCs, but with the added power of local and network resources available at the click of a mouse.

Common Object Request Broker Architecture

A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or ORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP, object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented.

Common Object Request Broker Architecture

A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or ORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP, object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented.

CORBA

See Common Object Request Broker Architecture

CORBA

See Common Object Request Broker Architecture

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


392



D Data Communication Channel

Data Communications Channel. The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCCM channel.

data communication

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data

network data replication link

communication function. A link used for data replication between the production machine and redundancy machine. It is separated from the network of the primary links.

DCC

See Data Communication Channel

DCN

See data communication network

DDN

See digital data network

Delay

An average time taken by the service data to transmit across the network.

DG

disk group

DHCP

See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

digital data network

A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology.

disk mirroring

A technique in which all or part of a hard disk is duplicated onto one or more other hard disks, each of which ideally is attached to its own controller. With disk mirroring, any change made to the srcinal disk is simultaneously made to the other disks so that if the srcinal disk becomes damaged or corrupted, the mirror disks will contain a current, undamaged collection of the data from the srcinal disk.

Dynamic Host A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration Configuration Protocol parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.

E E1

A European standard for high-speed data transmission at 2.048 Mbit/s. It provides 32 x 64 kbit/s channels.

ECC

See embedded control channel

embedded control

A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical

channel

layer, to enable transmission information between NEs. of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)

Equipment Serial Number

A 32-bit number assigned by the mobile station manufacturer, uniquely identifying the mobile station equipment.

ESN

See Equipment Serial Number

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


393



F Fabric

A kind of bus/plane used to exchange system service data.

File Transfer Protocol

A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server.

FTP

See File Transfer Protocol

G gateway

A device to connect two network segments which use different protocols. It is used to translate the data in the two network segments.

gateway network element

A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer

GE

The IEEE standard dubbed 802.3z, which includes support for transmission rates of1 Gbps (gigabit per second)--1,000 Mbps (megabits per second)--over an Ethernet network.

GMT

See Greenwich Mean Time

GNE

See gateway network element

graphical user interface

A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.

Greenwich Mean Time The mean solar time at the Royal Greenwich Observatory in Greenwich near London in England, which by convention is at 0 degrees geographic longitude. GUI

See graphical user interface

H HA

See High Availability

HA system

See high availability system

half-duplex

A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying.

High Availability

The ability of a system to continuously perform its functions during a long period, which may exceeds the suggested working time of the independent components. You can obtain the high availability (HA) by using the error tolerance method. Based on learning cases one by one, you must also clearly understand the limitations of the

high availability system History alarm

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

system that requires an HA ability and the degree to which the ability can reach. The high availability system (HA) system indicates that two servers are adopted by a same computer. When the primary server is faulty, the secondary server provides the environment on which the software runs through the related technology. The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories.


394


host


The computer system that is connected with disks, disk subsystems, or file servers and on which data is stored and I/Os are accessed. A host can be a large computer, server, workstation, PC, multiprocessor computer, and computer cluster system.

I IANA

See Internet assigned numbers authority

ICA

See independent computing architecture

ICMP IE

See Internet Control Message Protocol See Internet Explorer

IEEE

See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

iMAP

See integrated management application platform

independent computing architecture

An architecture that logically separates application execution from user interfaces to transmit only keyboard actions, mouse responses, and screen updates on the network.

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

integrated management application platform

N/A

International Standard One of two international standards bodies responsible for developing international Organization

data communications standards. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) works closely with the International Electro- technical Commission (IEC) to define standards of computing. They jointly published the ISO/IEC SQL-92 standard for SQL.

International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization

An organization that establishes recommendations and coordinates the development of telecommunication standards for the entire world.

Internet assigned numbers authority

The organization operated under the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP addressspace allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including autonomous system numbers.

Internet Control Message Protocol

A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).

Internet Explorer

Microsoft's Web browsing software. Introduced in October 1995, the latest versions of Internet Explorer include many features that allow you to customize your experience on the Web. Internet Explorer is also available for the Macintosh and UNIX platforms.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


395



Internet Protocol

The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an Internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

Internet Protocol Version 6

A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

inventory

A physical inventory in the U2000, that is, a physical resource such as a telecommunications room, rack, NE, subrack, board, subboard, port, optical module, fiber/cable, fiber and cable pipe, link resource, interface resource, access service, ONU, or NE e-label that can be managed on the U2000, and the relationship between resources.

IP

See Internet Protocol

IPv4

The abbreviation of Internet Protocol version 4. IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to 255.255.255.255. Each address consists of a network number, an optional subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the network or subnetwork. IPv4 addresses may also be represented using CIDR (Classless Inter Domain Routing).

IPv6

See Internet Protocol Version 6

ISO

See International Standard Organization

ITU-T

See International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization

J Java Virtual Machine

The environment in which Java programs run. The Java Virtual Machine gives Java programs a software-based computer they can interact with. Because the Java Virtual Machine is not a real computer but exists in software, a Java program can run on any physical computing platform.

JRE

Java runtime environment

JVM

See Java Virtual Machine

K keyboard, video, and mouse

A hardware device installed in the integrated configuration cabinet. KVM serves as the input and output device for the components inside the cabinet. It consists of a screen, a keyboard, and a mouse.

KVM

See keyboard, video, and mouse

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


396



L LAN

See Local Area Network

LCT

See Local Craft Terminal

LDAP

See Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

License

A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, and durability of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license consists of encrypted codes, and the operation authority varies with different

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

level of license. An TCP/IP based network protocol that enables access to a DSA. It involves some reduced functionality from X.500 DAP specification.

Link Layer Discovery Protocol

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is an L2D protocol defined in IEEE 802.1ab. Using the LLDP, the NMS can rapidly obtain the Layer 2 network topology and changes in topology when the network scales expand.

LLDP

See Link Layer Discovery Protocol

load balancing

The distribution of activity across two or more servers or components in order to avoid overloading any one with too many requests or too much traffic.

Local Area Network

A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Local Craft Terminal

Local Craft Terminal. The terminal software that is used for local maintenance and the management of NEs in the singer-user mode, to realize integrated management of multi-service transmission network. See also U2000.

M MAN

See Metropolitan Area Network

MD5

See Message-Digest Algorithm 5

MDP

See message dispatch process

message dispatch process

N/A

Message-Digest Algorithm 5

A one-way hashing algorithm that produces a 128-bit hash. Both MD5 and Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA) are variations on MD4 and are designed to strengthen the security of the MD5 hashing algorithm.

Metropolitan Area Network

A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN). The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


397



modem

A device or program that enables a computer to transmit data over, for example, telephone or cable lines. Computer information is stored digitally, whereas information transmitted over telephone lines is transmitted in the form of analog waves. A modem converts between these two forms.

MS

Manual Switch

MSTP

See multi-service transmission platform

MSuite

NMS maintenance suite

multi-service transmission platform

A platform based on the SDH platform, capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM services, ATM services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management of these services.

N NBI

See northbound interface

NE

See network element

network element

A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board.

network layer

The network layer is layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the TCP/IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.

Network Management System

A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.

Network Time Protocol

The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. It synchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client.

new technology file system

An advanced file system designed for use specifically with the Windows NT operating system. It supports long filenames, full security access control, file system recovery, extremely large storage media, and various features for the Windows NT POSIX subsystem. It also supports object-oriented applications by treating all files as objects with user-defined and system-defined attributes.

NMS

See Network Management System

northbound interface

The interface that connects to the upper-layer device to realize service provisioning, report alarms and performance statistics.

NTFS

See new technology file system

NTP

See Network Time Protocol

O OAM

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

See operation, administration and maintenance


398



Object Set

A collection of managed objects. Object sets are established to facilitate the user right management. If a user (or user group) is authorized with the operation rights of an object set, the user (or user group) can perform all the authorized operations on all the objects within the object set. This saves you the trouble of setting the management rights for each NE one by one. Object sets can be created by geographical area, network layer, equipment type and so on.

OMC

See Operation and Maintenance Center

ONU

See Optical Network Unit

Operation and Maintenance Center

An Operations and Maintenance Centre is an element within a network management system responsible for the operations and maintenance of a specific element or group of elements. For example an OMC-Radio may be responsible for the management of a radio subsystem where as an OMC-Switch may be responsible for the management of a switch or exchange. However, these will in turn be under the control of a NMC (Network Management Centre) which controls the entire network.

Operation Rights

Operation Rights specify the concrete operation that the user can perform. The operation right aims at the security objects. If one user has no right to manage one device, he or she cannot operate the device.

Operation Set

A collection of operations. Classifying operations into operation sets helps to manage user operation rights. Operations performed by different users have different impacts on system security. Operations with similar impacts are classified into an operation set. Users or user groups entitled to an operation set can perform all the operations in the operation set. The NMS provides some default operation sets. If the default operation sets cannot meet the requirements for right allocation, users can create operation sets as required.

Operation System

Operation System is abbreviated to OS. OS is the interface between users and computers. It manages all the system resources of the computer, and also provides an abstract computer for users. With the help of OS, users can use the computers without any direct operation on hardware. For the computer system, OS is a set of programs used to manage all system resources; for users, OS provides a simple and abstract method to use the system resources.

operation, administration and maintenance

A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers.

Operations Support System

A system whose main function is to run applications that manage network elements, networks and services.

Optical Network Unit

A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to individual subscribers.

OS

See Operation System

OSS

See Operations Support System

P packet loss ratio

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)

The ratio of total lost packet outcomes to total transmitted packets in a population of interest. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

399


packet transport network

N/A

PC

See Personal Computer


Peak Information Rate Peak Information Rate . A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. Personal Computer

A computer used by an individual at a time in a business, a school, or at home.

PIR

See Peak Information Rate

PMU The unit that is used to monitor power supply in the equipment. Point-to-Point Protocol PPPoE, point-to-point protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulating over Ethernet PPP frames in Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with DSL services. It offers standard PPP features such as authentication, encryption, and compression. port

Power and environment monitoring unit

1.

Of a device or network, a point of access where signals may be inserted or extracted, or where the device or network variables may be observed or measured. (188)

2.

In a communications network, a point at which signals can enter or leave the network en

The power and environment monitoring unit is installed at the top of the cabinet of the SDH equipment and is used to monitor the environment variables, such as the power supply and temperature. With external signal input through the relay, fire alarm, smoke alarm, burglary alarm, etc. can be monitored as well. With the display on NMS system, the change of environment can be monitored timely and accurately. For the equipment installed with a power & environment monitoring board, the following parameters can be set: relay switch output control, temperature alarm threshold, relay usage and alarm setting, query of DIP switch status, etc.

PPPoE

See Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet

private network

A network which provides services to a specific set of users only (see Recommendation I.570).

PSTN

See public switched telephone network

PTN

See packet transport network

public switched telephone network

Public Switched Telephone Network. A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public subscribers.Sometimes called POTS.

R RADIUS

See remote authentication dial-in user service

RADIUS

See Remote Authentication Dial in User Service

RAID

See Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


400


Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks


A data storage scheme that allows data to be stored and replicated in a hardware disk group (logical hard disk) consisting of multiple hard disks (physical hard disks). When multiple physical disks are set up to use the RAID technique, they are said to be in a RAID array. The hard disks in a RAID array provides higher data reliability and input/ output performance. There are various defined levels of RAID, each offering differing trade-offs among access speed, reliability, and cost. At present, there are seven basic RAID levels from RAID 0 to RAID 6. These basic RAID levels can be further combined to form new RAID levels, such as RAID 10 (a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 1).

Remote Authentication RADIUS was srcinally used to manage the scattered users who use the serial Dial in User Service interface and modem, and it has been widely used in NAS. NAS delivers the information of users on authentication, authorization and accounting to the RADIUS server. RADIUS stipulates how the user and accounting information is transferred between NAS and RADIUS. The RADIUS server is responsible for receiving the connection request from users to complete authentication, and returning the configurations of the users to NAS. remote authentication dial-in user service

A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized access control mechanism. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its transmission protocol to ensure real-time quality. RADIUS also supports the retransmission and multi-server mechanisms to ensure good reliability.

replicated volume group

N/A

replication link

A link used for data replication between the production machine and redundancy machine. It is physically separated from the network of the primary links.

Rlink RTN

See data replication link Radio Transmission Node

RVG

See replicated volume group

S Script file

It is the text file describing the physical information and configuration information of the entire network, including the NE configuration file, port naming file, end-to-end configuration file, NE physical view script file, NMS information file and service implementation data script file.

SDH

See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)

A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.

Secure Shell (SSH)

A set of standards and an associated network protocol that allows establishing a secure channel between a local and a remote computer. A feature to protect information and provide powerful authentication function for a network when a user logs in to the network through an insecure network. It prevents IP addresses from being deceived and plain text passwords from being captured.

Secure Sockets Layer

A protocol for ensuring security and privacy in Internet communications. SSL supports authentication of client, server, or both, as well as encryption during a communications session.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


401



Security Log

Security logs record the security operations on the NMS, such as logging in to the server, modifying the password, and exiting from the NMS server.

Serial Line Interface Protocol

Serial Line Interface Protocol, defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnection function with a known IP address.

server

1.

On a local area network, a computer running administrative software that controls access to the network and its resources, such as printers and disk drives, and provides resources to computers functioning as workstations on the network.

2.

On the Internet or other network, a computer or program that responds to commands from a client. For example, a file server may contain an archive of data or program files; when a client submits a request for a file, the server transfers a copy of the file to the client.

3.

A network device that provides service s to network users by managing shared resources, often used in the context of a client-server architecture for a LAN.

SFTP

See Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)

SSH

See Secure Shell (SSH)

shelf management module

The shelf management board of the ATAE server.

Signal Noise Ratio

The SNR or S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

Signal to Noise Ratio

The signal-to-noise ratio margin represents the amount of increased received noise (in

Margin

dB) relative toaccounting the noise power the system is designed to design. tolerate and still meet the target BER of for allthat coding gains included in the

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

The TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocol which facilitates the transfer of electronic-mail messages, specifies how two systems are to interact, and the format of messages used to control the transfer of electronic mail.

Simple Network Management Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.

Simple Network Time Protocol

A protocol that is adapted from the Network Time Protocol (NTP) and synchronizes the clocks of computers over the Internet.

SLIP

See Serial Line Interface Protocol

SMM

See shelf management module

SMTP

See Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

SNMP

See Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR

See Signal Noise Ratio

SNRM

See Signal to Noise Ratio Margin

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


402



SNTP

See Simple Network Time Protocol

SONET

See Synchronous Optical Network

SQL

See structured query language

SSL

See Secure Sockets Layer

static route

A route that cannot adapt to the change of network topology. Operators must configure it manually. When a network topology is simple, the network can work in the normal state if only the static route is configured. It can improve network performance and ensure bandwidth for important applications. Its disadvantage is as follows: When a network is faulty or the topology changes, the static route does not change automatically. It must be changed by the operators.

Stelnet

Secure Shell Telnet

structured query language

A database query and programming language widely used for accessing, querying, updating, and managing data in relational database systems.

SVM

Solaris Volume Manager

Switching restoration time

It refers to the period of time between the start of detecting and the moment when the line is switched back to the srcinal status after protection switching occurs in the MSP sub-network.

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to highspeed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

Synchronous Optical Network

Synchronous Optical Network, is a method for communicating digital information using lasers or light-emitting diodes (LEDs) over optical fiber. The method was developed to replace the Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) system for transporting large amounts of telephone and data traffic and to allow for interoperability between equipment from different vendors. SONET defines interface standards at the physical layer of the OSI seven-layer model. The standard defines a hierarchy of interface rates that allow data streams at different rates to be multiplexed. SONET establishes Optical Carrier (OC) levels from 51.8 Mbps (OC-1) to 9.95 Gbps (OC-192).

SYSLOG

Syslog is an industry standard protocol for recording device logs.

T TCP

See Transmission Control Protocol

TCP/IP

See Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

Telecommunication Management Network

The Telecommunications Management Network is a protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications network.An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services.

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


403



Telnet

Standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet is used for remote terminal connection, enabling users to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local system. Telnet is defined in RFC 854.

TFTP

See Trivial File Transfer Protocol

Time zone

A division of the earth's surface, usually extending across 15 degrees of longitude devised such that the standard time is the time at a meridian at the centre of the zone.

timing task management

The system can create a timing task (such as backing up, loading and recovering a task), run a timing task automatically, and suspend or resume a timing task.

TMN

See Telecommunication Management Network

Transmission Control Protocol

One of the core protocols of the Internet protocol suite. Using TCP, applications on networked hosts can create connections to one another, over which they can exchange streams of data. TCP guarantees reliable and in-order delivery of data from the sender to the receiver. TCP also distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications running on the same host.

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

Common name for the suite of protocols developed to support the construction of worldwide internetworks.

Trivial File Transfer Protocol

A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP is small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines.

U UDP

See User Datagram Protocol

UPS

Uninterruptible Power Supply

User Datagram Protocol

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.

V VCS

See Veritas Cluster Server

Veritas Cluster Server

A High-availability cluster software, for Unix, Linux and Microsoft Windows computer systems, created by Veritas Software. It provides application cluster capabilities to systems running Databases, file sharing on a network, electronic commerce websites or other applications.

Veritas Volume Manager

A software product from veritas Inc.. The Veritas Volume Manager is used to manage disk storage.

Veritas Volume Replicator

A wide area network data replication solution offered by VERITAS for multiple operating systems. These include. AIX, HPUX and Solaris .

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


404



Virtual Local Area Network

A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet.

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

A protocol used for multicast or multicast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP address. The host in the network communicates with other networks through this virtual router. If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers become the active one and provides routing service for the host in the network.

VLAN

See Virtual Local Area Network

volume

A logical unit for disk virtualization management, and basic object for host applications.

VRRP

See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

VVM

See Veritas Volume Manager

W WAN

See Wide Area Network

wavelength division multiplexing

A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.

WDM

See wavelength division multiplexing

Wide Area Network

A network connected composed through of computers which are far WAN away covers from each otherarea, which areas a physically specific protocols. a broad such province, a state or even a country.

Wireless Local Area Network

A generic term covering a multitude of technologies providing local area networking via a radio link. Examples of WLAN technologies include WiFi (Wireless Fidelity), 802.11b and 802.11a, HiperLAN, Bluetooth, etc.

WLAN

See Wireless Local Area Network

work station

A terminal or microcomputer, usually one that is connected to a mainframe or to a network, at which a user can perform applications.

WS

See work station

Issue 04 (2016-06-20)


405

IManager U2000 V200R015C60 Single-Server System Software Installation and Commissioning Gui

Recommend Documents